GE Vivid 7 - Service Manual

GE Medical Systems
Technical Publication
Part Number FC091194 Revision 02 GE Medical Systems Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Service Manual
Copyright 2002 General Electric Co. All rights reserved
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02
VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL
IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS
LANGUAGE
THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY. IF A CUSTOMERS SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMERS RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS. CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE NEST DISPONIBLE QUEN ANGLAIS. SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE LANGLAIS, CEST AU CLIENT QUIL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. NE PAS TENTER DINTERVENTION SUR LES QUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE NA PAS T CONSULT ET COMPRIS. LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRANER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, LOPRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES DES DANGERS LECTRIQUES, MCANIQUES OU AUTRES. DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE BERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENST-HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.
WARNING
AVERTISSEMENT
WARNUNG
iii
AVISO
ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SLO EXISTE EN INGLS. SI ALGN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIN. NO SE DEBER DAR SERVICIO TCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELCTRICAS, MECNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA. ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA S SE ENCONTRA DISPONVEL EM INGLS. SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIO DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA, QUE NO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIOS DE TRADUO. NO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTNCIA TCNICA. O NO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANA DO TCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A CHOQUES ELTRICOS, MECNICOS OU OUTROS. IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELLAPPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALLADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALLUTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.
ATENO
AVVERTENZA
iv
DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION
(For USA Only) All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent write Damage In Shipment on ALL copies of the freight or express bill BEFORE delivery is accepted or signed for by a GE representative or hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. For USA Only: Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (262) 785-5052 or 8*323 5052 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. For USA Only: Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section S of the Policy And Procedures Bulletins. 14 July 1993
CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

(For USA Only) All electrical Installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations and testing shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GEs electrical work on these products will comply with the requirements of the applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GEs field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
OMISSIONS & ERRORS

If there are any omissions, errors or suggestions for improving this documentation, please contact the GE Medical Systems Global Documentation Group with specific information listing the system type, manual title, part number, revision number, page number and suggestion details. E-mail the information to : [email protected] GE Medical Systems employees should use the Customer Quality Assurance (CQA) System to report all documentation omissions, errors or suggestions.
vi
Revision History
REVISION
01 02
DATE
11. JUN. 2002 30. AUG. 2002
REASON FOR CHANGE

Covers both Vivid 7 and Vivid 7 PRO Replaces Vivid 7 Service Manual, Part Number FB091202 Updated per BT02-M4 release. Included description for BEP-2.
vii
List of Effected Pages
Pages
Title Page Warnings iii to vi Rev History/LOEP vii to viii 1-1 to 1-40 2-1 to 2-12 3-1 to 3-58
Revision
02 02 02 02 02 02
Pages
4-1 to 4-66 5-1 to 5-104 6-1 to 6-8 7-1 to 7-70 8-1 to 8-56
Revision
02 02 02 02 02
Pages
9-1 to 9-37 10-1 to 10-26 Back Cover
Revision
02 02 N/A
viii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 Introduction
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Purpose of Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1 Typical Users of the Service Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Models Covered by this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 2 Purpose of Operator Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7 Important Conventions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Conventions Used in Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 8 Standard Hazard Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 9 Product Icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10 Safety Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 Human Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 Mechanical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 12 Electrical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13 Labels Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 14 Dangerous Procedure Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 36 Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 36 EMC, EMI, and ESD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Interference (EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37 CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 37 Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 38 Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 38 System Manufacture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 39
Table of Contents
ix
CHAPTER 2 Pre-Installation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 General Console Requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Console Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2 Electrical Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 3 EMI Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4 Probes Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Time and Manpower Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6 Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Purchaser Responsibilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7 Required Facility Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 8 Desirable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 9 Networking Pre-installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 10
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 3 Installation
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Installation Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Average Installation Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 Installation Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3 Receiving Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 4 Unpacking Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 5 Transportation Box Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 7 Preparing for Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 EMI Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 8 Completing the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect Telephone Line to Modem Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect ECG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect Phono . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect Pulse Pressure Transducer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connect Ethernet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power ON/Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Switching OFF the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Available Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
3-8 3-8 3-9 3 - 10 3 - 10 3 - 11 3 - 11 3 - 12 3 - 12 3 - 13 3 - 14 3 - 17 3 - 17 3 - 21 3 - 22 3 - 28 3 - 32 3 - 32 3 - 32

xi
Software Options Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 33 Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35 Physical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 35 Connectivity Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 37 Installation Paperwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56 User Manual(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56 Complete the Post Delivery Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 56 Post Delivery Check List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 57
xii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 Special Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 General Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power ON/ Boot Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Shut Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Labeling Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Formatting Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Verifying Removable Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Archiving and Loading Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Basic Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2D Mode (B mode) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Color Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Doppler Mode Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Contrast Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stress Echo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measurements and Multi Image Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi Image Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe/Connectors Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ECG Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cineloop Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Backend Processor Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Peripheral Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Functions Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4-2 4-5 4-9 4 - 10 4 - 11 4 - 11 4 - 12 4 - 14 4 - 14 4 - 14 4 - 16 4 - 17 4 - 24 4 - 28 4 - 34 4 - 40 4 - 46 4 - 46 4 - 47 4 - 49 4 - 50 4 - 51 4 - 52 4 - 56 4 - 57 4 - 61
Application Turnover Check List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63 Software Configuration Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 63 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 64 Power Supply Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 64 Power Supply Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 64
Table of Contents xiii
Site Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 65
xiv
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 3 Front End Processor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front End Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Phased and Linear Array Front End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitter Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mid Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Major Sub-Systems in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front End Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mid Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Flow and Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the Back End Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEP-1 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEP-1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEP-2 Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEP-2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCVIC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UPS Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal Storage Devices: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-5 5 - 11 5 - 12 5 - 13 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 14 5 - 15 5 - 16 5 - 17 5 - 18 5 - 19 5 - 19 5 - 20 5 - 20 5 - 22
Patient I/O (Physio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23 Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Jumpers and Dip-switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table of Contents
5 - 24 5 - 26 5 - 26 5 - 26 5 - 26 5 - 27 5 - 29
xv
Top Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 31 Peripherals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32 On-board Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32 External Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 32 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 33 Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34 Overall AC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 34 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35 AC Power Distribution Box (PWB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 35 DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 37 TX Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 41 Circuit Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 44 Relay Board, RLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 45 Transmitter Board, TX128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 47 Receiver Board, RX-128 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 50 Beamformer Board(s), BF-64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 53 Front End Controller Board, FEC-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 56 Transducer Bus Boards, XD BUS Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 61 RF & Tissue Processor Board, RFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 62 Spectrum Doppler Processor Board, SDP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 66 Image Port 2 Board, IMP2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 70 Backend Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 74 Patient I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 78 Internal I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 79 External I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 87 Interconnect Cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 90 Motherboard (Back Plane) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 92 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 93 Video Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95 PAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95 NTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95 System Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 95 Board Rack Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96 Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 96
xvi Table of Contents
Top Console Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description Vivid 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transportation of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location in the Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Description Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location in the Unit Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Service Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iLinq Interactive Platform Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Global Service User Interface (GSUI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5 - 97 5 - 97 5 - 97 5 - 98 5 - 100 5 - 100 5 - 101 5 - 101 5 - 101 5 - 102
Table of Contents
xvii
CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Power Supply Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1 Monitor Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Cautions and Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Access to Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Adjustment Procedure(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 2 Front End Alignment Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 When to do a Front End Alignment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 3 Direction Lock and Brake Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Front Caster Brakes Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 4 Direction Lock Adjustment Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 5 Rear Brakes Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
xviii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose of Chapter 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Software Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Service Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequently Asked Questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Procedure Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Service Diagnostic Interface (Ultrasound Interface) . . . . . . . . . . Service Home Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error Logs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exit From Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Diagnostics - Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC (Backend Processor) Diagnostics, Non-Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . PC (Backend Processor) Diagnostics, Interactive Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition Diagnostics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Test Diagnostics Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Start System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beamformer Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beamformer Calibration (Front End Alignment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7 - 17 7 - 23 7 - 28 7 - 29 7 - 31 7 - 32 7 - 42 7 - 43 7 - 43 7 - 43 7 - 44 7 - 45 7 - 47 7 - 53 7 - 59 7 - 59 7 - 59 7 - 60 7 - 61 7 - 65
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67 Console Troubleshooting Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67
Table of Contents
xix
CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1 Plastic Parts Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 Overview of Covers and Bumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 2 Side Covers Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3 Front Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5 Filter Cover Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6 Filter Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7 Lower Rear Cover Replacements Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8 SW Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 Customer Provided Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9 Tools Provided With Unit or After a Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11 Prepare MO Disks for Image Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 12 Move Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13 Prepare MO Disk for Patient Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15 Backup of Patient Database and User Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16 Recording of SW Option Keys, TCP/IP and Service Settings . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 18 Software Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24 FRU Replacement Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31 AC Transformer Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 31 AC Power Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 34 DC Power Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 36 TX Power Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 38 Rear Casters Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40 Front Casters Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45 Front Bumper Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 50 Brake Pedal Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51 Direction Lock Pedal Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 52 Brake Pedal and Direction Lock Assembly Replacement Procedures . . . . . 8 - 53 Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 54
xx
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1 List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2 Parts List Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 3 Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4 Plastic Parts, Airduct Cover and Cover Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5 Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 6 Control Panel Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 7 Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 8 Input /Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 9 PCB Boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 10 Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 12 Brake Assembly and Console Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 13 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 14 Electrical Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 23 Backend Processor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 24 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Printers On Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Footswitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 25 9 - 25 9 - 25 9 - 25 9 - 26 9 - 27
Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 28 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 29 Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 30

Table of Contents xxi
Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 31 Parts Lists for Bumper Kit, Frogleg (Vivid 7 ONLY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 32 Parts Lists for Column Cover Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 33 Accessory Box, Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 34 Accessory Box, SERVICE V7, US . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 36 Packing Parts for Reshipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 37
xxii
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 10 Periodic Maintenance

Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Purpose of Chapter 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1 Why do Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Keeping Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Quality Assurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Periodic Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 How often should PMs be performed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 2 Tools Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 4 System Periodic Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preliminary Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optional Diagnostic Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 5 10 - 5 10 - 6 10 - 7 10 - 7 10 - 8 10 - 9 10 - 9
Using a Phantom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 Electrical Safety Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GEMS Leakage Current Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grounding Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chassis Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Lead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Probe Leakage Current Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 10 10 - 10 10 - 11 10 - 12 10 - 12 10 - 14 10 - 16 10 - 17 10 - 18 10 - 20
When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23 IndeX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index - 1
Table of Contents
xxiii
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 This page was intentionally left blank.
xxiv
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction
Section 1-1 Overview
1-1-1 Purpose of Chapter 1
This chapter describes important issues related to safely servicing this ultrasound machine. The service provider must read and understand all the information presented here before installing or servicing a unit.
Table 1-1
Section
1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5
Contents in Chapter 1
Description
Overview Important Conventions Safety Considerations EMC, EMI, and ESD Customer Assistance
Page Number
1-1 1-8 1-12 1-37 1-38
1-1-2
Purpose of Service Manual

This Service Manual provides installation and service information for the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Ultrasound Scanning unit and contains the following chapters: 1.) Chapter 1 - Introduction: Contains a content summary and warnings. 2.) Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation: Contains any pre-installation requirements for the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. 3.) Chapter 3 - Installation: Contains installation procedure with installation checklist. 4.) Chapter 4 - Functional Checks: Contains functional checks that must be performed as part of the installation, or as required during servicing and periodic maintenance. 5.) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory): Contains block diagrams and functional explanations of the electronics. 6.) Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments: Contains instructions on how to make any available adjustments to the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. 7.) Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting: Provides procedures for running and diagnostic or related routines for the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. 8.) Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures: Provides disassembly procedures and reassembly procedures for all changeable FRU. 9.) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts: Contains a complete list of replacement parts for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. 10.)Chapter 10 - Periodic Maintenance: Provides periodic maintenance procedures for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Chapter 1 - Introduction
1-1
1-1-3
Typical Users of the Service Manual

Service Personnel (installation, maintenance, etc.). Hospitals Service Personnel Architectural Planners/Installation Planners (some parts of Chapter 2, Pre-Installation)
1-1-4
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Models Covered by this Manual

Table 1-2 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Models Covered in this Manual
DESCRIPTION
VIVID 7 (BT 01) VIVID 7 (BT 01) VIVID 7 PRO (BT 02) VIVID 7 PRO (BT 02) VIVID 7 (BT 02) VIVID 7 (BT 02)
GE VINGMED PART NUMBER

FB000030 FC000060 FC000180 FC000190 FC000200 FC000210
VOLTAGE
230 VAC 100 - 120 VAC 220 - 240 VAC 100 - 120 VAC 220 - 240 VAC 100 - 120 VAC
1-1-4-1
Overview Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. It also has provisions for analog input sources like ECG and phono, and a Doppler probe may be connected and used too. The unit can be used for: 2D Black and White imaging 2D Color Flow M-Mode Black and White imaging Color M-Mode Doppler a number of combinations of the above
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is a digital beam forming unit and can handle up to 192 element linear probes by use of multiplexing. Signal flow from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End, then to the Mid Processors and Backend Processor and finally to the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on a hard disk and all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk on power up.
1-2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-1-4-1 Overview (contd)
Monitor
Upper Panel With Stereo Loudspeakers Control Panel
B/w Video Printer
VCR Doppler (PEDOF) connector Probe Connectors Parking Slot
Brake Pedals
Patient I/O MO Disk CD-R Drive
Figure 1-1 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Major Components
1-3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-1-4-2 History - Hardware/Software Versions
Use Table 1-3 to verify the correct/needed revision on each card in the Card Rack.
Table 1-3
Required Revisions for Cards and Modules

Card Rack BT01 (sw. 1.0) BT01 (sw. 1.0 / 1.1 / 1.2) Func. Rev.
05
BT02 (sw. 2.0 / 2.1) Func. Rev.

05
Part Number
FA200985 FB200060
Name
Motherboard RLY-3
Func. Rev.
05
MCD
02 06
MCD
02 06
MCD
02 06
Comments
MCD rev. 07 includes a noisefix for use of PAMPTE probe. For Vivid 7 produced before June 3, 2002 and for Vivid 7 PRO Replacement for FB200170 used on Vivid 7 produced after June 3, 2002
FB200170
TX128-2.
FC200022 FB200831 FB200158 FB200900 FB200165 FB200140 FB200865 FB200991 FA200945 FB200574 FB200724
TX128-3 RX128-3B XDBUS-2 BF64 FEC-II RFT1 SDP IMP-2B Power, DC Power, TX (TXPS) AC Controller
01 F 01 A -
A 02 B 03 B,C 02 A 02 03 06
01 F 01 A -
A,B 02 C 03, 04 B,C 02 A,B 02 03 06/07
01 01 F 01 A -
01 A,B 02 C/D/E 03, 04 B, C, D 02 A,B 02 03 08
2x used 2x used
Both MCD rev. B, C and D may be used.
Covers both 100-120 VAC and 220-240 VAC AC Power supply for 100-120 VAC
FC200079
AC Power 100-120V
01
01
01
Used as replacement for AC Controller, FB200724 on 100120 VAC units AC Power supply for 220-240 VAC
FC200081
AC Power 220-240V
01
01
01
Used as replacement for AC Controller, FB200724 on 220240 VAC units.
FB200198 FB200197
External I/O Complete Internal I/O Board Complete
08 05
08 06
08, 09, 10 05
08, 09, 10 06
08, 09, 10 05
08, 09, 10 06
1-4
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-1-4-2 History - Hardware/Software Versions (contd) Table 1-4 Required Revisions for Cards and Modules
Backend Rack BT01 (sw. 1.0) Part Number Name Func. Rev. MCD BT01 (sw. 1.0 / 1.1 / 1.2) Func. Rev. MCD
BT02 (sw. 2.0 / 2.1) Func. Rev. MCD Comments
BACKEND PROCESSOR Used in Production Before September 2002

FB200480 FA200801 2266548-5 BACKEND PROCESSOR PATIENT I/O MODULE II (COMPL) Battery For Backend Processor UPS 02 E N/A 02 E N/A 02 E N/A MCD revision F, G, H or I may also be used
BACKEND PROCESSOR - II Used in Production After September 2002

2348186 2348186-20 2348186-21 2348186-22 2348186-24 2348186-25 BACKEND PROCESSOR-II WITHOUT MO DRIVE POWER SUPPLY CD RW DRIVE PATIENT IO MODULE MOD DRIVE 9.0G CAPACITY SCSI FAN Same as FA200801(?)
1-5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-1-4-3 History - Supported Probes Table 1-5 Supported Probes and SW Versions
PART NUMBER
SUPPORTED MODELS & SW VERSION NAME BT-01, V7 BT-02, V7 BT-02, V7 PRO
PROBES
Sector 3S (Probe, Sector 3S) 3S, Comfort Scan Probe M3s (Probe, AMA Sector M3s) 5S (Probe, Sector 5S) 7S (Probe, Sector 7S) 10S (Probe, Sector 10S) PAMPTE 6T (Probe, TEE 6T) 8T (Probe, TEE 8T) Linear & Convex & Others 7L (Probe, Linear 7L) 10L (Probe, Linear 10L) 12L (Probe, Linear 12L) M12L 3.5 C (Probe, Convex 3C) 5C (Probe, Convex 5C) i13L E8C Pencil P2D Pencil Probe P6D Pencil Probe
2252157 2323337 2295649 2290751 2263669 2298589
3S PROBE, L500 3S COMFORTSCAN PROBE 2295649 M3S AMA SECT. 5S SECTOR TRANSDUCER 7S PROBE 10 S SECTOR TRANSDUCER
BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x ----------BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
KN100022 KN100023
KN100022 6T TEE PROBE KN100023 8T PED.TEE PROBE
BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
2294521 2294523 2295377 2294511 2296158 2294516 KW100011 2294641
7L PROBE TYPE (EXP) 10L PROBE TYPE (EXP) 12L PROBE TYPE (EXP) M12L MIH PROBE 3.5C CONVEX TRANSDUCER 5C PROBE TYPE (EXP) KW011 I13L INTRAOP.PROBE E8C PROBE
BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x ----------BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x ---------------------
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
TE100024 TQ100002
TE100024 PENCIL PROBE 2D TQ100002 PENCIL PROBE 6D
1-6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-1-4-4 How to Turn the Scanner ON and OFF
Please refer to Chapter 4, section 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up, for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner ON and to Chapter 4, section 4-2-2 - Power Shut Down for a detailed description of how to turn the scanner OFF. 1-1-4-5 How to Check for Hardware/Software Version, Installed Options Please refer to "History - Hardware/Software Versions" on page 1-4 to check the hardware versions on the boards Please refer to "Software Configuration Checks" on page 4-63 to check the software versions on local software on the boards. Please refer to "Functional Checks" on page 4-14 to check for installed options.
1-1-5
Purpose of Operator Manual(s)

The Operator Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO and also kept near the unit for quick reference.
1-7
Section 1-2 Important Conventions

1-2-1
1-2-1-1
Conventions Used in Book

Model Designations. This manual covers the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO scanners listed in Table 1-2.
1-2-1-2
Icons. Pictures, or icons, are used wherever they will reinforce the printed message. The icons, labels and conventions used on the product and in the service information are described in this chapter.
1-2-1-3
Safety Precaution Messages. Various levels of safety precaution messages may be found on the equipment and in the service information. The different levels of concern are identified by a flag word that precedes the precautionary message. Known or potential hazards are labeled in one of three ways:
DANGER
Danger is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will cause severe personal injury or death if the instructions are ignored.
Warning is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that can cause severe personal injury and property damage if instructions are ignored.
WARNING
CAUTION Caution is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that will or can cause minor personal injury
and property damage if instructions are ignored. Equipment Damage Possible.
NOTICE Notice is used when a hazard is present that can cause property damage but has absolutely no
personal injury risk. Example: Disk drive will crash. NOTE: Notes are used to provide important information about an item or a procedure. Be sure to read the notes; the information contained in a note can often save you time or effort.
1-8
Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
1-2-2
Standard Hazard Icons

Important information will always be preceded by the exclamation point contained within a triangle, as seen throughout this chapter. In addition to text, several different graphical icons (symbols) may be used to make you aware of specific types of hazards that could possibly cause harm. Table 1-6 Standard Hazard Icons
ELECTRICAL MECHANICAL RADIATION
LASER
HEAT
PINCH
LASER LIGHT
Some others make you aware of specific procedures that should be followed. Table 1-7 Standard Icons that indicates that a special procedure is to be used
TAG AND LOCK OUT WEAR EYE PROTECTION
AVOID STATIC ELECTRICITY
TAG
&
LOCKOUT
Signed Date
1-9
1-2-3
Product Icons
The following table describes the purpose and location of safety labels and other important information provided on the equipment. Table 1-8 Product Icons
PURPOSE/MEANING
Manufacturer's name and address Date of manufacture Model and serial numbers Electrical ratings Used to indicate the degree of safety or protection. Indicates the degree of protection provided by the enclosure per IEC 529. IP Code (IPX8/IP68) IPX8 indicates drip proof and may be used in an Operating Theater. The footswitch delivered with Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is IP68 rated. Footswitch
LABEL/SYMBOL
LOCATION
Identification and Rating Plate
Rear of console near power inlet
Type/Class Label
Equipment Type BF (man in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-03 indicates B Type equipment having a floating applied part.
Probe connectors including Doppler probe connector
Equipment Type CF (heart in the box symbol) IEC 878-02-05 indicates equipment having a floating applied part having a degree of protection suitable for direct cardiac contact. Laboratory logo or labels denoting conformance with industry safety standards such as UL or IEC.
ECG connector and surgical probes
Device Listing/Certification Labels CAUTION - This unit weighs...Special care must be used to avoid..."
Rear of console
This precaution is intended to prevent injury that may result if one person attempt to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline due to the weight of the unit.
On the console where easily seen during transport
"DANGER - Risk of explosion used in..." The system is not designed for use with flammable anesthetic gases.
Rear of console
CAUTION The equilateral triangle is usually used in combination with other symbols to advise or warn the user.
Various
1 - 10
Section 1-2 - Important Conventions
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 Table 1-8 Product Icons (continued)
PURPOSE/MEANING
LABEL/SYMBOL
LOCATION
ATTENTION - Consult accompanying documents is intended to alert the user to refer to the operator manual or other instructions when complete information cannot be provided on the label.
Various
CAUTION - Dangerous voltage (the lightning flash with arrowhead in equilateral triangle) is used to indicate electric shock hazards.
Various
Mains OFF Indicates the power off position of the mains power switch.
Rear of system adjacent to mains switch
OFF/Standby Indicates the power off/ standby position of the power switch. CAUTION This Power Switch DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply Mains ON Indicates the Power ON position of the mains power switch. ON Indicates the power on position of the power switch. CAUTION The Power Switch on the Front Panel DOES NOT ISOLATE Mains Supply Adjacent to On/Off (Standby) Switch
Protective Earth Indicates the protective earth (grounding) terminal.
Used several places inside the scanner.
Equipotentiality Indicates the terminal to be used for connecting equipotential conductors when interconnecting (grounding) with other equipment.
Rear of console
1 - 11
Section 1-3 Safety Considerations

1-3-1 Introduction
The following safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service and repair of this equipment. Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment.
1-3-2
Human Safety
Operating personnel must not remove the system covers. Servicing should be performed by authorized personnel only. Only personnel who have participated in a Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Training Seminar are authorized to service the equipment.
1-3-3
WARNING
Mechanical Safety
WHEN THE UNIT IS RAISED FOR A REPAIR OR MOVED ALONG ANY INCLINE, USE EXTREME CAUTION SINCE IT MAY BECOME UNSTABLE AND TIP OVER. ULTRASOUND PROBES ARE HIGHLY SENSITIVE MEDICAL INSTRUMENTS THAT CAN EASILY BE DAMAGED BY IMPROPER HANDLING. USE CARE WHEN HANDLING AND PROTECT FROM DAMAGE WHEN NOT IN USE. DO NOT USE A DAMAGED OR DEFECTIVE PROBE. FAILURE TO FOLLOW THESE PRECAUTIONS CAN RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE. NEVER USE A PROBE THAT HAS FALLEN TO THE FLOOR. EVEN IF IT LOOKS OK, IT MAY BE DAMAGED.
WARNING
WARNING
CAUTION Ensure that nobody touch the console arm/frogleg when moving the keyboard console. CAUTION Do not move the unit if the keyboard console is in unlocked position. CAUTION Always lock the Control Console in its parking (locked) position before moving the scanner
around.
WARNING
WHEN THE TOP CONSOLE IS IN ITS LOCKED POSITION, THE GAS SPRING IS COMPRESSED AND STORES MECHANICAL ENERGY. DURING NORMAL OPERATION THE TOP CONSOLE, THE WEIGHT OF THE MONITOR AND THE MECHANICAL FORCE OF THE GAS SPRING ARE IN BALANCE. TAKE CARE IF/WHEN YOU ACTIVATE THIS GAS SPRING. PERSONAL INJURY CAN OCCUR AFTER THE PANEL IS REMOVED AND THE SPRING PRESSURE IS RELEASED. TAKE CARE WHEN YOU REPAIR THE ELEVATION ASSEMBLY.
Section 1-3 - Safety Considerations
1 - 12
1-3-3
Mechanical Safety (contd)
CAUTION VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO weighs 190 kg (419 lbs) or more, depending on installed peripherals, when
ready for use. Care must be used when moving it or replacing its parts. Failure to follow the precautions listed below could result in injury, uncontrolled motion and costly damage.
CAUTION Do not transport Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO in a vehicle without locking the casters (wheels).
-
ALWAYS: - Be sure the pathway is clear. - Use slow, careful motions. - Use two people when moving on inclines or lifting more than 23 kg (50 lbs). NOTE: Special care should be taken when transporting the unit in a vehicle: Lock keyboard in place. Eject Magneto Optical disk from the MO Drive (if installed). Eject CD from CD drive. Secure the unit in an upright position. Lock the casters (wheels) (brake) DO NOT use the Control Panel as an anchor point. Place the probes in their carrying case.
CAUTION Keep the heat venting holes on the monitor unobstructed to avoid overheating of the monitor.
1-3-4
1-3-4-1
Electrical Safety
Safe Practices Follow these guidelines to minimize shock hazards whenever you are using the scanner; The equipment chassis must be connected to an electrical ground. The unit is equipped with a three-conductor AC power cable. This must be plugged into an approved electrical outlet with safety ground. The power outlet used for this equipment should not be shared with other types of equipment. Both the system power cable and the power connector must meet international electrical standards.
1-3-4-2
Probes Follow these guidelines before connecting a probe to the scanner; Inspect the probe prior to each use for damage or degradation to the; housing cable strain relief lens seal
Do not use a damaged or defective probe. Chapter 1 - Introduction 1 - 13
Never immerse the probe connector or adapter into any liquid.
1-3-5
1-3-5-1
Labels Locations
Labels on Front of Monitor and Control Panel Table 1-9
DESCRIPTION
Labels on Front of Monitor and Control Panel

ILLUSTRATION
Label, Vivid 7 (Monitor) - BT01 Label, Vivid 7 (Monitor) - BT02 Label, Vivid 7 PRO (Monitor) - BT02
Label, GE Logo
1 - 14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 Table 1-9

DESCRIPTION
Labels on Front of Monitor and Control Panel (continued)

ILLUSTRATION
OR
ON/OFF:
Label, On/Off Switch (Two versions of the label have been used, the one to the right is the latest version.)
press once
FC314104 03
Label position
1 - 15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-2 Labels on Front Handle Table 1-10
DESCRIPTION
Labels on Front Handle

ILLUSTRATION
Label, Front Handle (Three versions of the label have been used. The lower one is the latest version)
OR
OR
OR
1 - 16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-3 Labels Near Connectors on Front Table 1-11
DESCRIPTION
Labels Near Connectors on Front

ILLUSTRATION
Label, Probe Connector (The Label, Probe Connector consists of three labels, named; - Main Label Part, - Heart Symbol and - See Manual symbol.)
Label, Patient I/O Module II
Label CD ROM (introduced April 2002)
1 - 17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-4 Label on External I/O Table 1-12
DESCRIPTION
Label, External I/O

ILLUSTRATION
Label, External. I/O
1 - 18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-5 Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker Table 1-13
DESCRIPTION
Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker (used before May 2002)
ILLUSTRATION
Label, Warning
Label, System: P/N, Pwr.rating
or
or
Label, System: S/N
Ground (GND) Label. (Used on 230 VAC Systems and some 100-120 VAC Systems.) l
Label, GND-symbol
1 - 19

DESCRIPTION
Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker (used before May 2002) (continued)
ILLUSTRATION
l Hospital Grade Ground (GND) Label. (Used on some 100-120 VAC Systems)
Label, GND-symbol., Hospital Grade
Table 1-14
DESCRIPTION
Labels at AC Mains Inlet and Circuit Breaker (used after May 2002)
ILLUSTRATION
Label, AC Controller
1 - 20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-6 Label on Rear Cover Table 1-15
DESCRIPTION
l
Label on Rear Cover

ILLUSTRATION
Label, General Info (Located on rear of system) Label used for Vivid 7 before 2 May 2002
Label, General Info (Located on rear of system) Label used for Vivid 7 after 2 May 2002
1 - 21

DESCRIPTION
Label on Rear Cover (continued)

ILLUSTRATION
Label, General Info (Located on rear of system) Label used for Vivid 7 to China
Label, General Info (Located on rear of system) Label used for Vivid 7 PRO
1 - 22

DESCRIPTION
Label on Rear Cover (continued)

ILLUSTRATION
Label, General Info (Located on rear of system) Label used for Vivid 7 PRO to China
1 - 23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-7 Labels on Internal I/O (Inside Scanner) Label on Front End Card Cage Side of Internal I/O
Figure 1-2 Labels on Internal I/O (Inside Scanner), Front End Card Cage Side of Internal I/O
1 - 24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-8 Labels on Internal I/O (Inside Scanner) Label on Backend Processor Side of Internal I/O
Figure 1-3 Labels on Internal I/O (Inside Scanner), Backend Processor Side of Internal I/O
1 - 25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-9
Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Part 1, Left Part of Label Located on the outside of the Front End Card Racks cover (inside unit).Different versions of the label has been used since production start. The label shown here, is the latest version.
C abl and C onnect num beri and nam i syst used: e or ng ng em

I I O EI O B EP FEP ACP ACD ACT B EPI O Axx : Bxx : Cxx : Dxx : Exx : Fxx : G xx : Hxx: Kxx : M xx: Nxx: Lxx : = I er I m odul nt nal O e = Ext nalI m odul er O e = Backend Pr ocessor = Fr end Pr ont ocessor = A C cont olerm odul r l e = A C di r buton box st i i = A C i aton t ansf m erm odul sol i r or e = I m odul on t BEP O e he connect s on IO wih ot connectons t t BEP or I t her i han he connect s on IO t ar connect t BEP or I hat e ed o connect s on BEP,exceptf t BEPI or or he O connect s on BEPI or O connect on t BEP powersuppl or he y connect s on ACP or connect s on FEP or ext nalaccesabl connect s ( er e or Doppl pr e er ob ) connect s on M ODEM or connect s on ACT or connect s on ACD or connect s on EI or O
AC D i rbut n sti i o box N5 N4 N3 N2 N1
Perpher s i al
Back End Pr ocesso r
F1 115V
F2 115V o r 230V F6
F3 230V
F4 230V
230V
connectr o t EI o O 25
P31 P30
F A 1
H1
Fr I at n om sol i o tansf r orme r
G1
Boar l i i Fr End Pr d ocaton n ont ocessor(FEP)

M
P32
A15
A14
I IO
de P si FE rm n fo see
L4 L4: L5: L6: L7: L8: L9: L10: L11: L12: L13: L14: L15: L16: L17: Audi out(i ) o rght Audi out(eft o l ) Trg ou i t Footswi h tc Seralpor i t Rem ot expose #1 e Rem ot expose #2 e Anal m odem og Com posie vi output t deo B&W vi outpt deo u S- deo out Vi put SVG A outu pt USB Et net her L5 L6 L7
A16
Ext nalI m odul er O e

L11 L12 L13 L14
L1
9 5
L2
1 4 M
1 6
L3
Ser ce vi use O NLY (em ot r e poweron/ f of cont ) rol
ogu R S- 2 Anal e 23 phone Connec t Connec t tI t o nSie tI t o nSie M O DEM M O DEM
Ext nal er ( on Fr
Figure 1-4 Label, Internal Connections - Part 1, Left Part of Label
1 - 26
TX- e pow r suppl y
A12 A13 A14 A15 A16
Spar power(ut e opton e f ur i) Powert 3D box (ut e opto ) o f ur in AC powercont l ro Si s t r aton adapt (ut e opt n gnal o ot i er f ur i) o Si s t 3D box (ut e opto ) gnal o f ur in
Notuse d
A12
F
8 8
Rel boar ay d
A13
F
1 5 1 5
R X- 8 12
FEC 2
R FT1
TX- 8 12
SD P2
BF64
BF64
IP M
G2
DCpowe r suppl y G3 G4
Fr En ont d R ac k F5
M onio tr
M ode m
C onnect t or o m ot boar her d
9 1 4 2 5
M
1 9 1 5 1 3
M
1 1 6 8 9 5
Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Part 2, Right Part of Label Located on the outside of the Front End Card Racks cover (inside unit). Different versions of the label has been used since production start. The label shown here, is the latest version.
Perpher s i al
Back End Pr ocesso r
Fr En ont d R ac k
M onio tr
M ode m
W AR N I ! NG Li Volage i i ve t nsde, do notopen.

AC powercontolm odul r e
20V -1 100 -240V 0 V= e lt 115 V = 22 s i n i 230 r2 tm e e ) tg ( o vola
n o Fa t rl n co
F9 230V 115V
Volage Sel i t ecton on Perpher s i al

5 9 6
F1 115V
F6 Fr I at n om sol i o tansf r orme r 230V 115V To I at n sol i o tansf r orme r
F7
Notuse d
R X- 8 12
FEC 2
R FT1
TX- 8 12
SD P2
BF64
BF64
IP M
DCpowe r suppl y
G3
TX- e pow r suppl y
Cabl t e o C15
F2 115V o r 230V
F3 230V
F4 230V
F5 230V
115V or 230V i et nl volage sel i t ect on
F8
Cutout in60, label the 0
G2
G4
oar l i i Fr End Pr d ocaton n ont ocessor(FEP)
I ato sol in tansf r orme r m odul e M1
M L4 L5 L6 L9 L7 L8 F L11 L12 L13 L14 R ESET L10
L15 L16 L17
M odem power K4 suppl y K3
M odem M T5634ZBA
K1
K2
gu e ne ec t ie t EM
Ext nalI m odul er O e ( ontvew) Fr i

Par no.:FB314746 t Rev.:05
Figure 1-5 Label, Internal Connections - Part 1, Right Part of Label
1 - 27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-11 Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Upper Part
Located on the outside of the Backend Processors Cover (inside unit)
Figure 1-6 Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.), Upper Part
1 - 28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-12 Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Lower Part
Figure 1-7 Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Lower Part Chapter 1 - Introduction 1 - 29
11
10
15
15
A4 Connectors to/from Back End A6 A11 B1 B2 A7 A10 B3

P31
A1 A2 A3
F
A5
15
26
14
+3.3V +5V +6V +10V +15V +5V +12V
-5V
-15V
25
13
Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Upper Part
B4
50
25
From Back End

5
Figure 1-8 Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.), Upper Part

A8 A9 B7 B8
1
B6
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9
BW printer video, printer remote control VCR remote control (RS232) Spare RS232 Signals & power to/from top console Signals to/from top console Audio left out to VCR Audio right out to VCR Audio left reply from VCR Audio right reply from VCR SVideo out to VCR SVideo in from VCR
B9
B5
P32
USB#1 (top console conection) USB#2 (external i/o connection) 10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Audio in to BEP, Audio out from BEP, Microphone in to BEP PC2IO board signals PC2IO board signals and power COM (external i/o connection - setup as COM1) COM (modem - setup as COM2) BEP Power Supply control (UPS)
Connector to motherboard
1 - 30 1-3-5-13
in Ba terna ck En l IO m dP o roc dule es so seen r (B EP from )s ide
14
+3.3V +5V +6V +10V +15V +5V +12V
-5V
1-3-5-14
-15V
25
13
B4
50 5 9
25
B6 B9
P32
6
B5
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 USB#1 (top console conection) USB#2 (external i/o connection) 10/100 Base-TX Ethernet Audio in to BEP, Audio out from BEP, Microphone in to BEP PC2IO board signals PC2IO board signals and power COM (external i/o connection - setup as COM1) COM (modem - setup as COM2) BEP Power Supply control (UPS)
BW printer video, printer remote control VCR remote control (RS232) Spare RS232 Signals & power to/from top console Signals to/from top console Audio left out to VCR Audio right out to VCR Audio left reply from VCR Audio right reply from VCR SVideo out to VCR SVideo in from VCR
Signals to i/o boards - to B5
Power for i/o boards - to B6

1 26
BEP power supply

50
25
Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Lower Part
C20
1 4 1 4
C21
26
Parallel Port NOT USED

1
USB #5 to Color Printer F
USB #6 to BW Printer
Not used
Not used
Not used
USED
14 5
C5
5
25
50
34
1 10 9 15 11 6
M
VIDEO to D3
C6
1
C13
F
C9
1 1 4 4
C2
C3 C4
C18 C19
C11
USB #4 NOT USED to B4
Mic
USB #1 to B1
COM to B8
Keyboard
SCSI for optional MO drive No external connection
C1
USB #2 to B2
LAN to B3 USB #3 to B7
Audio In
68
25
C10
C12
PCI Bridge to Front End Rack
Mouse NOT
13
C17
Audio Out
UPS Control to B9
1 - 31
NOT USED
AGP slot
C15 PCI slot 1
PCI slot 2
PCI slot 3
PCI slot 4
C16 PCI slot 5
PCI slot 6
Not used
Figure 1-9 Label, Internal Connections (Int.Conn.) - Lower Part

D1
SVGA in - from C13 SVGA to monitor
11 6 5 1 15 15 11 11 15 9
35
E1
10 15 15
D2
RGB to Color Printer
11
AC Power Connect to AC Control Module
10 10 5 5 1 1
66
10
F F
Voltage Selection SHALL be 230V
BEP FAN
D3
D4
D5
Connector to mothe
From Back End
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-15 Label, Disassembly Nester, Part 1 (Left Part of Label)
Located on the outside of the Front End Card Racks Cover (inside unit)
DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
Remove all screws on rear side of monitor cover, and remove cover. Remove all screws on rear side of monitor front cover, and remove front cover. Remove all screws on the cover located under the shelf underneath the monitor, and remove cover. Detach monitor by removing four unbrako screws located underneath the monitor neck. Remove shelf by loosening all screws underneath it and remove speakers from shelf. Remove all screws underneath operators panel. Disconnect and remove alphanumeric keyboard and operators panel. Remove probe holders and front handle. Remove all unbrako screws, which fasten the top console cable to the console and loosen the cable. Remove top console and horizontal movement mechanism by unscrewing the big unbrako screw on top of the rear base of the horizontal movement mechanism. Remove all quarterturn screws on both sidepanels of the system. Side panels can now be removed. Remove screws underneath the pedals to remove the pedal plastics. Remove the footrest bumper by unscrewing four screws. Remove all screws on the rear-, top- and front covers to loosen the covers. Remove rear handle by unscrewing all screws. Remove fan cover by removing all fastening screws. Remove fan bracket w/fan by removing all fastening screws. Remove all peripheral units. Disconnect, then remove all cables. Detach computer by unscrewing all fastening screws. Remove external i/o box by unscrewing all fastening screws. Remove internal i/o box by unscrewing all fastening screws. Remove ac-power box by unscrewing all fastening screws. Remove ac-transformer box by unscrewing all fastening screws. Remove sheet metal cover on electronic rack on lower right side. Remove all PCBs from the electronic rack. Remove the two power supplys from the electronic rack by unscrewing all fastening screws. Unscrew two screws on the connector (front) panel of the electronic rack, and remove the panel. Remove the electronic cabinet by unscrewing all fastening screws in front of it and behind of it. Remove the pedal mechanism by unscrewing all fastening screws. Remove the wheels by unscrewing all fastening screws.
Figure 1-10 Label, Disassembly Instruction, Part 1 (Left Part of Label)
1 - 32
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-16 Label, Disassembly Nester, Part 2 (Right Part of Label)
Located on the outside of the Front End Card Racks Cover (inside unit)
PARTS DESCRIPTION
Painted sheet metal, aluzinc steel Sheet metal, aluzinc Printed circuit boards Cables Nuts, steel + nylock Nuts, steel Screws, steel + painted Screws, steel Casters w/rubber Beryllium copper Lithium battery Covers, made from ABS plastic Bumpers, made from EPP (expanding polypropylen) Shelf made from Polyuretan, liquid painted Foot pedal, plastics made from EPP (expanding polypropylen) Peripheral units Computer Ferrite cores Electric fans
DISPOSITION
Recyclable metal after cleaning Recyclable metal Recycling Recyclable metal. All cables are UL listed. Recyclable metal after cleaning Recyclable metal Recyclable metal after cleaning Recyclable metal Recyclable metal and plastics Recyclable metal To be handled by battery recycler To be handled by plastics recycler To be handled by plastics recycler To be handled by plastics recycler To be handled by plastics recycler Follow disassembly/recycling instructions from original manufacturer Follow disassembly/recycling instructions from original manufacturer Reusable Reusable
Figure 1-11 Label, Disassembly Instruction, Part 2 (Right Part of Label)
1 - 33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 1-3-5-17 Labels on Footswitch Table 1-16
DESCRIPTION
Labels on Footswitch
ILLUSTRATION
or
Label, Footswitch
Footswitch, underneath
1 - 34

DESCRIPTION
Labels on Footswitch (continued)

ILLUSTRATION
LABEL, GE VINGMED or LABEL, GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS
1 - 35
1-3-6
Dangerous Procedure Warnings

Warnings, such as the example below, precede potentially dangerous procedures throughout this manual. Instructions contained in the warnings must be followed.
DANGER
DANGEROUS VOLTAGES, CAPABLE OF CAUSING DEATH, ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN HANDLING, TESTING AND ADJUSTING.
WARNING
EXPLOSION WARNING DO NOT OPERATE THE EQUIPMENT IN AN EXPLOSIVE ATMOSPHERE. OPERATION OF ANY ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN SUCH AN ENVIRONMENT CONSTITUTES A DEFINITE SAFETY HAZARD. DO NOT SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR MODIFY EQUIPMENT. BECAUSE OF THE DANGER OF INTRODUCING ADDITIONAL HAZARDS, DO NOT INSTALL SUBSTITUTE PARTS OR PERFORM ANY UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF THE EQUIPMENT.
WARNING
1-3-7
Lockout/Tagout Requirements (For USA Only)

Follow OSHA Lockout/Tagout requirements by ensuring you are in total control of the AC power plug at all times during the service process.
1 - 36
Section 1-4 EMC, EMI, and ESD

1-4-1 Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) and Interference (EMI)
Electromagnetic compatibility describes a level of performance of a device within its electromagnetic environment. This environment consists of the device itself and its surroundings including other equipment, power sources and persons with which the device must interface. Inadequate compatibility results when a susceptible device fails to perform as intended due interference from its environment or when the device produces unacceptable levels of emission to its environment. This interference is often referred to as radiofrequency or electromagnetic interference (RFI/EMI) and can be radiated through space or conducted over interconnecting power of signal cables. In addition to electromagnetic energy, EMC also includes possible effects from electrical fields, magnetic fields, electrostatic discharge and disturbances in the electrical power supply.
1-4-2
CE Compliance
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO conforms to all applicable conducted and radiated emission limits and to immunity from electrostatic discharge, radiated and conducted RF fields, magnetic fields and power line transient requirements. Applicable standards are: 47CFR Part 18, IEC 60112, and 80613.
NOTE:
For CE Compliance, it is critical that all covers, screws, shielding, gaskets, mesh, clamps, are in good condition, installed tightly without skew or stress. Proper installation following all comments noted in this service manual is required in order to achieve full EMC performance.
1-4-3
WARNING
2.)
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Prevention

DO NOT TOUCH ANY BOARDS WITH INTEGRATED CIRCUITS PRIOR TO TAKING THE NECESSARY ESD PRECAUTIONS: 1. ALWAYS CONNECT YOURSELF, VIA AN ARM-WRIST STRAP, TO THE ADVISED ESD CONNECTION POINT LOCATED ON THE REAR OF THE SCANNER (TO THE RIGHT OF THE POWER CONNECTOR). 2. FOLLOW GENERAL GUIDELINES FOR HANDLING OF ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE EQUIPMENT.
1 - 37
Section 1-5 Customer Assistance

1-5-1 Contact Information
If this equipment does not work as indicated in this service manual or in the User Manual, or if you require additional assistance, please contact the local distributor or appropriate support resource, as listed below. Prepare the following information before you call: System ID serial number, --see label on rear side of unit. Software version. Phone Numbers for Customer Assistance
Location
USA/ Canada GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Customer Answer Center 1-800-682-5327 1-262-524-5698 Fax: +1-414-647-4125 Tel: 1-262-524-5300
Table 1-17
Phone Number
Tel: 1-800-321-7937
Latin America GE Medical Systems Ultrasound Service Engineering 4855 W. Electric Avenue Milwaukee, WI 53219 Customer Answer Center Europe GE Ultraschall Deutschland GmbH& Co. KG BeethovenstraBe 239 Postfach 11 05 60, D-42655 Solingen Germany Asia (Singapore) GE Ultrasound Asia Service Department - Ultrasound 298 Tiong Bahru Road #15-01/06 Central Plaza Singapore 169730
1-262-524-5698 Fax: +1-414-647-4125 Tel: +49 212 2802 208 - CARDIAC +49 212 2802 207 - GENERAL IMAGING Fax: +49 212 2802 431 Tel: +65-6277-3512
Fax: +65 6272-3997
1 - 38
Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
1-5-2
System Manufacture
Table 1-18 System Manufacture
PHONE NUMBER FAX NUMBER
MANUFACTURER
GE Vingmed Ultrasound A/S Strandpromenaden 45 P.O. Box 141 N-3191 HORTEN NORWAY
+47 3302 1100
+47 3302 1350
1 - 39
1 - 40
Section 1-5 - Customer Assistance
Chapter 2 Pre-Installation
This chapter provides the information required to plan and prepare for the installation of a Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. Included are descriptions of the facility and electrical needs to be met by the purchaser of the unit.
Table 2-1
Section
2-1 2-2 2-3
Description
Overview General Console Requirements Facility Needs
Page Number
2-1 2-2 2-7
Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation
2-1
Section 2-2 General Console Requirements

2-2-1 Console Environmental Requirements
CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to
its operating environment.
Table 2-2
C F hrs 60 140 8 55 131 6 50 122 4 45 113 2
Time for Settlement

40 104 0 35 96 0 30 86 0 25 77 0 20 68 0 15 59 0 10 50 0 5 41 2 0 32 4 -5 23 6 -10 14 8 -15 5 10 -20 -4 12 -25 -13 14 -30 -22 16 -35 -31 18 -40 -40 20
Table 2-3
Operating temperature
10 to 35
oC
Environmental Specifications for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Scanners

Storage temperature
-20 to 50
oC
Humidity
< 90% rH non-condensing
Heat dissipation
3500 BTU pr hour
(50 to 95
oF)
(- 4 to 122
oF)
2-2-1-1
Cooling The cooling requirement for the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is 3500 BTU/hr. This figure does not include cooling needed for lights, people, or other equipment in the room. Each person in the room places an additional 300 BTU/hr. demand on the cooling system.
2-2-1-2
Lighting Bright light is needed for system installation, updates and repairs. However, operator and patient comfort may be optimized if the room light is subdued and indirect. Therefore a combination lighting system (dim/bright) is recommended. Keep in mind that lighting controls and dimmers can be a source of EMI which could degrade image quality. These controls should be selected to minimize possible interference.
2-2
Section 2-2 - General Console Requirements
2-2-2
NOTE:
Electrical Requirements
GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit.
2-2-2-1
Electrical Requirements for Vivid 7 and Vivid 7 PRO Electrical Specifications for Vivid 7 and Vivid 7 PRO. Monitor and on board peripherals are included.
Table 2-4
FB000030 FC000060 FC000180 FC000190 FC000200 FC000210
Electrical Specifications for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO

VOLTAGE
230 VAC 115 VAC 230 VAC 115 VAC 230 VAC 115 VAC
DESCRIPTION
VIVID 7 (BT 01) VIVID 7 (BT 01) VIVID 7 PRO (BT 02) VIVID 7 PRO (BT 02) VIVID 7 (BT 02) VIVID 7 (BT 02)
TOLERANCES
10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10%
CURRENT
5A 10 A 5A 10 A 5A 10 A
FREQUENCY
50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz
2-2-2-2
Inrush Current 230 VAC: 12 A 120 VAC: 7 A
2-2-2-3
Site Circuit Breaker It is recommended that the branch circuit breaker for the unit be readily accessible.
CAUTION POWER OUTAGE MAY OCCUR. The Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO requires a dedicated single branch
circuit. To avoid circuit overload and possible loss of critical care equipment, make sure you DO NOT have any other equipment operating on the same circuit.
2-2-2-4
Site Power Outlets A dedicated AC power outlet must be within reach of the unit without extension cords. Other outlets adequate for the external peripherals, medical and test equipment needed to support this unit must also be present within 1 m (3.2 ft.) of the unit. Electrical installation must meet all current local, state, and national electrical codes.
2-2-2-5
Unit Power Plug If the unit arrives without a power plug, or with the wrong plug, you must contact your GE dealer or the installation engineer must supply what is locally required. Chapter 2 - Pre-Installation 2-3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 2-2-2-6 Power Stability Requirements Voltage drop-out Max 10 ms. Power Transients (All applications)
Less than 25% of nominal peak voltage for less than 1 millisecond for any type of transient, including line frequency, synchronous, asynchronous, or aperiodic transients.
2-2-3
EMI Limitations
Ultrasound machines are susceptible to Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) from radio frequencies, magnetic fields, and transients in the air or wiring. They also generate EMI. The Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO complies with limits as stated on the EMC label. However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. Possible EMI sources should be identified before the unit is installed. Electrical and electronic equipment may produce EMI unintentionally as the result of a defect. These sources include: medical lasers, scanners, cauterizing guns, computers, monitors, fans, gel warmers, microwave ovens, light dimmers portable phones.
The presence of a broadcast station or broadcast van may also cause interference. See Table 2-5 on page 2-5 for EMI Prevention tips.
2-4
2-2-3
EMI Limitations (contd).

Table 2-5 EMI Prevention/abatement
Details
Keep the unit at least 5 meters or 15 feet away from other EMI sources. Special shielding may be required to eliminate interference problems caused by high frequency, high powered radio or video broadcast signals. Poor grounding is the most likely reason a unit will have noisy images. Check grounding of the power cord and power outlet. After you finish repairing or updating the system, replace all covers and tighten all screws. Any cable with an external connection requires a magnet wrap at each end. Install the Card Rack cover over the Card Rack. Loose or missing covers or RF gaskets allow radio frequencies to interfere with the ultrasound signals. If more than 20% or a pair of the fingers on an RF gasket are broken, replace the gasket. Do not turn on the unit until any loose metallic part is removed.
EMI Rule
Be aware of RF sources
Ground the unit
Replace all screws, RF gaskets, covers, cores Replace broken RF gaskets
Do not place labels where Never place a label where RF gaskets meet the unit. Otherwise, the gap created will permit RF gaskets touch metal RF leakage. Or, if a label has been found in such a position, move the label. Use GE specified The interconnect cables are grounded and require ferrite beads and other shielding. Also, harnesses and peripherals cable length, material, and routing are all important; do not change from what is specified. Take care with cellular phones Cellular phones may transmit a 5 V/m signal; that could cause image artifacts.
Do not allow cables to lie across the top of the Card Rack or hang out of the peripheral bays. Properly dress peripheral Loop the excess length for peripheral cables inside the peripheral bays. Attach the monitor cables cables to the frame.
2-5
2-2-4
Probes Environmental Requirements

Table 2-6 Operation and Storage Temperatures for Probes.
Electronic Operation: Storage: 10 to 40 oC (50 to 104 oF) -20 to 50 oC (-4 to 122 oF) PAMPTE 5 to 42.7 oC (41 to 108,9 oF) -20 to 50 oC (-4 to 122 oF)
Temperatures in degrees Celsius (oC) conversion to degrees F (oF) = (oC * 9/5) + 32
CAUTION Systems and electronic probes are designed for storage temperatures of -20 to + 50 degrees C
(-4 to +122 degrees F). when exposed to large temperature variations, the product should be kept at room temperature the needed time to stabilize its temperature before use. Refer to Table 3-3 on page 3-2 to determine the needed settlement time.
2-2-5
Time and Manpower Requirements

Site preparation takes time. Begin Pre-installation checks as soon as possible, if possible, six weeks before delivery, to allow enough time to make any changes.
CAUTION Have two people available to deliver and unpack the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both.
2-6
Section 2-3 Facility Needs

2-3-1 Purchaser Responsibilities
The work and materials needed to prepare the site is the responsibility of the purchaser. Delay, confusion, and waste of manpower can be avoided by completing pre installation work before delivery. Purchaser responsibility includes: NOTE: Procuring the materials required. Completing the preparations before delivery of the ultrasound system. Paying the costs for any alterations and modifications not specifically provided in the sales contract.
All electrical installations that are preliminary to the positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment must be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing must also be performed by qualified personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated and special engineering competence is required. All electrical work on these products must comply with the requirements of applicable electrical codes. The purchaser of GE equipment must only utilize qualified personnel to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.
The desire to use a nonlisted or customer provided product or to place an approved product further from the system than the interface kit allows, presents challenges to the installation team. To avoid delays during installation, such variances should be made known to the individuals or group performing the installation at the earliest possible date (preferably prior to the purchase). The ultrasound suite must be clean prior to delivery of the machine. Carpet is not recommended because it collects dust and creates static. Potential sources of EMI (electromagnetic interference) should also be investigated before delivery. Dirt, static, and EMI can negatively impact system reliability.
2-7
2-3-2
NOTE:
Required Facility Needs

GE Medical Systems requires a dedicated power and ground for the proper operation of its Ultrasound equipment. This dedicated power shall originate at the last distribution panel before the system. Sites with a mains power system with defined Neutral and Live: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase, a neutral (not shared with any other circuit), and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Sites with a mains power system without a defined Neutral: The dedicated line shall consist of one phase (two lines), not shared with any other circuit, and a full size ground wire from the distribution panel to the Ultrasound outlet. Please note that image artifacts can occur, if at any time within the facility, the ground from the main facility's incoming power source to the Ultrasound unit is only a conduit. Dedicated single branch power outlet of adequate amperage (see Table 2-4 on page 2-3) meeting all local and national codes which is located less than 2.5 m (8 ft.) from the units proposed location Door opening is at least 76 cm (30 in) wide Proposed location for unit is at least 0.3 m (1 ft.) from the wall for cooling Power outlet and place for any external peripheral are within 2 m (6.5 ft) of each other with peripheral within 1 m of the unit to connect cables.
NOTE:
The Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO has four outlets inside the unit. One is for the monitor and three for on board peripherals. Power outlets for other medical equipment and gel warmer Power outlets for test equipment within 1 m (3.2 ft) of unit Clean and protected space to store transducers (in their cases or on a rack) Material to safely clean probes (done with a plastic container, never metal)
2-8
Section 2-3 - Facility Needs
2-3-3
Desirable Features
Door is at least 92 cm (3 ft.) wide Circuit breaker for dedicated power outlet is easily accessible Sink with hot and cold water Receptacle for biohazardous waste, like used probe sheaths Emergency oxygen supply Storage for linens and equipment Nearby waiting room, lavatory, and dressing room Dual level lighting (bright and dim) Lockable cabinet ordered by GE for its software and proprietary manuals
2-3-4
Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion

Scale: Each square equals one square foot (app. 31 x 31 cm)
Analog Phone Line Connector (for modem) Ethernet Connector Ultrasound Unit Power outlet
GE cabinet for software and manuals (optional)
Figure 2-1 Minimal Floor Plan, 2.5m x 3m (8 by 10 foot)
2-9
2-3-5
2-3-5-1
Networking Pre-installation Requirements

Stand Alone Scanner (without Network Connection) None.
2-3-5-2
Scanner Connected to Hospitals Network Supported networks: DICOM Network (option)
2-3-5-3
Purpose of the DICOM Network Function DICOM services provide the operator with clinically useful features for moving images and patient information over a hospital network. Examples of DICOM services include the transfer of images to workstations for viewing or transferring images to remote printers. As an added benefit, transferring images in this manner frees up the on-board monitor and peripherals, enabling viewing to be done while scanning continues. With DICOM, images can be archived, stored, and retrieved faster, easier, and at a lower cost.
2-3-5-4
DICOM Option Pre-installation Requirements To configure the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO to work with other network connections, the sites network administrator must provide information to complete the form in Figure 2-2 - Worksheet for DICOM Network Information. Ensure that there are no spaces in any field of the form. Entries must include: A host name, local port number, AE Title, IP address and Net Mask for the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. The IP addresses for the default gateway and other routers at the site for ROUTING INFORMATION. The host name, IP address, port and AE Title for each device the site wants connected to the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO for DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION. A field for the make (manufacturer) and the revision of the device, is also included. This information may be useful for error solving.
2 - 10
2-3-5
Networking Pre-installation Requirements (contd).
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Host Name AE Title Local Port IP Address Net Mask . . . . . .
ROUTING INFORMATION
Destination IP Addresses . . . . . . . . .
GATEWAY IP Addresses Default . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROUTER1 ROUTER2 ROUTER3 DICOM APPLICATION INFORMATION NAME Store 1
MAKE/REVISION
AE TITLE
IP ADDRESSES . . .
PORT
Store 2
Store 3
Store 4
Store 5
Store 6
Work list
Storage Commit
MPPS
Figure 2-2 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information
2 - 11
2 - 12
Chapter 3 Installation
This chapter contains information needed to install Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. Included is a procedure that describes how to receive and unpack the equipment and how to file a damage or loss claim. How to prepare the facility and unit of the actual installation, and how to check and test the unit, probes, and external peripherals for electrical safety are included in this procedure. Also included in this section are guidelines for transporting the unit to a new site.
Table 3-1
Section
3-1 3-3 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10
Description
Overview Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment Preparing for Installation Completing the Installation Configuration Connectivity Installation Paperwork
Page Number
3-1 3-3 3-8 3-8 3-21 3-35 3-56
Section 3-2 Installation Reminders

3-2-1 Average Installation Time
Table 3-2 Average Installation Time
Average Installation Time
0.5 hour 4 hours 2 hour 0.5 hour Dependent on the configuration Dependent on the configuration
Description
Unpacking the scanner Install Scanner wo/options DICOM Network Configuration Install InSite / iLink
Comments
Chapter 3 - Installation
3-1
3-2-2
DANGER
Installation Warnings When using any test instrument that is capable of opening the ac ground line (i.e., meters ground switch is open), dont touch the unit!
CAUTION If the unit is very cold or hot, do not turn on its power until it has had a chance to acclimate to
its operating environment.
Table 3-3
C F hrs 60 140 8 55 131 6 50 122 4 45 113 2
Time for Settlement

40 104 0 35 96 0 30 86 0 25 77 0 20 68 0 15 59 0 10 50 0 5 41 2 0 32 4 -5 23 6 -10 14 8 -15 5 10 -20 -4 12 -25 -13 14 -30 -22 16 -35 -31 18 -40 -40 20
CAUTION To prevent electrical shock, connect the unit to a properly grounded power outlet. Do not use a
three to two prong adapter. This defeats safety grounding.
CAUTION Do not wear the ESD wrist strap when you work on live circuits and more than 30 V peak is
present.
CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System
performance and cooling require this.
CAUTION OPERATOR MANUAL(S)
The User Manual(s) should be fully read and understood before operating the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO and kept near the unit for quick reference.
CAUTION Acoustic Output Hazard
Although the ultrasound energy transmitted from the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO probe is within AIUM/ NEMA standards, avoid unnecessary exposure. Ultrasound energy can produce heat and mechanical damage.
3-2
Section 3-3 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment

CAUTION Please read this procedure before unpacking the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
3-3-1
Introduction
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is a fine tuned electronic equipment, and should be treated properly during transportation. If the box is damaged or if the tilt & drop indicators show failure, please inform the sales representative immediately. Do also fill in that the tilt & drop indicators show failure in the Package column on the Post delivery checklist. See Damage In Transportation on page v in the beginning of this manual. We strongly advice you to store the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO packing material in undamaged condition in case of future transportation. The weight of the special designed wooden transportation box, with a Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO and other normal equipment included, is approximate 300 kg (615 lbs).
CAUTION Have two people available to unpack the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Attempts to move the unit considerable distances or on an incline by one person could result in injury or damage or both.
3-3
Section 3-4 Receiving Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO

3-4-1 Introduction
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is a fine tuned electronic equipment, and should be treated properly during transportation. NOTE: If the box is damaged or if the tilt & drop indicators show failure, please inform the sales representative immediately. Do also fill in that the tilt & drop indicators show failure in the Package column on the Post delivery checklist.
Drop Indicators turn red
Tilt Indicators turn red
Figure 3-1 Tilt and Drop Indicators We strongly advice you to store the packing materials in undamaged condition in case of future transportation the equipment. 3-4 Section 3-4 - Receiving Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
Section 3-5 Unpacking Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO

Table 3-4
Step 1. Task Open the four hinges on each door and remove the doors. One of the doors are used as ramp out off and into the transportation box. On the first version of the Transportation Box, only the front door is meant to be used as a ramp. It has bevel cut in one end. Front door bevel cut. This end of the door should be used as the lower end of the ramp.
Unpacking Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
2.
Place the front door as a ramp against the rear edge of the pallet.
Labank
On the first version transportation box, which is no longer manufactured by GE, a 10 cm board (not furnished) is placed as a support under the upper end of the ramp. 3.
On the second version transportation box, the ramp is placed directly on the labank ends.
Carefully remove the accessory box, and any other items, including the wooden shelf above the scanners keyboard and all the filling material, from the Transportation Box.
3-5

Step 4. Task
Unpacking Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO (continued)
The rear wheels on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO do not have a direction lock. That is why the instrument has to be removed through the rear end of the Transportation Box. Press once on the brake pedal to release the brakes. Keep direction lock activated. The direction lock keeps the front wheels from swiveling and blocking the system inside the narrow transportation box.
5.
Carefully move the instrument out of the Transportation Box, down the ramp, with rear end first.
6. 7. 8.
Remove the clear plastic (wrapped around the scanner) from the unit. Place all the filling material inside the Transportation Box, close it and store it for possible use in the future. You may want to start to fill out the Product Locator Card and the Post Delivery Check List, see "Installation Paperwork" on page 3-56
3-6
Section 3-5 - Unpacking Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
3-5-1
Transportation Box Dimensions
159 cm
130 cm 80 cm On first version box: 3 cm protruding ends in front
Figure 3-2 Transportation box dimensions
3-7
Section 3-6 Preparing for Installation

3-6-1 Physical Inspection
Verify that the system arrived intact (visual inspection). If damaged, refer to Damage In Transportationon page v in this manual. Verify that all items are present (see the Packing List)
3-6-2
EMI Protection
This unit has been designed to minimize the effects of Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI). Many of the covers, shields, and screws are provided primarily to protect the system from image artifacts caused by this interference. For this reason, it is imperative that all covers and hardware are installed and secured before the unit is put into operation. See Chapter 2, "EMI Limitations" on page 2-4 for more information about EMI protection.
Section 3-7 Completing the Installation

3-7-1
3-7-1-1
System Specifications
System Requirements Verification Verify that the site meets the requirements listed in Chapter 2 (see: "Facility Needs" on page 2-7) Verify that the specifications below dont conflict with any on site conditions
3-7-1-2
Physical Dimensions The physical dimensions of the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO unit are summarized in Table 3-5.
Table 3-5
Height
137.5 - 157.5 54.1 - 62
Physical Dimensions of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO with monitor and peripherals

Width
64 25.2
Depth
90 35,4
Unit
cm Inches
3-7-1-3
Weight with Monitor and Peripherals Table 3-6

Model
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
Weight of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO with monitor and peripherals

Weight [kg]
200
Weight [lbs]
410
3-7-1-4
Acoustic Noise Output Less than 70dB(A) according to the standard DIN 45635 - 19 - 01 - KL2.
3-8
Section 3-6 - Preparing for Installation
3-7-2
WARNING
Electrical Specifications
CONNECTING A Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO UNIT TO THE WRONG VOLTAGE LEVEL WILL MOST LIKELY DESTROY THE UNIT.
Verification of the Systems Voltage Settings Verify that the mains voltage specified for the unit is available on site. The Voltage settings for the unit is found on the label to the left of the Mains Power Circuit Breaker on the rear of the system, see Figure 3-3 on page 3-9.
3-7-2-1
3-7-2-2
Electrical Specifications for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. Table 3-7 Electrical Specifications for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
VOLTAGE

FB000030 FC000060 FC000180 FC000190 FC000200 FC000210
DESCRIPTION
VIVID 7 (BT01) VIVID 7 (BT01) VIVID 7 PRO (BT02) VIVID 7 PRO (BT02) VIVID 7 (BT02) VIVID 7 (BT02)
TOLERANCES
10% 10% 10% 10% 10% 10%
CURRENT
5A 10 A 5A 10 A 5A 10 A
FREQUENCY
50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz
Power Rating Label
Figure 3-3 Mains Circuit Breaker and Power Rating Label
3-9
3-7-3
Connect Footswitch
Connect Footswitch to External I/O at the rear side of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. When not in use, store it in the tray below.
Footswitch connection
Figure 3-4 Footswitch connection
3-7-4
Connect Telephone Line to Modem Connector

(For iLink/InSite Use) Connect an analog telephone line to the Modem Connector on External I/O at the rear side of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Modem Connector
Figure 3-5 Connect an analog telephone line to Modem Connector
3 - 10
3-7-5
Connect ECG
Connect ECG to Patient I/O Module in the front of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
ECG connection
Figure 3-6 ECG connection to Patient I/O Module
3-7-6
Connect Phono
Connect Phono to Patient I/O Module in the front of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Phono connection
Figure 3-7 Phono connection
3 - 11
3-7-7
Connect Pulse Pressure Transducer

Connect Pulse Pressure Transducer to Patient I/O Module in the front of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Pulse Pressure Transducer connection
Figure 3-8 Pulse Pressure Transducer connection
3-7-8
Connect Ethernet
Connect Ethernet to External I/O at the rear side of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Ethernet connection
Figure 3-9 Ethernet connection
3 - 12
3-7-9
Probe Connection
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO has four positions to plug in probes. The connector to the left is a dummy connector, only used for parking one probe. The three other connectors are selectable and used for scanning. A separate Pedof Doppler probe connector is also available.
Probe Connectors
Pedof Doppler Probe Connector Locked position
Parking Slot for probe connector
Unlocked position
Figure 3-10 Probe Connectors 3-7-9-1 NOTE: Connect a Probe It is not necessary to turn OFF Power to connect or disconnect a probe.
CAUTION Do not allow the probe head to hang freely. Excessive impact to the probe will result in
irreparable damage.
CAUTION To prevent probe connector pins, or PCB board damage, do not use excessive force when
connecting the probes.
1.) Hold the probe connector vertically with the cable pointing upward. 2.) Turn the connector locking handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position. 3.) Align the connector with the probe port and carefully push into place. 4.) Rotate the locking handle to the full vertical position to lock in place. (See Figure 3-10.) 5.) Position the probe cable so that it is not resting on the floor.
CAUTION Take the following precautions with the probe cables:
Keep away from the wheels Do not bend Do not cross cables between probes. 3-7-9-2 Disconnect Probe 1.) Rotate the lock handle counter-clockwise to the horizontal position to unlock the connector. (See Figure 3-10.) 2.) Remove the connector from the port. 3.) Ensure that the probe head is clean before placing the probe in its storage case, see section 10-54 on page 10-7 for cleaning instructions. Chapter 3 - Installation 3 - 13
3-7-10
3-7-10-1
DANGER
Power ON/Boot Up
Connecting Mains Power to the Unit
Never use a three-to-two prong adapter; this defeats the safety ground.
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes. NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON. When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
NOTE:
Table 3-8
Step
Connecting Mains Power to the unit

Task
.
Expected Result(s)
Connect the female plug on the Power Cable to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
Clasp OFF
The retaining clasp prevent the plug from being unplugged during use.
Lock the plug in position with the retaining clasp.
Clasp ON
OFF Position Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, eventually switch it OFF.
Connect the other end of the Power Cable (with the male plug) The unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up. to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the proper rated voltage.
3 - 14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-7-10-2 Turn Unit ON Table 3-9
Step
Turn Unit ON
Task Expected Result(s)
Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit. Mains Power Circuit Breaker in ON position
You will hear a click from the relays in the AC Power/AC Controller. The unit is ready for Boot Up.
1) The units ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the fan noise). 2) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Control Panel (Console), Monitor, Card Rack and Backend Processor. 3) Backend Processor and rest of Scanner starts with the following sequence: 4) Backend Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software. Press the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel (Keyboard) once.
.
5) The Start Screen (Vivid) is displayed on the monitor 6) A start-up bar is displayed on the monitor, indicating the progress of the software loading.
ON/OFF key
NOTE:
If the unit has been in the OFF condition for an extended period of time, (3 to 5 days or more), the unit may not boot, or may beep when turned on. See System Doesnt Boot on page 7-67. for more details, including how to recover.
3 - 15

Step
Turn Unit ON (continued)

The software initiates and set up the Card Rack and the rest of the instrument. The backlight in the keyboard is lit. As soon as the software has been loaded, a 2D screen is displayed on the screen.
Wait for the unit to boot.
Total time used for start-up is typically three minutes.
3 - 16
3-7-11 3-7-12
Power Shut Down Switching OFF the Unit

See "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5 for a detailed description. 1.) Press the ON/OFF button on the top left of the Control Panel to display the Exit dialog window. 2.) Select SHUTDOWN. The shutdown process takes a few seconds and is completed when the Control Panel illumination is turned off. To completely switch off the unit before disconnecting the Mains Power Cable, follow the additional steps below: 3.) Set the Circuit Breaker (on rear of unit) to OFF. 4.) Remove the plug from the mains power outlet.
3-7-12-1
Overview When the unit is switched off, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence. The unit can be switched off into two states: Standby Mode: Most of the system is powered down, but a certain portion of the unit remains energized. The standby mode allows a shorter reboot time when the system is used on a daily basis or moved from one place to another. Full Shut Down: The entire system is shut down. It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week.
3-7-12-2
Power Shut Down to Standby Mode This procedure describes the needed steps to power down the unit to Standby mode: 1.) Press the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel once to display the System - Exit menu on the screen.
.
Press this key.
Figure 3-11 Press ON-OFF key once
3 - 17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-7-12-2 Power Shut Down to Standby Mode (contd)
Figure 3-12 System - Exit menu The System - Exit menu gives you the following choices: Logoff Use this button to log off the current user. The system remains on and ready for a new user to log on. The dimmed button in Figure 3-12 on page 3-18 indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment. Standby Use this button to select the Standby mode, allowing a shorter reboot time. The next step describes the use of this button. Shutdown... Use this button to Shut Down the system. Cancel Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
2.) Click STANDBY to select Standby mode. If the power cable is removed from the wall outlet the system will remain in Standby mode for approximately 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for a longer period of time, a full shutdown is automatically performed. NOTE: When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
3 - 18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-7-12-3 Full Power Shut Down
This procedure describes the needed steps to do a complete power down of the system: 1.) Press the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel once to display the System - Exit menu on the screen.
.
Press this key.
Figure 3-14 System - Exit menu The System - Exit menu gives you the following choices: Logoff Use this button to log off the current user. The system remains on and ready for a new user to log on. The dimmed button in Figure 3-12 on page 3-18 indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment. Standby Use this button to select the Standby mode, allowing a shorter reboot time. Shutdown... Use this button to Shut Down the system.The next step describes the use of this button. Cancel Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
3 - 19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-7-12-3 Full Power Shut Down (contd)
2.) Click SHUTDOWN to do a complete power down of the unit. Backend Processor will first turn OFF the Scanner activity and print the message Please wait Shutdown in progress in the LCD display. Then it starts to shut down itself. The time to turn down the Scanner including the Backend Processor, may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute. The last thing that shut down, is the light in the LCD displays, indicating that you can continue to the next step. 3.) Switch OFF the CIRCUIT BREAKER (located on the rear of the unit)
.
Circuit Breaker
Figure 3-15 Circuit Breaker located on rear of the unit This will cut power distribution within the unit. If the Backend Processor is still running, the internal Un-interupted Power Supply (UPS) will switch over to battery power and supply the Backend Processor with power until it has shut down properly. A periodic high-pitch sound alarm indicates that the Backend Processor is running on battery power.
3 - 20
Section 3-8 Configuration

OVERVIEW
Table 3-10
Sub-section
3-8-1 3-8-1-1 3-8-1-2 3-8-1-3 3-8-1-4 3-8-1-5 3-8-2-3 3-8-3 3-8-3-1 3-8-3-2 3-8-6
Contents in Section 3-5

Description
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Configuration Log on to the system Enter Location Date and Time Adjustments Language Selection Units of Measure Select Video Format, PAL or NTSC Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection Approved On-board Peripherals Off-board Peripherals Software Options Configuration
Page Number
3-21 3-22 3-24 3-25 3-26 3-27 3-29 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33
3 - 21
3-8-1
3-8-1-1
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Configuration

Log on to the system Table 3-11 Log on to the system
The Operator Login window is displayed.
Step
1.
Press CONFIG on the alphanumeric keyboard.
2.
Click the down-arrow to the right of the Operator field to view the Operator pull down list From the factory, these two users are defined without password. - adm - usr It is possible for the administrator (adm) to establish unique passwords for each user, but dont do it now. Select the user adm. - From the factory, the password has been left blank, so first try to log on without any password. - If the log-on fails, you may try to use the password service. - As a last resort, contact the hospitals network administrator (or person responsible for the ultrasound unit), and ask for the password. The Emergency button stores data only from current patient examination.
3.
4.
The IMAGING AND ANALYSIS - GLOBAL LEVEL window is displayed.
Click LOG ON.
3 - 22
Section 3-8 - Configuration

Step
5.
Log on to the system (continued)

The System Setup window is displayed
Click SYSTEM to select the System Setup window. System
3 - 23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-1-2 Enter Location
Figure 3-16 Hospital and Department Name
Table 3-12
Step
1. 2.
Location Name
Open the Configuration Window as described in 3-8-1-1 "Log on The System Settings Window is displayed. to the system" on page 3-22. The 24 first characters of this name are displayed on the scanning Click once in the Hospital field, see (a) in Figure 3-16, and type screens title bar (after restart) the name of the hospital (max 64 characters). All 64 are displayed on the image properties on saved images (after restart). Click once in the Department field, see (b) in Figure 3-16, and type the name of the department (max 64 characters). This name will be displayed on the image properties on saved images as soon as the unit has been restarted.
3.
3 - 24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-1-3 Date and Time Adjustments
c d e
Figure 3-17 Date and Time Adjustments
Table 3-13
Step
1. 2. 3. 4.
Date and Time adjustments

Open the Configuration Window as described in 3-8-1-1 "Log on The System Settings Window is displayed. to the system" on page 3-22. Adjust the date, see (a) in Figure 3-17. Adjust the time, see (b) in Figure 3-17. Select the preferred Time Format, see (c) in Figure 3-17. Select the preferred Date Format, see (d) in Figure 3-17. DD = Date (two digits) MM = Month (two digits) YYYY = Year (four digits) EU: the European DD.MM.YYYY format is used US: the American MM.DD.YYYY format is used 1900: the number 19 is automatically displayed when entering the year in the patient date of birth. To edit century, press BACKSPACE twice. 2000: the number 20 is automatically displayed when entering the year Select Default Century (1900, 2000 or None), see (e) in Figure in the patient date of birth. 3-17. To edit century, press BACKSPACE twice. None: the four digits have to be typed when entering the year in the patient date of birth. The selected setting will be used as soon as the unit has been restarted. New date is displayed New time is displayed 24: the 24 hour format is used 12: the 12 AM/PM hour format is used
5.
6.
3 - 25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-1-4 Language Selection
Language
Figure 3-18 Language Selection
Table 3-14
Step
1. 2.
Language Adjustments
Open the Configuration Window as described in 3-8-1-1 "Log on The System Settings Window is displayed. to the system" on page 3-22. Use the Language drop down dialog, see Figure 3-18, to select The selected language will be used as soon as the unit has been restarted. your preferred language for the on-screen interface. The following languages are available; - ENG - English - NOR - Norwegian - DEU - German - ITA - Italian - FRA - French - ESP - Spanish - RUS - Russian - GRE - Greek - DAN - Danish - SWE - Swedish
3 - 26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-1-5 Units of Measure
Units
Figure 3-19 Select Units of Measure
Table 3-15
Step
1. 2. 3.
Select Units of Measure

Open the Configuration Window as described in 3-8-1-1 "Log on The System Settings Window is displayed. to the system" on page 3-22. Use the drop down dialog to select Metric or US Units. Restart the scanner. The selected units (Metric or US) will be used for measurements as soon as the unit has been restarted. All the changed settings will be used after the restart.
3 - 27
3-8-2
3-8-2-1
Service Screen
Overview The Service Screen gives you access to; select Video Format to be used by VCR select VCR type adjust LCDs Contrast and Backlight Intensity Keyboard Setups Printer Setup
3-8-2-2
Open Service Screen 1.) Press CONFIG 2.) Select the user adm.
NOTE:
From the factory, the password has been left blank, so first try to log on without any password. If the log-on fails, you may try to use the password service. As a last resort, contact the hospitals network administrator (or person responsible for the ultrasound unit), and ask for the password. 3.) Click LOG ON 4.) Click SERVICE to view the Service Screen, see Figure 3-20 on page 3-28.
Figure 3-20 Service Screen
3 - 28
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-2-3 Select Video Format, PAL or NTSC
This selection must correspond to the Video Standard (PAL or NTSC) used by the Video Cassette Recorder. From the Video Settings drop-down menu, select the correct video format (NTSC or PAL).
Select Video Format
Figure 3-21 Select Video Format
3-8-2-4
Select Video Cassette Recorder (VCR) Type Use the VCR drop down menu to select VCR type. See "Approved On-board Peripherals" on page 332 for approved VCRs for use with Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Select Video Player
Figure 3-22 Select Video Player
3-8-2-5
Adjust LCDs Contrast and Backlight Intensity Use the LCD Backlight/Contrast controls to adjust LCD Contrast and LCD Backlight Intensity.
Adjust LCD Contrast and Backlight Intensity
Figure 3-23 Adjust LCDs Contrast and Backlight Intensity
3 - 29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-2-6 Keyboard Setup
Click KEYBOARD SETUP to get access to Keyboard Properties
Select Keyboard setup
Figure 3-24 Select Keyboard Setup
The Keyboard Properties window has controls for: Character Repeat delay Character Repeat Rate Cursor Blink Rate
Figure 3-25 Select Keyboard Properties
3 - 30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-2-7 Add Printer
Click Add Printer
Figure 3-26 Select Add Printer
Click ADD PRINTER to start the Add Printer (Installation) Wizard.
Figure 3-27 Add Printer Wizard Follow the instructions in the Wizard to install a new printer.
3 - 31
3-8-3
3-8-3-1
Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection

Approved On-board Peripherals The following list covers the on-board peripherals available for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Printer, Black & White, Video, Sony Printer, Color, Video, Sony, both PAL and NTSC versions are available VCR, Panasonic, both PAL and NTSC versions are available MO Drive (part of Backend Processor) CD-R Drive (part of Backend Processor)
NOTICE Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO supports CD-R discs. CD-RW discs are not supported.
3-8-3-2
Off-board Peripherals These printers are connected via TCP/IP Network Color Inkjet Printer, HP Deskjet 990 Cxi Network Printer (Option) (This printer replaces the EPSON 980N printer, see below) Detailed delivery checkout and installation coverage of the printer is found in HP Deskjet 990 Cxi Network Printer Installation Manual, Part Number EP194422. The printer is available in two versions: EP100422, 110 VAC EP100423, 220 VAC
Color Inkjet Printer, EPSON 980N (Option). Installation Instructions for this printer can be found in the EchoPAC PC Service Manual, Part Number EP091298
3-8-4
Available Probes
See Section 9-17 - Probes on page 9-28.
3-8-5
Video Specification
See Section 5-12 - Video Specifications on page 5-95.
3 - 32
3-8-6
3-8-6-1 3-8-6-1-1
Software Options Configuration

Software Option Installation Prerequisite Password (Software Option Key) A Password enables the software option or combination of software options. This password is specific for each Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
3-8-6-2
On site Configuration 1.) Press Config (See Log on to the system on page 3-22. for detailed description) 2.) Select the user adm 3.) Click LOG ON 4.) Click SERVICE 5.) Click ADMIN
System Admin Tab
New
Admin
Figure 3-28 Admin Screen
3 - 33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-8-6-2 On site Configuration (contd)
System Admin Tab
New
Admin
Figure 3-29 Admin Screen
6.) Click the SYSTEM ADMIN tab 7.) Click NEW
Field for Software Option Key (Serial String)
Figure 3-30 Software Option Key
CAUTION Incorrect password entry will result in loss of system options.
If password is incorrect, please contact your local GE Service representative.
8.) Type the Password (Software Option Key). 9.) Press OK to save the new setting. 10.)Close the Config window. 3-8-6-3 Remote Check and Configuration N/A
3 - 34
Section 3-9 Connectivity

3-9-1 Introduction
The next pages describes how to connect the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO to a remote archive/work station or a DICOM service, using a TCP/IP connection.
Major subjects discussed in this section; "Physical Connection" on page 3-35 "Connectivity Setup" on page 3-37
3-9-2
3-9-2-1
Physical Connection
Ethernet Switch Connections An Ethernet Switch, Part Number: 066E0741, is used to connect Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO to an EchoPAC PC and a network printer.
Informative LEDS
Ethernet Cable connectors
MDI Button Controls the fifth connector, making it crossed or non-crossed.
Figure 3-31 Ethernet Switch Identifications

:
Table 3-16
Position
MDI Button Position Descriptions

Label Function
X To PC
To connect an end station or a Server to the Port
= To HUB
To connect a HUB or another Switch to the Port
3 - 35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-2-2 Local Network Connection to EchoPAC PC Workstation
Do not use the fifth connector and the switch can be in any position,
EchoPAC PC
Use only Standard non-crossed Ethernet cabling.
Network Printer
Vivid7
Vivid3
Figure 3-32 Local Network Connection
3-9-2-3
Hospital Network Connection to EchoPAC PC Workstation
Using standard non-crossed cables and MDI switch set to position =HUB, connect like this.
Wall connection
EchoPAC PC
Network Printer
Vivid3 or Vivid7
Figure 3-33 Hospital Network Connections
See the EchoPAC PC Service Manual, Part Number EP091298 for details about EchoPAC PC, and its set-up.
3 - 36
Section 3-9 - Connectivity
3-9-3
NOTE: 3-9-3-1
Connectivity Setup
If connected as a stand-alone network (only scanner, EchoPAC PC work station and eventually a network printer in a separate network), you should use default delivery settings. Introduction To be able to use the network functions when connected to a hospital network, the scanner must have a proper network address. Before you can set up the scanner, you need to collect some information. The "Worksheet for DICOM Network Information" on page 2-11 can be used for gathering this information. Typically source for this information is the network administrator. Follow the steps below to prepare the scanner for use on the network.
3-9-3-2
Select TCP/IP Set-up Screen 1.) Press CONFIG on the Control Panel and log on as adm (see page 18).
Connectivity
Figure 3-34 Measuring and Analyzes - Global Level
3 - 37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-2 Select TCP/IP Set-up Screen (contd) 2.) Select CONNECTIVITY (in the lower part of the window)
Connectivity
Figure 3-35 Connectivity Opening Screen
3.) Select the TCP/IP TAB (it is named Tcpip). (See example in Figure 3-36.).
TCP/IP Tab
IP settings area for the scanner
Remote Archive Setup area
Figure 3-36 TCP/IP Set-up Screen, Overview
3 - 38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-3 Set the Scanners Network Information In the IP settings area of the screen, enter the; NOTE:
IP address for scanner. Default IP address from factory: 10.0.0.3 Subnet Mask for scanner IP address for Default Gateway
Do not enable DHCP. The use of DHCP is not supported.

.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
Figure 3-37 TCP/IP Set-up for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
3 - 39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-4 Set the Remote Archives Network Information
In the Remote Archive Setup area of the screen (see example in Figure 3-36.), enter the; 1.) Remote Archive IP address 2.) Remote Archive Name
.
Save settings
Remote Archive Setup area Remote Archive IP address Remote Archive Name
Figure 3-38 TCP/IP Set-up for Remote Archive (EchoPAC PC) 3-9-3-5 Save the New Settings 1.) Press SAVE SETTINGS to save the new settings. The new settings are saved to a common settings file. After a restart, the settings are also included in other screens. 2.) Restart Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO to make the changes take place.
3 - 40
Verification of a Connection Set Up to an EchoPAC PC Work Station 1.) Press CONFIG on the Control Panel and log on as adm (see "Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Configuration" on page 3-22). 2.) Select CONNECTIVITY (in the lower part of the window) 3.) Click on the VIEWS tab, located in upper part of window, to display the Current Dataflow Views screen, see Figure 3-39.
VIEWS tab DATAFLOW button
CONNECTIVITY tab
Figure 3-39 Current Dataflow Views screen 4.) Click the DATAFLOW button to see all available data flows, see Figure 3-40. 5.) Click the + beside the dataflow you want to check (here: Remote Archive - Remote HD) to see its contents.
DATAFLOW button
Click +
Figure 3-40 Pre-configured Data flows in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Chapter 3 - Installation
3 - 41
Verification of a Connection Set Up to an EchoPAC PC Work Station (contd)

.
Click once to highlight servers name
Figure 3-41 Remote HD dataflow contents
The Remote Archive - Remote HD includes an EchoPAC PC with one Service also called Remote Archive - Remote HD. The name of this service indicates that the archive is located on a hard disk on a remote server (EchoPAC PC is used as an server). 6.) Click once on the EchoPAC PCs name to highlight it, see Figure 3-41. 7.) Click CHECK, see Figure 3-42, to verify if there is a connection between the ultrasound unit and the EchoPAC PC work station.
Click CHECK
Figure 3-42 Verify dataflow connection 3 - 42 Section 3-9 - Connectivity
Red X
Figure 3-43 Verification of connection failed
In the example in Figure 3-43, the red X next to the computer sign ( failed. The cause may be; -
), means that the check
the setup of the network information, either on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO or on the EchoPAC PC, or the network connection is broken somewhere between the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO and the EchoPAC PC.
A green light next to the computer sign means that a network connection is in place.
3 - 43
Verification of a Connection Set Up to an EchoPAC PC Work Station (contd) 8.) Click the DATAFLOW tab to view the Dataflow Services window.
DATAFLOW tab Dataflow selection area
Dataflow Services area
Locale Archive -Internal HD service
Figure 3-44 Dataflow Services Window
9.) Select Remote Archive - Remote HD on the drop-down menu to see the contents of that dataflow.
DATAFLOW tab Dataflow Name dropdown menu
Remote Archive -Remote HD
Figure 3-45 Obtaining Dataflow Contents Overview
3 - 44
Remote Archive Remote HD
Figure 3-46 Remote Archive - Remote HD Dataflow Contents Overview
3 - 45
Verification of a Connection Set Up to an EchoPAC PC Work Station (contd) 10.)Select the SERVICES tab (located near the top of the window).
SERVICES tab
Name drop-down menu
Local Archive - Local Storage
Figure 3-47 Dataflow Services 11.)Select the EchoPAC PC work station you want to connect to, from the Name drop-down menu. In this example, it is called EchoPAC7-000000.
Name drop-down menu
Select Server
Figure 3-48 Dataflow Services, Choices and Setup
3 - 46
Verification of a Connection Set Up to an EchoPAC PC Work Station (contd) 12.)Verify that the IP-address is correct, indicating that you have selected the right unit. If the IP number is wrong, it means that you are addressing the wrong device (computer). Correct the address and do a new verification before you continue.
IP address for selected device
Figure 3-49 Verify/change IP address to selected device.
3 - 47
Verification of a Connection Set Up to an EchoPAC PC Work Station (contd) 13.)In the list of Services, select Remote Archive - Remote Storage.
Remote Archive Remote Storage
Corresponding sql.ini name
Storage location for Image Files Storage location for Report Files
Figure 3-50 Dataflow Service Choice and Setup 14.)In the list of Services select Remote Archive - Remote Storage. 15.)Change the Corresponding sql.ini name to reflect the name of the ECHOPAC7-nnnnnn work station. The Corresponding sql.ini name is a combination of the host name plus a space and the two letters DB. Example: If the EchoPAC PC name is ECHOPAC7-987654, the Corresponding sql.ini name will be ECHOPAC7987654 DB 16.)Change the Placement of Image Files and Placement of Report Files names so they reflect the name of the EchoPAC PC work station. Example: If the EchoPAC PC name is ECHOPAC7-987654, the Placement of Image Files and Placement of Report Files are both ECHOPAC7-987654\Archive This completes the EchoPAC PC connection setup. NOTE: Remember that these settings have no effect until you have logged on to the dataflow. It may be necessary to log on and log off this dataflow before the settings work.
3 - 48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-7 Set Up Connection to a DICOM Server in a Network No special service tools are required to do this set-up. 3-9-3-7-1 Preparations
Obtain the following information from the network administrator: 3-9-3-7-2 DICOM servers IP address, subnet mask (and gateway, if required) Servers Port Number Servers AE Title IP address for the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
Establish Network Connection to Hospitals Network (if not already established) Connect an Ethernet cable from the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO to the wall network outlet.
3-9-3-7-3
Set up TCP/IP address on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO 1.) Set up TCP/IP address on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. (See Connectivity Setup on page 3-37.) a.) Select CONFIG b.) Log on as adm c.) Click CONNECTIVITY d.) Click TCPIP tab e.) Enter IP-Address, Subnet Mask (and gateway, if required). f.) Click SAVE SETTINGS. You will be asked to reboot, but wait with that until later.
3-9-3-7-4
DICOM Servers Set Up It may be necessary for the administrator to enter information about Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO into the DICOM servers set-up. This information is typically Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs AE Title and maybe also the IP address which he provides. (See Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs AE Title on next page for a description on how to obtain Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs AE Title.)
3 - 49
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-7 3-9-3-7-5
Set Up Connection to a DICOM Server in a Network (contd) Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs AE Title 1.) Select CONNECTIVITY 2.) Click on the SERVICES tab. Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs AE Title is listed below My Computer (here it is VIVID7-000000).
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7
Figure 3-51 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs AE Title
3-9-3-7-6
Set-up of DICOM Server in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Configuration Screens 1.) From the Name pull-down menu select DICOMSERVER.
DICOM Servers IP Address
Figure 3-52 Select DICOM Server
2.) Enter the IP address of the DICOM server in the IP Address field.
DICOM Servers IP Address
Figure 3-53 Set DICOM Servers IP Address
3 - 50
Set Up Connection to a DICOM Server in a Network (contd) 3-9-3-7-6 Set-up of DICOM Server in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Configuration Screens (contd) 3.) Click once on the Pure DICOM Storage line under Services and the bottom part of the screen will be populated with set-up information for the DICOM server.
Click Once on Pure DICOM Storage. Before clicking
After
Figure 3-54 Click Once on Pure DICOM Storage
3 - 51
Set Up Connection to a DICOM Server in a Network (contd) 3-9-3-7-6 Set-up of DICOM Server in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Configuration Screens (contd) 4.) Change the Name to a name you pick for the DICOM server (e.g. ProSolv server). It doesnt really matter what this name is.
Change this Name
Figure 3-55 Set DICOM Servers Name
5.) Change the AE Title to the name you got from the network administrator. This name must match exactly and is case sensitive.
AE Title Port No. Allow Raw Data enabler Max Framer ate dropdown menu setting Allow Multi frame enabler Quality % setting Compression drop-down menu
Figure 3-56 DICOM Servers Settings
6.) Change the port number to the number you got from the administrator. 7.) Dont touch the other settings, meaning they should be as follows:
Parameter
Allow raw data Max Framerate Only Black and White Compression Allow multiframe Reopen per image
Setting
Unchecked 25 Unchecked JPEG Checked Unchecked
Comments
You can go up to 30, but dont select full, as it may increase Image Store time
Table 3-17
Default DICOM Setup in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Configuration Screen
8.) Click on the keyboard CONFIG button to exit config, and REBOOT the system.
3 - 52
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-7-7 Check the Connection to the DICOM Server (Ping)
1.) After the system is rebooted, press Config, log on as adm (no password) and enter the Connectivity screen. 2.) Click the VIEWS tab and the DATAFLOW button and you will see all available data flows.
VIEWS tab
DATAFLOW button
Figure 3-57 All Data flows - Select DICOM Server
3.) Click on the + by the DICOM Server dataflow to see the contents of that dataflow. This dataflow has one DICOM Server with Storage Service. Two new lines will appear, DICOMSERVER and the name of the server (e.g. ProSolv server).
..
DICOM server Storage service
Figure 3-58 Views and Dataflow Selections
4.) Click once on DICOMSERVER to highlight the line, then click on the Check button. You should get a green check mark. This is a hardware ping indicating that you have contact with the DICOM servers hardware. If you get a red cross, double check cabling and TCPIP addresses). 5.) Click once on the next line (e.g. ProSolv server) to highlight, then click on CHECK. You should get a green check mark. This is a DICOM ping indicating that you have contact with the DICOM server software. If you get a red cross, double check AE Title and port number). Chapter 3 - Installation 3 - 53
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-7-8 Setting the DICOM Server as Default Dataflow
1.) Finnish the verification in "Check the Connection to the DICOM Server (Ping)" on page 3-53. You need to have green check marks on both Hardware Ping and DICOM Ping before you continue. 1.) Click the DATAFLOW tab. 2.) Select DICOM Server dataflow on the Dataflow Name drop-down menu.
.
DATAFLOW tab
Dataflow Name drop-down menu
Select DICOM Server
Figure 3-59 Selecting DICOM Dataflow Services
3.) Check the Default box.

.
Click once in this check box to make DICOM the Default dataflow
Figure 3-60 Set DICOM as Default Dataflow
4.) Exit Config and restart the scanner (by hitting CTRL-ALT-R at the same time).
3 - 54
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 3-9-3-7-9 Performing a Study
1.) After restart, hit New Exam (youll see that DICOM Server is the default dataflow), enter a last name and patient ID and start scanning and image acquisition. Images are stored in the local image buffer on the system. 2.) After having finished the study, click on New Exam and select All when asked if you want to save. The images will now be transferred to the server via a spooler. 3.) To view the status of the spooler job, press the F4 key on the keyboard. You can select the Refresh button to get an update of the status of the spool job. 4.) Once the jobs are transferred, they will be deleted from the spooler. 3-9-3-7-10 Going Offline 1.) If you go offline with the scanner, you can still use the DICOM Server dataflow, and images will be saved into the spooler. 2.) Then, when connecting to the server, go into the spooler and highlight all the studies. Then select SEND TO and select the server name (e.g. ProSolv server) from the Send to Service and click on SEND. All selected studies will then be sent to the server.
3 - 55
Section 3-10 Installation Paperwork

NOTE: During and after installation, the documentation (i.e. User Manuals, Installation Manuals etc.) for the peripheral units must be kept as part of the original system documentation. This will ensure that all relevant safety and user informations are available during the operation and service of the complete system.
3-10-1
User Manual(s)
Check that the correct User Manual(s), per software (sw) revision and language, for the system is included. See section 9-21 on page 9-34 for complete list of User Manuals.
3-10-1-1 NOTE:
Product Locator Installation Card The Product Locator Installation Card shown may not be same as the provided Product Locator card.
Figure 3-61 Product Locator Installation Card
3 - 56
Section 3-10 - Installation Paperwork
3-10-2
Complete the Post Delivery Check List

Please fill in the enclosed form Post Delivery Check List (at the back of this reminder) and fax it to our System Test Department, Fax # +47 3302 1354, as soon as you have powered up and checked the system.This is most important for us to ensure top quality on our delivery. If any deviation according to specifications occurs, the responsible system tester will contact you immediately.
3 - 57
3-10-3
Post Delivery Check List

Fill in your observations and return the check list to: GE Vingmed Ultrasound Fax No.: +47 3302 1354 Attention: System Test Department System tester: ____________________________________________ (please use BLOCK LETTERS) Post Delivery Check List for Vivid______________ Serial NO:_____________________
SUBJECT Packing Loose screws /Hard Ware Overall appearance System documents (Followers, cont.lists) Functional test 2D image M-Mode Doppler spectral Color doppler Configuration Peripherals EchoPAC PC Probes Corrective actions Replaced boards/probes documented by S/N
OK
NOT OK
COMMENTS
Missing parts
Contact and signature

Do you want the responsible system tester to contact you Sign: YES: ___________________ NO:______________________
Date: ___________________ Fax page. ________ of _________
3 - 58
Section 3-10 - Installation Paperwork
Chapter 4 Functional Checks

This chapter provides procedures for quickly checking major functions of the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO scanner, diagnostics by using the built-in service software, and power supply adjustments.
Table 4-1
Section
4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6
Contents in chapter 4
Description
Overview General Procedures Functional Checks Application Turnover Check List Power Supply Site Log
Page Number
4-1 4-2 4-14 4-63 4-64 4-65
4-1-2
Special Equipment Required

An empty (blank) MO Disk; P/N: 066E0490 (1.3 GB) P/N: 066E0519 (5.4 GB) P/N: 066E0514 (8.6 GB)
ECG Pads ECG Harness, CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N:164L0025 or CABLE ECG MARQ. IEC / EU + AS, P/N:164L0026 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. IEC/EU+AS, P/N:164L0028 CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N:164L0025 LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA, P/N: 164L0027
At least one probe (ideally you should check all the probes used on the system by the site.) See Probes on page 9-28, for an overview of available probes
Chapter 4 - Functional Checks
4-1
Section 4-2 General Procedures

4-2-1
4-2-1-1
DANGER
Power ON/ Boot Up

Connecting Mains Power to the Unit
Never use a three-to-two prong adapter; this defeats the safety ground.
CAUTION SYSTEM REQUIRES ALL COVERS
Operate this unit only when all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. The covers are required for safe operation, good system performance and cooling purposes. NOTE: Do not cycle the Circuit Breaker ON-OFF-ON in less than five -5- seconds. When turning OFF the Circuit Breaker, the system should de-energize completely before turning the circuit breaker ON. When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
NOTE:
Table 4-2
Step
Connecting Mains Power to the unit

Task
.
Expected Result(s)
Connect the female plug on the Power Cable to the Power Inlet at the rear of the unit.
Clasp OFF
The retaining clasp prevent the plug from being unplugged during use.
Lock the plug in position with the retaining clasp.
Clasp ON
OFF Position Verify that the Mains Power Circuit Breaker is in OFF position, eventually switch it OFF.
Connect the other end of the Power Cable (with the male plug) to a hospital grade mains power outlet with the proper rated The unit is ready for Power ON/Boot Up. voltage.
4-2
Section 4-2 - General Procedures
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-2-1-2 Turn Unit ON Table 4-3
Step
Turn Unit ON
Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the unit. Mains Power Circuit Breaker in ON position
You will hear a click from the relays in the AC Power/AC Controller. The unit is ready for Boot Up.
1) The units ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the fan noise). 2) Power is distributed to the peripherals, Control Panel (Console), Monitor, Card Rack and Backend Processor. 3) Backend Processor and rest of Scanner starts with the following sequence: 4) Backend Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software. Press the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel (Keyboard) once.
.
5) The Start Screen (Vivid) is displayed on the monitor 6) A start-up bar is displayed on the monitor, indicating the progress of the software loading.
ON/OFF key
NOTE:
If the unit has been in the OFF condition for an extended period of time, (3 to 5 days or more), the unit may not boot, or may beep when turned on. See System Doesnt Boot on page 7-67. for more details, including how to recover.
4-3

Step
Turn Unit ON (continued)

The software initiates and set up the Card Rack and the rest of the instrument. The backlight in the keyboard is lit. As soon as the software has been loaded, a 2D screen is displayed on the screen.
Wait for the unit to boot.
Total time used for start-up is typically three minutes.
4-4
4-2-2
4-2-2-1
Power Shut Down

Overview When the unit is switched off, the system performs an automatic shutdown sequence. The unit can be switched off into two states: Standby Mode: Most of the system is powered down, but a certain portion of the unit remains energized. The standby mode allows a shorter reboot time when the system is used on a daily basis or moved from one place to another. Full Shut Down: The entire system is shut down. It is recommended to perform a full shutdown at least once a week.
4-2-2-2
Power Shut Down to Standby Mode This procedure describes the needed steps to power down the unit to Standby mode: 1.) Press the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel once to display the System - Exit menu on the screen.
.
Press this key.
4-5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-2-2-2 Power Shut Down to Standby Mode (contd)
Figure 4-2 System - Exit menu The System - Exit menu gives you the following choices: Logoff Use this button to log off the current user. The system remains on and ready for a new user to log on. The dimmed button in Figure 4-2 on page 4-6 indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment. Standby Use this button to select the Standby mode, allowing a shorter reboot time. The next step describes the use of this button. Shutdown... Use this button to Shut Down the system. Cancel Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
2.) Click STANDBY to select Standby mode. If the power cable is removed from the wall outlet the system will remain in Standby mode for approximately 15 minutes. If the system is unplugged for a longer period of time, a full shutdown is automatically performed. NOTE: When turning on a system from standby mode, it takes a few seconds before it responds. Do not push the On/off button again during this period. A second push will initiate a full shutdown.
4-6
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-2-2-3 Full Power Shut Down
This procedure describes the needed steps to do a complete power down of the system: 1.) Press the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel once to display the System - Exit menu on the screen.
.
Press this key.
Figure 4-4 System - Exit menu The System - Exit menu gives you the following choices: Logoff Use this button to log off the current user. The system remains on and ready for a new user to log on. The dimmed button in Figure 4-2 on page 4-6 indicates that no user is logged on to the unit at the moment. Standby Use this button to select the Standby mode, allowing a shorter reboot time. Shutdown... Use this button to Shut Down the system.The next step describes the use of this button. Cancel Use this button to exit from the System-Exit menu and return to the previous operation.
4-7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-2-2-3 Full Power Shut Down (contd)
2.) Click SHUTDOWN to do a complete power down of the unit. Backend Processor will first turn OFF the Scanner activity and print the message Please wait Shutdown in progress in the LCD display. Then it starts to shut down itself. The time to turn down the Scanner including the Backend Processor, may vary from 10 seconds up to approximately 1 minute. The last thing that shut down, is the light in the LCD displays, indicating that you can continue to the next step. 3.) Switch OFF the CIRCUIT BREAKER (located on the rear of the unit)
.
Circuit Breaker
Figure 4-5 Circuit Breaker located on rear of the unit This will cut power distribution within the unit. If the Backend Processor is still running, the internal Un-interupted Power Supply (UPS) will switch over to battery power and supply the Backend Processor with power until it has shut down properly. A periodic high-pitch sound alarm indicates that the Backend Processor is running on battery power.
4-8
4-2-3
4-2-3-1
Using Removable Media

Introduction Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is equipped with a Magneto Optical Disk Drive (MO Drive) and a CD Drive. Both units are available from the front of the unit, below the Patient I/O panel.
Magneto Optical Disk Drive CD Drive
Figure 4-6 MO Drive and CD Drive 4-2-3-2 Install MO Disk in MO Drive
NOTICE Never move the unit with a MO disk in the Magneto Optical Disk Drive because the drive actuator
will not be locked and the Magneto Optical Disk Drive could break. 1.) Preparations before installing an MO disk in the MO Drive: a.) The unit must be turned on and "up and running" before using the MO Drive b.) Verify the MO disk for loose hardware or damaged labels which could jam inside the MO Drive. c.) Ensure that the slide switch in one corner of the disk is set so that the disk is write enabled (disk hole closed). 2.) Insert the disk into the MO Disk Drive with the label for the side you intend to use, facing up. 4-2-3-3 Eject and Remove MO Disk from MO Drive
NOTICE Do not eject the MO Disk using the button on front of the MO drive.
1.) Eject the MO Disk, using one of the methods described in the following steps: a.) In some cases, the MO Disk is ejected automaticly. b.) If not automaticly ejected, use manual ejection method: Select Eject button on the screen, or Press ALT + E on the alphanumeric keyboard to display the Eject Device menu.
Figure 4-7 The Eject Device menu Chapter 4 - Functional Checks 4-9
2.) Select 5 1/4 MO DISK in the Eject Device menu to eject the MO Disk. 3.) Remove the ejected MO Disk from the MO Drive and store it in its cover box in a safe place. 4-2-3-4 NOTE: Install CD-R Disk in CD Drive CD-RW disks are NOT supported by Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO, but CD-R disks may be used. 1.) Press the Eject button on the right side of the CD Drive once to open the disk tray. 2.) Put a CD-R disk in the disk tray with the label side facing up. 3.) Press the Eject button once to close the disk tray. The disk is available for reading, formatting or writing, dependant on the disk you used, after a few seconds. 4-2-3-5 Eject and Remove CD-R Disk from CD Drive
NOTICE Do not eject the CD-R Disk using the button on front of the CD Drive.
1.) Eject the CD-R Disk, using one of the methods described in the following steps: a.) In some cases, the CD-R Disk is ejected automaticly. b.) If not automaticly ejected, use manual ejection method: Select Eject button on the screen, or Press ALT + E on the alphanumeric keyboard to display the Eject Device menu.
Figure 4-8 The Eject Device menu 2.) Select CD-REWRITEABLE in the Eject Device menu to eject the CD-R Disk. 3.) Remove the ejected CD-R Disk from the CD Drive and store it in its cover in a safe place.
4-2-4
Labeling Removable Media

Before you start to format any Removable Media, be sure about what naming convention you will use for labelling. Use a logical name and make sure to physically label each Removable Media. Verify that each Removable Media gets a unique name. Maximum eleven (11) characters may be used for the label name. Remember that MO Disks have two sides, Side A and Side B. Each Side must have a unique name.
Example:
MO Disks for storing images may be labeled "IMAGE_1A" (Side A on MO Disk #1), "IMAGE_1B (Side B on MO Disk #2), "IMAGE_2A" ...
4 - 10
4-2-5
Formatting Removable Media

This procedure describes how to format an MO Disk or a CD-R disk. Before you continue, be sure about what naming convention you will use for labelling the Removable Media. 1.) Select Config > Connectivity > Media 2.) Select the removable media from the Media pop-up menu. 3.) Enter a name for the removable media in the Label field. 4.) Press FORMAT. 5.) Wait for the display of the Information window indicating that the formatting process is completed.
NOTE:
Do not eject the CD using the button on the CD drive 6.) Press ALT+E to display the Eject Device menu. 7.) Select the relevant media. The selected media is ejected.
4-2-6
Verifying Removable Media

1.) Insert the removable media to verify. 2.) Select the pre-configured removable media from the Config > Connectivity > Media pop-up menu. 3.) Press VERIFY. The unit starts to verify the DICOM directory on the selected media.
4 - 11
4-2-7
NOTE:
Archiving and Loading Presets

Always save presets before any software reload. This action is necessary to ensure that the presets loaded after the software reload are as uptodate as possible. All user presets except changes to Summary, Anatomy, and Biometry pages, can be saved on an MO disk for reloading on the system.
NOTICE Presets shouldnt be saved on the same MO disk as images, because the Archive Menu lists the
images but not the presets stored on a MO disk. 4-2-7-1 Archiving Presets to an MO Disk Table 4-4
STEP
1.
Saving Presets
FUNCTION
TASK
Insert an empty, formatted MO disk labelled PRESETS and marked with Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs serial number and the date, into the MO Drive (for formatting, see chapter 12 in the Vivid 7 Users Manual). The Backup window is displayed.
2.
Go to Config (F2) -> Admin -> Backup
3. 4. 5.
Select the Check box User defined Configuration. Select the MOD as destination. Press BACKUP NOW. A copy of the Presets is saved on the MO disk.
4 - 12

STEP
6.
Saving Presets (continued)

FUNCTION
The MO disk is ejected.
TASK
Press ALT + E on the alphanumeric keyboard.
4-2-7-2
Loading Presets from an MO Disk Table 4-5 Loading Presets

FUNCTION
STEP
1. 2.
TASK
Insert the MO disk with the archived presets into the MOD. The Restore window is displayed.
Go to Config (F2) -> Admin -> Restore
3. 4. 5. 6.
Select the Check box User defined Configuration. Select the MOD as source. Press RESTORE NOW Press ALT + E on the alphanumeric keyboard. The Presets are restored to the System. The MO disk is ejected.
4 - 13
Section 4-3 Functional Checks

4-3-1 Preparation
Turn on power to Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO, see 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2.
4-3-2
Basic Controls
Display for Assignable Rotaries
TGC controls
Assignable Rotaries Display for Assignable Push Buttons Assignable Push Buttons Gain More key
4-way Rocker (used to control the onscreen Soft Menu) 2D
Freeze
Figure 4-9 2D Mode, 2D Freeze and Cine Replay Controls 4-3-2-1 Introduction Most of the mode dependant controls can be found as Mode Dependant Keys (Assignable Rotary Knobs and Assignable Push Buttons) and Trackball. The functions available on the Mode Dependant Keys and Trackball vary according to the scan mode and position that is currently active. 4-3-2-2 Assignable Rotary Knobs Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO has four assignable rotary knobs. The assigned functions are indicated above the rotary on the LCD display. 4-3-2-3 Assignable Push Buttons Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO has five Assignable Push Buttons. The assigned functions are indicated above the button on the LCD display. 4 - 14 Section 4-3 - Functional Checks
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-2-4 More
The MORE button gives access to additional controls on the Assignable Push Buttons. 4-3-2-5 Soft Menu Control (4-way Rocker) The 4-way Rocker works together with the Soft menu on the screen. 4-3-2-6 The vertical arrows (up/down) are used to do selections from the Soft Menu. The horizontal arrows (left/right) are used to do adjustments on the selected function.
Trackball area Different functions can be assigned to the trackball depending of the current active mode. The Trackball area consist of: The Trackball: used as a cursor control in acquisition mode, scrolling control in freeze and as a selection tool (like a mouse cursor) in post-processing mode. Three SELECT keys (identical): Perform the selected control or highlighted menu item. The TRACKBALL key: Toggles between the available trackball function assignments displayed in the Status bar. The update menu key: enables quick access to image related functions from a pop-up menu.
4-3-2-7
Other Controls Other controls are located on separate keys (knobs and buttons) or groups of keys on the Control Panel.
4 - 15
4-3-3
4-3-3-1
Performance Tests
Recommended Test Phantoms GE Medical Systems recommends the RMI 430GS phantom. It is the most current phantom recommended to our field service personnel and provides the necessary targets and extended life necessary for consistent system testing.
Lateral Distance Measurement
Penetration 2
Contrast Resolution & Gray Scale Photography
Axial Distance Measurement
6 4 3 2 1 8 Functional Resolution
10 Lateral Resolution
12
14 Axial Resolution
16
RMI 403GS
Figure 4-10 Performance tests
4 - 16
Section 4-3 - Functional Checks
4-3-4
4-3-4-1
2D Mode (B mode) Checks

Introduction The 2D Mode is the systems default mode.
Status Window
Control Menu
Figure 4-11 2D Mode Screen Example 4-3-4-2 Preparations Use a phantom when doing these tests. 1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most active probe connector. See "Probe Connection" on page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes. See Chapter 9 - , section 9-17 for available probes. See 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner.
2.) Turn ON the scanner. The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). 3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting (See Monitor Adjustments on page 6-2.).
4 - 17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-4-2 Preparations (contd)
Mode Dependant Keys Width Frequency Focus Frame rate Up/Down* Left/Right* Cineloop (in Freeze, only) B Color Maps Gain Zoom Depth
Zoom Display zoom HR zoom
2D
Freeze Controls marked with * in the illustration are also available in Freeze and Cine Replay.
Soft menu Compress * Reject * Dynamic Range Tilt Contour Diff On/Off DDP * Power
Figure 4-12 Mode Dependent Keys, Zoom and Soft Menu Key
WARNING
Always use the minimum power required to obtain acceptable images in accordance with applicable guidelines and policies.
4.) Press 2D on the Control Panel to access 2D Mode. 5.) These Image Controls are used to optimize the 2D picture: Use Gain and TGC controls to optimize the overall image together with the Power control. Use Depth to adjust the range to be imaged. Use Focus to center the focal point(s) around the region of interest. Use Frequency (move to higher frequencies) or Frame rate (move to lower frame rate) to increase resolution in image. Use Frequency (move to lower frequency) to increase penetration. Use the DDP control to optimize imaging in the blood flow regions and make a cleaner, less noisy image. Use Reject controls to reduce noise in the image.
4 - 18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-4-3 Check Width, Focus, Framerate, Frequency These 2D Mode Functions are located on Assignable Rotaries.
The results of these adjustments must be verified on the 2D sector on the screen.
Table 4-6
Step
1.
2D Mode: Check Width, Focus, Framerate and Frequency

Task Expected Result
Controls the size or angular width of the 2D image sector. A smaller angle generally produces a scan with higher frame rate.
Turn the rotary labeled WIDTH left and right.
2.
Turn the rotary labeled FOCUS left and right to move the focal point up and down. Changes the location of the focal point(s). A triangular focus marker indicates the depth of the focal point.
3.
Turn the rotary labeled FRAMERATE left and right to adjust the Frame Rate
Adjusts frame rate. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase frame rate. The relative setting of the frame rate is displayed in the status window. When adjusting frame rate, there is a trade off between spatial and temporal resolution.
4.
Turn the rotary labeled FREQUENCY left and right to verify that the probes operating frequency can be adjusted
Enables the adjustment of the probes operating frequency. Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the frequency. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window. For some probes/applications, the lowest frequency settings will be Octave Imaging settings.
4 - 19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-4-4 Check Up/Down, Left/Right, B Color Maps and Cineloop
These 2D Mode Functions are located on Mode Dependant Keys (Push Buttons) The results of these adjustments must be verified on the 2D sector on the screen.
Table 4-7
Step
1.
2D Mode: Check Up/Down, Left/Right, B Color Maps and Cineloop

Task Expected Result
Press once on the assignable key labeled UP/DOWN Enables the 2D image to be flipped 180 degrees.
2.
Press once on the assignable key labeled LEFT/RIGHT
Enables a mirror image of the 2D image to be created. The left/right reference marker side of the image.
V moves to the other
3.
Select B COLOR MAPS
Displays a 2D Map Menu on the screen to optimize the greyscale presentation. The menu enables an option from a list of non-linear gray-curves or different 2D-colorized curves to be selected.
4.
Press FREEZE Select CINELOOP) Starts cine loop acquisition.
4 - 20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-4-5 Check Gain, TGC and Depth
Table 4-8
Step
1.
2D Mode: Check Gain, TGC and Depth in 2D Mode

Task
Adjust TISSUE GAIN
Expected Result
TISSUE GAIN
Increases the overall gain equally for all depth when rotated clockwise
2.
Adjust Time Gain Compensation (TGC) TGC Compensates for depth-related attenuation in an image. The upper sliders affect the near field. The lower sliders (nearest the operator) affect the far field.
3.
Adjust Depth DEPTH Sets the maximum (far field) distance that will be imaged. Decreasing the depth may allow higher frame rates
4 - 21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-4-6 2D Soft Menu Controls Table 4-9
KEY
4-way rocker used for Soft Menu control

DESCRIPTION
A 4-way rocker (4-way multi direction switch) used to; - access mode-specific menus on the screen. - select a menu option. - adjust option-related values. When using the Rocker; - the vertical arrows are used to select the menu options. - the horizontal arrows are used to adjust the values.
4-3-4-7
Check Compress, Contour, Reject and Tilt Table 4-10

Step
1. Use the vertical arrows to select Compress. Use the horizontal arrows to adjust Compress. 2. Use the vertical arrows to select Contour. Use the horizontal arrows to adjust Contour. 3. Use the vertical arrows to select Reject. Use the horizontal arrows to adjust Reject. 4. Use the vertical arrows to select Tilt. Use the horizontal arrows to adjust Tilt.
2D Mode: Check Compress, Contour, Reject and Tilt

Compress controls the amount of contrast in the 2D image. An index number is displayed in the status window to indicate the relative level of compression. Contour controls image processing related to the extent of edge enhancement applied to an image. When Reject is increased, low-level echoes and noise are rejected and appear darker in the 2D image. An index number is displayed in the status window to indicate the relative level of rejection. Tilts the axis of the 2D image to the left or right. By using this control in combination with Angle control, the image can be aligned to the direction of interest, and frame rates be optimized. By default the axis of symmetry of a 2D image is vertical.
4 - 22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-4-8 Check DDP, Diff, Power and Dynamic Range Table 4-11
Step
1. Use the vertical arrows to select DDP (Data Dependent Processing). Use the horizontal arrows to adjust DDP. 2. Use the vertical arrows to select Diff. Use the horizontal arrows to turn Diff On/Off. 3. Use the vertical arrows to select Power. Use the horizontal arrows to adjust Power.
2D Mode: Check DDP, Diff, Power and Dynamic Range

Performs temporal processing which reduces random noise without affecting the motion of significant tissue structures. An index number is displayed in the status window (under Proc) to indicate the relative DDP level. Affects the level of reverberations in the image. When turned ON, the frame rate (or the number of focal zones) will decrease, while the reverberations will be attenuated. Controls the amount of acoustic power applied in all modes. When power is set to maximum, it is equal to or less than the maximum acoustic power permitted by the FDA. The Thermal Index (TI) and the Mechanical Index (MI) are displayed on the screen.
4. Use the vertical arrows to select Dynamic Range.
Enables control of the dynamic range or contrast of the image.
Use the horizontal arrows to adjust Dynamic Range. When Dynamic Range is set high, the image is softer and more low-level data is visible.
4 - 23
4-3-5
4-3-5-1
M Mode Checks
Introduction
Figure 4-13 M-Mode Screen Example 4-3-5-2 Preparations Use a phantom when doing these tests. 1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector. See "Probe Connection" on page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes. See Chapter 9 - , section 9-17 for available probes. See see 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner.
2.) Turn ON the scanner. The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). 3.) Press M-MODE to bring up an M-Mode picture on the screen.
4 - 24
Mode Dependant Keys Horizontal Sweep* Frequency Focus Contour Up/Down
Gain *
Steer Cursor Zoom

Act. Win 1/2/4
PW Alt.
M-Mode
MM
CW TVI
2D
Color
Act. Mode Img. Size
Menu Measure
Trac k B all
Image size Small/large 2D sector top/bottom display side by side display
Caliper Exit Exit Img. Store
Controls marked with * are also available in freeze and cine replay
Figure 4-14 M Mode, Freeze and Cine Replay controls
date U p nu Me
Rec.
Alt.
Pause
2D
Freeze
Soft menu Compress Reject Dynamic Range Power
4 - 25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-5-3 Check Horizontal Sweep, Frequency, Focus and Contour Table 4-12
Step
1.
M-Mode: Check Horizontal Sweep, Frequency, Focus and Contour

Task
Adjust HORIZONTAL SWEEP
Expected Result(s)
Adjusts the horizontal refresh rate of the M-Mode area of the display. Horizontal sweep does not change the acquisition resolution, so you can change the horizontal sweep in replay without any loss of quality.
2.
Adjust FREQUENCY Rotate the knob clockwise to increase the probes operating frequency.
The probes operating frequency is increased. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window. For some probes/applications the lowest frequency settings will be Octave imaging settings.
3.
Adjust FOCUS Changes the location of the focal point(s). A triangular focus marker indicates the depth of the focal point.
4.
Adjust CONTOUR Controls image processing related to the extent of edge enhancement applied to an image.
4 - 26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-5-4 Check Compress, Reject, Power and Dynamic Range
..
Table 4-13
Step
1.
M-Mode Soft menu Controls check

Task
Adjust Compress
Expected Result(s)
Controls the amount of contrast in the image. An index number is displayed in the status window to indicate the relative level of compression.
2.
Adjust Reject Adjust reject level. When Reject is increased, low-level echoes are rejected and appear darker in the image. An index number in the status window indicates the relative level of rejection.
3.
Adjust Power Controls acoustic power in all modes. When power is set to maximum, it is equal to or less than the maximum acoustic power permitted by the FDA. Both Thermal Index (TI) and Mechanical Index (MI) are displayed on the screen.
4.
Adjust Dynamic Range Enables control of the dynamic range or contrast of the image. When dynamic range is set to High, the image is softer and more low-level data is visible.
4 - 27
4-3-6
4-3-6-1
Color Mode Checks

Introduction Color Flow screens is 2D or M Mode screens with colors representing blood or tissue movement. Color Flow may be selected both from 2D mode or from M mode or a combination of these.
4-3-6-2
Preparations Use a phantom when doing these tests. 1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector. See "Probe Connection" on page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes. See Chapter 9 - , section 9-17 for available probes. See 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner
2.) Turn ON the scanner. The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). 4-3-6-3 Color 2D Mode: Press COLOR. 4-3-6-4 Color M Mode: 1.) Press MM (M Mode) to bring up an M Mode display on the screen. 2.) Press COLOR.
4 - 28
Mode Dependant Keys Horiz. sweep (Color M-Mode only) * Scale Baseline * LVR Invert * Variance * Color maps * Simultaneous (Color 2D only) Angio (Color 2D only) Cineloop (in Freeze, Color 2D mode only) Zoom Display zoom HR zoom Zoom TVI Color Depth Image size (Color M-Mode) Small/large 2D sector top/bottom display side by side display Soft menu Sample Volume Tissue Priority * DDP (Color 2D only) * Frequency Frame rate Radial avg. Lateral avg. Power
Gain *
Exit
Freeze
Controls marked with * are also available in freeze and cine replay
Figure 4-15 Color Flow Mode Controls
4 - 29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-6-5 Check Horizontal Sweep, PRF, Baseline, LVR and Invert Table 4-14
Step
1.
Color Flow Mode Controls Check

Task
Adjust Horizontal Sweep (Color M-Mode only) Adjusts the horizontal refresh rate of the M-Mode area of the display.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Adjust Baseline Adjusts the color map to emphasize flow either toward or away from the probe. Baseline is available in both Live and Freeze.
3.
Change PRF (Pulse Repetition Frequency)
Adjusts the repetition rate of the Doppler pulses transmitted to acquire the data for color flow mapping. The PRF (Nyquist limit) should be adjusted so that no aliasing occur, while still having a good resolution of velocities, meaning the Nyquist limit should be somewhat above the maximum velocity found in the data.
4.
Adjust LVR (Low Velocity Rejection
LVR, also called Wall Motion Filter, enables the extent of low velocity removal to be adjusted.
5.
Invert Enables the color scheme assigned to positive and negative velocities to be inverted. Invert is available in live and Cine Replay.
4 - 30
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-6-6 Check Variance, Color Maps and Cineloop Table 4-15
Step
6.
Color Flow Mode: Check Variance, Color Maps and Cineloop

Task
Adjust Variance
Expected Result(s)
Controls the amount of variance data added to a color display. Variance enables computer-aided detection of nonluminary flow (e.g. jets or regurgitation). Variance is available in live and cine replay.
7.
Select Color Maps
Displays a menu of color map options. Use the trackball to point to a color map and press
SELECT to activate the desired color map.

Each color map is assigning different color hues to different velocities.
8.
Make Cineloop (in Freeze, Color 2D mode only)
Starts cine loop acquisition.
4-3-6-7
Check Sample Volume and Tissue Priority Table 4-16

Step
9.

Task
Adjust Variance
Expected Result(s)
Controls the amount of variance data added to a color display. Variance enables computer-aided detection of nonluminary flow (e.g. jets or regurgitation). Variance is available in live and cine replay.
4 - 31

Step
10.

Task
Select Color Maps
Expected Result(s)
Displays a menu of color map options. Use the trackball to point to a color map and press
SELECT to activate the desired color map.

Each color map is assigning different color hues to different velocities.
11.
Make Cineloop (in Freeze, Color 2D mode only)
Starts cine loop acquisition.
4-3-6-8
Check Frequency, Radial Averaging, Lateral Averaging, Power Table 4-17

Step
1.
Color-Mode Soft Menu Controls Check

Task
Adjust Frequency Enables the adjustment of the transmission frequency to control the sensitivity or the level of penetration. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window. Adjusting Frequency may affect Sample Volume and LVR settings.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Adjust Radial Averaging Smooths the image by averaging collected data along the same radial line. An increase of the radial averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the radial resolution.
3.
Adjust Lateral Averaging (Color 2D only) Smooths the image by averaging collected data along the same horizontal line. An increase of the lateral averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the lateral resolution.
4 - 32

Step
4.
Color-Mode Soft Menu Controls Check

Task
Adjust Power Controls the amount of acoustic power applied in all modes. When power is set to maximum, it is equal to or less than the maximum acoustic power permitted by the FDA. The Thermal Index (TI) and the Mechanical Index (MI) are displayed on the screen.
Expected Result(s)
4-3-6-9
Adjust ROI Table 4-18

Step
1.
Adjust ROI
Task
Adjust Sample volume Adjusts the size of the color flow Doppler sampling area. Lower setting gives better flow resolution while a higher setting increases sensitivity and helps to locate disturbed flows.
Expected Result(s)
4 - 33
4-3-7
4-3-7-1
Doppler Mode Checks

Introduction Doppler is used to measure velocity (most often in blood). Doppler mode can be done with a special pencil probe or with an ordinary probe. By using an ordinary probe, you can first bring up a 2D picture for navigation purpose and then add Doppler.
4-3-7-2
Preparations Use a phantom when doing these tests. 1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector. See Probe Connection, page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes See Probes, page 9-28 for available probes See 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner.
2.) Turn ON the scanner The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). 3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting. 4.) Press PW or CW to start Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) or Continuous Wave Doppler (CW). 5.) Use the trackball to select the Area of Interest (Sample Volume) in PW or direction of interest in CW.
4 - 34
Mode Dependant Keys Horizontal Sweep * Velocity Range Baseline * LVR Invert * LPRF (in PW mode only) Color Maps *
Gain *
PW
CW
Freeze
Soft menu Sample Vol. (PW) Compress * Reject * Frequency Frame Rate Angle Corr. * Power
Controls marked with * (asterisk) are also available in freeze and cine replay
Figure 4-16 Doppler Mode Controls
4 - 35
Check Horizontal Sweep, Velocity Range, Baseline and Low Velocity Reject Table 4-19
Step
1.
Doppler Mode Controls Checks

Task
Adjust HORIZONTAL SWEEP Adjusts the horizontal refresh rate of the Doppler area of the display. Horizontal sweep is available in live and cine replay.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Adjust VELOCITY RANGE
Enables the vertical scale of the Doppler spectrum and the maximal detectable velocity to be modified. Velocity range directly controls the pulse repetition frequency, which is responsible for the setting of the Nyquist limit (the ability to detect maximal velocity without aliasing).
3. Move BASELINE
Enables the Doppler baseline to be shifted up and down. The default Doppler baseline is set at the center of the vertical aspect of the Doppler display, dividing evenly the flow toward and away from the probe. By adjusting the baseline a larger portion of the analysis is assigned to the flow direction present. Baseline is available in live and cine replay.
4.
Adjust Low Velocity Reject (LV REJ.)
Enables the low velocity portions of the spectrum to be filtered, since the Doppler spectrum and audio may contain strong wall-motion signals. The amount of LV Rej. is indicated by the green vertical bar at the right end of the baseline.
4 - 36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-7-4 Check Invert, LPRF (in PW only) and Color Maps Table 4-20
Step
5.
Doppler Mode Controls Checks

Task
Press INVERT
Expected Result(s)
Enables the Doppler spectrum to be flipped 180 degrees, so that negative velocities are displayed above the baseline and positive velocities below the baseline. Invert is available in live and cine replay.
6.
Press LPRF In PW, adjusts the pulse repetition frequency for the PW Doppler acquisition of data flow.
7.
Choose COLOR MAPS Displays a drop down menu of different Doppler colorization maps. Use the trackball to select the desired map and press Select to activate the map.
4 - 37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-7-5 Check Sample Volume, Compress, Reject and Frequency Table 4-21
Step
1.
PW/CW Doppler Mode: Check Sample Volume, Compress, Reject and Frequency
Task
Adjust SAMPLE VOLUME (SV) In PW mode, set the longitudinal size of the region to be sampled for measurement. Adjusting Sample volume may affect the PRF (Nyquist limit) settings. SV does not apply to CW mode, where the volume sampled is the full length of the area indicated by the cursor line.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Change COMPRESS Enables control over the contrast of the Doppler spectrum. When compression is raised, the spectrum image becomes softer and some low level background noise may appear. Compress is available in both Live and Freeze.
3.
Adjust REJECT
Enables undesirable background noise to be removed from the Doppler spectrum resulting in a darker background. Reject is available in both Live and Freeze.
4.
Change FREQUENCY Adjusts the transmission frequency in Doppler to control sensitivity or level of penetration. The selected frequency is displayed in the status window. Adjusting Frequency may affect Sample Volume (PW) and LVR settings.
4 - 38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-7-6 Check Frame Rate, Angle Correction and Power
Table 4-22
Step
5.
PW/CW Doppler Mode: Check Frame Rate, Angle Correction and Power
Task
Adjust FRAME RATE
Expected Result(s)
Adjusts frame rate. The relative setting of the frame rate is displayed in the status window (under 2D).
6.
Adjust ANGLE CORRECTION Enables correction of the Doppler velocity scale by defining the angle between the Doppler beam and the investigated blood vessel. A thin cross bar on the Doppler cursor will rotate as the control is adjusted. Angle correction is available in both Live and Freeze.
7.
Adjust POWER Controls the amount of acoustic power applied in all modes. When power is set to maximum, it is equal to or less than the maximum acoustic power permitted by the FDA. The Thermal Index (TI) and the Mechanical Index (MI) are displayed on the screen.
4 - 39
4-3-8
4-3-8-1
Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks

Introduction TVI calculates and color codes the velocities in tissue. The tissue velocity information is acquired by sampling of tissue Doppler velocity values at discrete points.
4-3-8-2
Preparations Use a phantom when doing these tests. 1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector. See Probe Connection, page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes See Probes, page 9-28 for available probes See see 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner.
2.) Turn ON the scanner The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). 3.) If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting. 4.) Press TVI.
4 - 40
Mode Dependant Keys 2D Width Scale Transparency Threshold Invert * Tissue Tracking Simultaneous * Cineloop (Freeze only) Color Maps
Alt.
TVI
2D
Alternatives Anat. M-Mode Curved Anat. M-Mode
Freeze Controls marked with * (asterisk) are also available in freeze and cine replay
Soft menu Tissue Priority * Frame Rate Compress * Reject * Frequency Lateral Average Radial Average Baseline * Power
Figure 4-17 Doppler Mode Controls
4 - 41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-8-3 Check 2D Width, Scale, Transparency and Threshold
Table 4-23
Step
1.
TVI Mode Controls Checks

Task
Adjust 2D WIDTH Controls the size or angular width of the 2D sector.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Adjust SCALE Controls the repetition rate of the Doppler pulses transmitted to acquire the data for color mapping. The scale value influences the Nyquist limit (the ability to detect maximal velocity without color aliasing.
3.
Adjust TRANSPARENCY Controls the degree of transparency of the TVI color.
4.
Adjust THRESHOLD. Controls the level of greyscale intensity that is used as a threshold for color.
4 - 42
Check Invert, Tissue Tracking, Simultaneous and Color Maps
Table 4-24
Step 5.
TVI Mode Controls Checks

Task Press INVERT Enables the color scheme assigned to positive and negative tissue velocities to be inverted. Invert is available in live and cine replay. Expected Result(s)
6.
Press TISSUE TRACKING
Starts Tissue Tracking mode.
7.
Choose COLOR MAPS Displays a drop down menu of different colorization maps. Use the trackball to select the desired map and press Select to activate the map.
4 - 43
Check Tissue Priority, Frame Rate, Compress, Reject, Frequency, Lateral & Radial Average, Baseline and Power
Table 4-25
Step
8.
TVI Mode: Soft Menu Controls Check

Task
Adjust TISSUE PRIORITY
Expected Result(s)
Emphasizes either the color of the TVI or the greyscale tissue detail of the 2D image. Tissue priority is available in both Live and Freeze.
9.
Adjust FRAME RATE
Controls the line density. When adjusting frame rate, there is a trade off between spatial and temporal resolution.
10.
Adjust COMPRESS
Controls the amount of color compression. The color bar is adjusted accordingly.
11.
Adjust REJECT
Adjust the cut-off level for the low velocity of TVI to be discarded when generating the color image.
12.
Adjust FREQUENCY
Enables the adjustment of the transmission frequency to control the sensitivity or the level of penetration.
4 - 44

Step
13.
TVI Mode: Soft Menu Controls Check

Task
Adjust LATERAL AVERAGE
Expected Result(s)
Smooths the image by averaging collected data along the same horizontal line. An increase of the lateral averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the lateral resolution.
14.
Adjust RADIAL AVERAGE
Smooths the image by averaging collected data along the same radial line. An increase of the radial averaging will reduce noise, but this will also reduce the radial resolution.
15.
Adjust BASELINE
Adjusts the color map to emphasize tissue motion either toward or away from the probe. Baseline is available in both Live and Freeze.
16.
Adjust POWER Controls the amount of acoustic power applied in all modes. When power is set to maximum, it is equal to or less than the maximum acoustic power level permitted by regulatory standards. The Thermal Index (TI) and the Mechanical Index (MI) are displayed on the screen.
4 - 45
4-3-9
Contrast Checks
Refer to Chapter 5 in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO User Manual.
4-3-10
Stress Echo
Refer to Chapter 4 in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO User Manual.
4 - 46
4-3-11
4-3-11-1
Measurements and Multi Image Checks

Introduction to Measurements & Analysis (M&A) A complete M&A software package for Cardiac is included in the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. The M&A software runs on the Backend Processor. In this test, we just check one measurement, Calipers.
Menu Fast access to the Measurement menu (when in measure mode)
Measure Assign and Measure Measure and Assign
Caliper Measure and Assign (when in measure mode))
Figure 4-18 Measurement Keys 4-3-11-2 Preparations, M&A

..
Table 4-26
Step
1. 2. 3.
Measurement Key Checks

A 2D image is active on the screen The last scanned picture is on the screen.
Generate a 2D image (see 4-3-4 - 2D Mode (B mode) Checks for details). Press FREEZE on the Control Panel
Scroll back until you find the picture you want to do the The picture of interest is on the screen. measurement on.
4-3-11-3
Check Caliper Measurement, Distance

.
Table 4-27
Step
4.

The Measurement menu with a list of studies is displayed in the Parameters window on the screen. When entering the Measurement mode for the first time, the Caliper tool is selected by default. When re-entering the Measurement mode, the first measurement in the actual study that has not been performed is selected by default.
Press MEASURE on the Control Panel. Select Caliper in the Measurement menu. or Press CALIPER on the Control Panel. Press the CALIPER assignable.
4 - 47

Step
5. 6.

Use the Trackball to move the cursor to the start point The cursor points to the start point for the of the measurement. measurement. Press SELECT to anchor the start point of the measurement. The start point of the measurement is marked, and a line between the mark and the active cursor indicates the distance.
7.
The current distance value is displayed in the Use the trackball to move the cursor to the end point of Measurement result table and is instantaneously the measurement. updated when moving the cursor. The measurement display color on the 2D image changes from green to red after completion of the measurement. The measurement result is displayed in the Measurement result table. The highlighted parameter label is assigned to the measurement.
8. Press SELECT to mark the end point for the measurement.
9.
Trackball to the measurement result in the Measurement result table.
4-3-11-4
Check Post-measurement assignment labels Table 4-28

Step
10.
Post-measurement assignment labels

A Parameter menu is displayed.
Trackball to the actual measurement in the Measurement Result Window. Press SELECT on the Control Panel.
11.
Trackball through the Parameter label menu to highlight the desired label. Press SELECT on the Control Panel.
The highlighted parameter label is assigned to the measurement.
4 - 48
4-3-12
4-3-12-1
Multi Image Checks

Introduction to Multi Image This unit has a special function for displaying two or four examination pictures at the same time
Table 4-29
Key
Use of Multi Image Key

Description
1/2/4
Enables multiple image display windows in which two or four images can be viewed simultaneously. When reducing the number of images, the active window will always be kept.
4-3-12-2
Preparations Use a phantom when doing these tests. 1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector. See Probe Connection, page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes See Probes, page 9-28 for available probes See 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner.
2.) Turn ON the scanner The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). If needed, adjust the Displays Brightness and Contrast setting. 3.) Store four cineloops. 4-3-12-3 1,2,4 Key Check
Table 4-30
Step
1. 2. 3.
Multi Image Checks

Press the 1,2,4 Key once to display two images on the 2 Images are displayed on the screen. screen. Press the 1,2,4 Key once more to display four images 4 Images are displayed on the screen. on the screen. Press the 1,2,4 Key again to reduce the number of images on the screen. 1 image is displayed on the screen.
4 - 49
4-3-13
NOTE:
Probe/Connectors Check
Probes can be connected at any time, whether the unit is ON or OFF
CAUTION Take the following precautions with the probe cables:
- Keep away from the wheels - Do not bend - Do not cross cables between probes
Table 4-31
Step
1. 2. 3.
Probe and Connectors Checks

A list of the connected probes will pop up on the screen. An application menu for the desired probe is listed on the screen.
Press PROBE on the Control Panel. If not already selected. use the trackball to select the desired probe. Trackball to the desired application Press SELECT to launch the application. To change application without changing the current probe, press APPL. on the Control Panel.
The selected application starts.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Verify no missing channels Verify there's no EMI/RFI or artifacts specific to the probe. Test the probe in each active connector slot. See Probe Connection on page 3-13. Do a leakage test on the probe, See Electrical Safety Tests on page 10-10. Repeat this procedure for all available probes.
All channels is functioning. No EMI/RFI or artifacts. It will display pictorial data each time It passes the test.
4 - 50
4-3-14
4-3-14-1
ECG Check
Introduction The ECG capability on this unit, is intended as use as a trigger for measurements, but can also be viewed on the screen.
4-3-14-2
Parts needed or ECG simulator ECG Harness, P/N:16L0026 + P/N:16L0028 ECG Pads, (3 pc)
4-3-14-3
Preparations None
4-3-14-4
ECG Check Table 4-32

Step
1. 2.
ECG Check
Connect the ECG harness to the connector on the front The unit displays a straight curve along the bottom of the system edge of the image sector on the screen. Connect the three leads to a ECG simulator, or When connecting, the signal on the screen will be noisy
When the connection is completed, a typical clean ECG Fasten the three ECG Pads to your body and connect signal is displayed. the three leads to respective ECG Pad
4 - 51
4-3-15
4-3-15-1
Cineloop Check
Introduction A cineloop is a sequence of images recorded over a certain time frame. When using ECG the time frame can be adjusted to cover one or more heart cycles. When frozen the System automatically displays the cineloop boundary markers on either side of the last detected heart cycle (Figure 4-19).
Left marker ECG Loop display Current frame Right marker Cine speed
(replay) Figure 4-19 The Cineloop controls display 4-3-15-2 Preparation Use a phantom when doing these tests.
1.) Connect one of the probes, to the scanners left-most probe connector. See Probe Connection, page 3-13 for info about connecting the probes See Probes, page 9-28 for available probes See 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for info about booting the scanner.
2.) Turn ON the scanner The 2D Mode window is displayed (default mode). 3.) Press FREEZE. to freeze the image. 4.) Press the Assignable CINELOOP.
4 - 52
Off / On
Mode Dependant Keys Left marker Right marker Cycle select Number of cycles First Cycle Last Cycle Sync Cineloop
Image Store
Trackball Scroll (in freeze) Cine speed (in replay)
Freeze
Start/stop cineloop
Figure 4-20 Cineloop controls
4 - 53
Check Left Marker, Right Marker, Cycle Select and Number of Cycles Table 4-33
Step
1.
Cineloop Controls Checks

Task
Adjust LEFT MARKER and RIGHT MARKER Moves the Left and Right Markers to expand or trim the cineloop boundaries.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Adjust CYCLE SELECT Moves the cineloop boundaries from heart cycle to heart cycle.
3.
Adjust NUMBER OF CYCLE Increase or decrease the number of heart cycles to be included in the cineloop.
4 - 54
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-15-4 Check First, Last Cycle, Sync and Select all Table 4-34
Step
1.

Task
Press FIRST and LAST CYCLE Select either the first or the last heart cycle.
Expected Result(s)
2.
Press SYNC
Phase synchronize multiple loops.
3.
Press SELECT ALL Moves the cineloop boundaries to include all heart cycles.
4-3-15-5
Adjust Scroll and Cine Speed Table 4-35

Step
1.

Adjust Scroll (in Frozen mode): Press TRACKBALL until the Scroll trackball assignable is selected. Use the Trackball.
Move the current frame marker and review images.
2.
Adjust Cine Speed (in Cine Replay mode): Press FREEZE to freeze the image. Press CINELOOP. Roll the Trackball to the left. Roll the Trackball to the right. Step : the cine speed is decreased. Step : the cine speed is increased.
4 - 55
4-3-16
Backend Processor Checks

If all the previous tests have been passed successfully, the Backend Processor is most likely OK. If the system seems to be operating erratically, please refer to Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/ Troubleshooting.
4 - 56
4-3-17
4-3-17-1
Peripheral Checks
Video Printers Checks There may be both a black & white video printer and a color video printer on-board the system. The Video Printers are controlled from the PRINT and ALT. keys on the scanners Control Panel. The factory default is PRINT for the B/W Video Printer and ALT. for the Color Video Printer.
ALT. key PRINT key
FREEZE key
Figure 4-21 Freeze, Print 1 and Print 2 keys on the Control Panel
Table 4-36
Step
1. 2.
Video Printer(s) Checks

When scanning in 2D Color Mode, Press FREEZE to Image scanning stops with the last picture on the stop image acquisition. screen. Press PRINT on the Control Panel The image displayed on the screen is printed on B&W or Color printer, depending on the key assignment configuration. The image displayed on the screen is printed on Color or B&W printer, depending on the key assignment configuration
3. Press ALT. on the Control Panel 4. Check if the print quality on the pictures both from the printers are of expected quality.
4 - 57
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-17-2 VCR Checks
Mode Dependant Keys Stop, Pause, Rewind Fast Forward
Record/Pause
Figure 4-22 VCR Controls on the Control Panel 4-3-17-3 VCR Counter Check When adding new examinations to a Video cassette, you can set the VCR Counter without rewinding the Video Cassette to the start. The procedure below explains how to check this function. Prerequisite: The VCR Counter number when the Video Cassette was Ejected last time.
. .
Table 4-37
Step
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
VCR Counter Check

Insert the Video cassette in the VCR Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. Press UPDATE MENU in the Trackball area. To start the video counter at a different point: The Video Set Counter / Search Dialog window is displayed
Use the alphanumeric keyboard to enter the counter Number appears on the screen number (from last time) in the counter field. Press Set Counter to save the change. Press VIDEO on the Control Panel, to return to scanning mode. Number is saved The system returns to the scanning mode
4 - 58
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-17-4 VCR Record Check Table 4-38
Step
1.
VCR Checks
The VCR starts recording. A red dot is displayed in the screens VCR status area on the Title bar. It indicates that recording has begun The Recording stops. The video status icon on the screen is changed to (Pause) .
When scanning, press REC/PAUSE on the Control Panel.
2. Press REC/PAUSE on the Control Panel to stop recording. 3. Note the counter meter setting on the VCR
4-3-17-5
Check Rewind, Fast Forward and Replay Video Prerequisite: A Video Tape in the VCR with at least one recorded examination.
Table 4-39
Step
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
VCR Checks
The Mode Dependant Keys changes to VCR controls The VCR starts to rewind the video tape.(observe the counter) The VCR Stops The VCR starts the Fast Forward (observe the counter)
Press VIDEO on the Control Panel. Press REWIND (Assignable Key) Press STOP (Assignable Key) Press FAST FORWARD (Assignable Key) Use the controls above to navigate to the start of the recorded examination. Then press PLAY (Assignable Key) to replay the recording
The replay of the examination starts.
6. 7. 8.
While in playback mode, use the Trackball to adjust The replay of the examination responds according to the video playback speed and scroll through the record. your commands Press PAUSE to stop the tape at the desired frame. The tape stops at the desired video frame. part of it can be stored on the computers memory as a cineloop.The cine loop enables the user to perform further operations on the stored section (see for further information on cine loop operation). To store a recorded sequence as a cine loop The last few seconds are stored as a cine loop.
When playing back an examination
9.
Press FREEZE while playing back a recorded session.
4 - 59
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-17-6 Check Cineloop from Video Prerequisite
A Video Tape in the VCR with at least one recorded examination. Procedure
. .
Table 4-40
Step
1. 2.
VCR Cineloop Checks

The last part of the video is stored in the computers memory as a cine loop. The Cineloop is played back according to your manipulating of the trackball.
When in video play back (of an examination), press FREEZE. Use the Trackball to move back and forth in the cine loop.
4-3-17-7
Turn OFF Power to Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO See 4-2-2 - Power Shut Down on page 4-5.
4 - 60
4-3-18
4-3-18-1
Mechanical Functions Checks

Keyboard and Display Platform (Console) Checks
Label illustrates the functionality of the two handles
Handles for horizontal and vertical lock (up under the platform)
Figure 4-23 Console with handles
Table 4-41
Step
1. 2.
Display Platform Maneuverability Checks

It is possible to maneuver the Display Platform horizontally at present level of height
Pull handle up under the platform towards you to release horizontal lock
It is possible to maneuver the Display Platform up and Pull handle at left hand grip towards you to release the down (between the vertical end stops) as long as you Vertical Lock pull the handle towards you It is possible to maneuver the Display Platform both Pull both handles towards you to release both Vertical horizontally and vertically as long as you keep pulling and Horizontal locks these handles towards you
3.
4 - 61
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 4-3-18-2 Brakes and Direction Lock Checks
Follow this procedure to verify that Brakes and Direction Locks function as intended.
Table 4-42
Step
1.
Brakes and Direction Lock Checks

Task
Press on pedal no. 2
Expected Result(s)
To engage the brakes in full lock
2.
Press on pedal no.1
To release the brake
3.
Press on pedal no.1
To engage swivel lock. You may need to move the system around a little to get the wheels to lock into the locked direction.
4.
Press on pedal no. 2
To release swivel lock
4 - 62
Section 4-4 Application Turnover Check List

Complete these checks before returning the scanner to customer for use:
4-4-1
Software Configuration Checks

Table 4-43
STEP
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Software Configuration Checks

TASK CHECK ( )
Check Date and Time setting Check that Location (Hospital Name & Department) is correct Check Language settings Check assignment of Printer Keys Check that all of the customers options are set up correct
4 - 63
Section 4-5 Power Supply

4-5-1
4-5-1-1
Power Supply Test Procedure

Introduction There is no need to do any special tests on the Power Supplies if there dont seems to be a problem that may be related to the Power Supplies. Refer to section 7-5-1 on page 7-67 if you appear to have a problem that may be related to the Power Supplies.
4-5-2
Power Supply Adjustment

There are no adjustments on the power supplyes. The DC Power is self-regulated. If a voltage is outside the specified range, it means that something is wrong, either with the power supply itself or with a unit connected to that specific power outlet.
4 - 64
Section 4-5 - Power Supply
Section 4-6 Site Log

Table 4-44
DATE
Site Log
PROBLEM COMMENTS
SERVICE PERSON
4 - 65

DATE
Site Log (continued)

PROBLEM COMMENTS
SERVICE PERSON
4 - 66
Section 4-6 - Site Log
Chapter 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

This chapter explains Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs system concepts, component arrangement, and subsystem functions. It also describes the Power Distribution System (PDS).
Table 5-1
Section
5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 5-8 5-9 5-10 5-11 5-12 5-13 5-14 5-15 5-16
Description
Overview General Information Front End Processor Back End Processor Patient I/O (Physio) Internal I/O Top Console Peripherals Modem Power Distribution Circuit Boards Video Specifications System Logs Board Rack Cooling System Top Console Movement Common Service Platform
Page Number
5-1 5-2 5-4 5-14 5-23 5-24 5-31 5-32 5-33 5-34 5-44 5-95 5-95 5-96 5-97 5-101
Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory)
5-1
Section 5-2 General Information

Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is a phased and linear array ultrasound imaging scanner. The system is versatile and can be used for a number of various applications; all a matter of software. The system can be used for: 2D Grey Scale and 2D Color Flow Imaging M-Mode Grey Scale Imaging Color M-Mode Doppler a number of combinations of the above
A Physio module is incorporated in the Backend Processor (BEP) to provide ECG signals to synchronize cardiac ultrasound image acquisition. Additionally other analog inputs (e.g. ECG, phono) from devices such as treadmills are processed. Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO is a digital beamforming system which can handle up to 192 element linear probes by use of multiplexing. Signal flow travels from the Probe Connector Panel to the Front End Electronics, to the Back-End Processor, and finally displayed on the monitor and peripherals. System configuration is stored on a hard disk and all necessary software is loaded from the hard disk on power up. The user initiates system operation via the Operator Panel which contains a keyboard, control panel, TGC and LCD display. Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO internal electronics are divided into two card cages; Front End Processor (FEP) Sometimes called Card Cage in this manual. Backend Processor (BEP)
Interconnecting signals from the FEP, BEP, Operator Panel, Monitor and Power distribution subsystems are routed via cables and circuit boards IIO (Internal I/O) and EIO (External I/O). The main functional blocks in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO are: Front End Processor (FEP) Back End Processor (BEP) Top Console Power Distribution Internal I/O External I/O Peripherals Modem
5-2
Section 5-2 - General Information
5-2-1
Block Diagram
BACK END PROCESSOR

USER INTERFACE
AC POWER
OP I/O PANEL 17" Monitor
UPS ATX POWER SUPPLY
ECG Patient Interface 5.25" MOD Hard Drive CD-ROM
POWER ON/OFF (RESET*)
PC MOTHERBOARD
SONY COLOR PRINTER
UP-2900MD PCVIC PC2IO AGP VIDEO SOUND CARD PC2IP Ethernet
SONY VCR
SVO-9500MD
Network Connection
SONY B/W PRINTER

UP-890MD
FRONT END PROCESSOR

FRONT END BACKPLANE
DOPPLER
PROBES
INTERNAL I/O
EXTERNAL I/ O
RLY BF64 BF64 FEC RFT SDP IMP RX TX
PCI CABLE
XDBUS
AC CONTROLLER
XFMR BOX
230Vac
MODEM
230Vac
TO MODEM
115Vac
TO MONITOR
115Vac
TO CARD RACK 230Vac TO PC 230Vac
TO PERIPHERIALS 115 or 230Vac TO OUTLET
Figure 5-1 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Simple Block Diagram
Video Outputs
5-3
USB Connection
Section 5-3 Front End Processor

5-3-1 General Information
The Front End Processor includes all of the boards in the Front End Card Rack: RLY (Relay Board) TX (Transmitter Board) RX128 (Receiver Board) BF64 (Beamformer Boards) (2x) FEC (Front End Controller Board) RFT (Radio Frequency & Tissue Board) SDP (Spectrum Doppler Processor) IMP2 (Image Port 2)
The Front End can be divided into two subsystems: 1.) The Front End subsystem includes the: RLY (Relay Board) TX (Transmitter Board) RX128 (Receiver Board) BF64 (Beamformer Boards) (2x) FEC (Front End Controller Board) RFT (Radio Frequency & Tissue Board) SDP (Spectrum Doppler Processor) IMP2 (Image Port 2).
2.) The Mid Processors subsystem include:
5-3-2
Front End Bus

Most of the FE boards are controlled by the Front End Controller board via a Front End Bus (FE_BUS). The FE_BUS is a synchronous and bidirectional bus built up by 16-bit data, 6-bit device address select, 10-bit page address and 8 strobe signals controlling the data transactions. The Front End Controller board can also read the revision status of the Front End boards through a serial line to a E2PROM located on each board.
5-3-3
Phased and Linear Array Front End

The phased and linear array probes consist of several identical transducer elements (e.g. 64, 128, 192). Three probes can be connected to the system. The connectors are physically located on the RLY board, where one of them is selected and connected to the transmitter (TX) and receiver (RX) through a number of relays. Depending on probe type and system setup, a certain scan pattern is selected on the FEC board. This board loads scan parameters for both the transmitter and the beamformer (steering- and focusing delays) into local RAM on these boards. Thus, when the FEC board goes through a scan sequence, it loads the proper contents of the RAM into the Transmitter Puls Generator (TPG), then issues a transmit trigger pulse (TXTRIG_L) for the transmitter and a receive synchronization pulse (SYNC_L) for the beamformer. By firing the transmit pulses from the different elements at certain repeated time intervals and with different delays, the ultrasound beam can be steered in desired directions (re. principles of operation) obtaining the selected scan patterns (e.g. 2D, 2D Flow etc.). Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
5-4
5-3-3
Phased and Linear Array Front End (contd)

The ultrasound transmit bursts are generated on the TX board, initiated by the transmit trigger pulse (TXTRIG_L). The transmit trigger starts the Transmit Pulse Generators (TPG) on the TX board, each generating 16 transmit pulses with different delays. The transmit pulses are then routed to separate transmit amplifiers fed with voltage HV1 and HV2 witch are controlled by the Acoustic Power control software. The transmit pulses are routed over an Xducer Bus Board (XDBUS) located on the front side of the Front End boards, to the Relay board, where they are fed to the selected (one out of three) phased/ linear array probe. The reflected signal from body structures and blood cells are routed from the probe, via the Relay board over the Xducer Bus to the RX (receiver) board, where preamplification (20dB) and Analog Time Gain Compensation (ATGC) (-10 - +30 dB) is performed. Gain is determined by an analog signal (ATGC) generated by the FEC board. On the very input of the RX board are transmit/receive (T/R) switches to prevent the transmitters from destroying the receivers. Prior to preamplification the signals from the different channels were also fed through relays. This is for having the possibility to route echoes from annular array probes into the receiver, in addition to injecting a test signal, TSIG. The output channels from the RX board are fed to two Beamformer-64 boards. Each Beamformer board performs A/D conversion of 64 channels. The Front End Controller board controls all Front End boards. The board loads all parameters to the TX and Beamformer RAMs, it reads the probe identification, selects probe connector on Relay board and controls the high voltage multiplexer in linear probes. In addition the board generates the transmit trigger pulse for TX, a receive synchronization pulse (SYNC_L) used by Beamformers and RF & Tissue Processor, a differential ATGC voltage used by RX and control signals for the High Voltage Power Supply (HV POWER). The Front End Controller board also generates the global 40 MHz system clocks and reset pulse (SRES). The output from the Beamadders at BF#2 is fed to the RF and Tissue Processor Board (RFT).
5-3-4
Transmitter Power Supply

The transmitters on the TX board are fed with high voltage from the TX supply. This module consists of three linear power supplies; one providing a symmetrical output voltage ranging from 0 to +/- 80 V (HV1), the other providing a voltage ranging from 0 to +/- 40 V (HV2) and the third outputting +/- 80 V for the multiplexers in the linear probes. HV1 and HV2 are programmable through a serial interface from the FEC board.
5-3-5
Mid Processors
The Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Front End and visualization system are interconnected through digital signal processing modules, called the Mid Processors. These processors performs the adequate signal conditioning for the different data types; Tissue, Doppler and Flow. The current Mid Processors are the RF & Tissue Processor board (RFT), the Spectrum Doppler Processor board (SDP).
5-3-5-1
Pipelink bus The Mid Processors are interconnected through a data bus system called the Pipelink. This is a unidirectional bus transporting data from the pipelink dispatcher (RF & Tissue Processor) through the accessed processor to the destination, the Image Port. The Image Port will then map the data into the Image Memory. Data leaving the RF & Tissue Processor have a tag indicating what type of data that is transported; e.g. tissue, Doppler, 2D Flow. Each of the remaining mid processors decode this tag and when it matches their own address, the data is processed. Data that doesnt have a matching tag, is passed on to the next processor. In 2D, data is typically transferred in vector blocks from the RFT board. In spectrum Doppler and Color Flow, data from one range gate is transferred. Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5-5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-3-5-2 RF and Tissue Processor (RFT)
The RF & Tissue Processor board receives its data from the Beamformer board in the Front End. Both type of data and what data samples (RF_MODE) to use are communicated to the RFT board from the Front End Controller board (over the Front End Bus). RF Processing Different types of RF processing can be performed depending on later usage of the data; e.g.: RF Demodulation Digital Time Gain Compensation Filtering Decimation.
Data Buffer After RF filtering, the data is written into different sliding ring buffers, dedicated the different types of data. While data is written into the buffers sample by sample in vectors, multiple samples from the same range (depth) can be read out. Both input addressing (start and length) and output addressing (through output events) is controlled by the Front End Controller board. Tissue Processing A number of different tissue processes are performed on this board: 1.) First the signal amplitude is obtained by detection. 2.) Then the data is compressed to attenuate the strong signals and amplify the low level echoes. 3.) After compression, Zone Stitching is performed. This is used to combine the (transmit) focal zones from different vectors into one vector by weighting the zone transitions, and does only apply to phased/linear array probes where multiple vectors can be collected in the same direction. For MMode, peak detection and edge enhancement is implemented. 4.) Finally an offset can be added to the signal and clipping is performed. 5.) The tissue data is then tagged, and sent on to the Image Port board. Color Flow Processing No Color Flow processing is performed here, except for the RF demodulation previously mentioned. The data used for Color Flow is tagged with the appropriate headers and tails and routed through an output multiplexer to the Backend Processor (BEP). Doppler Processing In addition to RF demodulation, a variable digital high pass filter is implemented on the RFT board.The purpose of this filter is to remove strong low frequency signals returning from wall motion, valves and leaflets. The filtering is performed by the local DSP. Data is then tagged and sent to the Spectrum Doppler Processor board.
5-6
Section 5-3 - Front End Processor
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-3-5-2 RF and Tissue Processor (RFT) (contd) Control
The RFT board has a local Digital Signal Processor (DSP) with an external EPROM. The DSP performs multiple control tasks: 1.) It handles communication with the BEP over the VME bus. 2.) It updates filter coefficients and other parameters in the data path. 3.) When output events from the Front End Controller is received, it sets up the Pipelink output control for data tagging and transfer. 4.) During transfer of time motion data, it sets up a time-slot data transfer (which replaced the output event based transfer). 5-3-5-3 Spectrum Doppler Processor The Spectrum Doppler Processor board (SDP) receives its data from the RFT board. In Pulsed Wave (PW) Doppler several sets of data from the same range (depth) originating from different transmit pulses are transferred from RFT data buffer. In Continuous Wave (CW) Doppler the data samples are transferred consecutively. Spectrum Analysis The data sets are written into a sliding ring buffer with different ranges along the vertical axis and different transmit pulses along the horizontal (time) axis, thus achieving a two-dimensional matrix. By reading the data out of the buffer in a certain way (re. Principles of Operation) and performing Discrete Fourier Transform on the data, velocities up to seven times the pulse repetition frequency (in PW) can be displayed. Parts of the spectral analysis is done by a digital signal processor (DSP1). During Duplex modes (e.g. 2D and Doppler) the gaps in the spectrum (when doing 2D) is filled by stretching the real spectrum out to fill the missing time. Audio The Doppler audio channels (I and Q, or DOPLA and DOPLB) are generated based upon the digital data stored in the ring buffer. The data is transferred from the buffer into DSP2 (Digital Signal Processor no. 2) which controls the D/A conversion as well as the Missing Signal Estimation of audio in Duplex modes. Trace Interface A serial link from the Internal I/O board, feeds several A/D converted traces (like ECG, phono, pressure) into the Spectrum Doppler Processor board. These traces as well as spectral data, are tagged and transported over the pipelink to the Image Port under control of DSP1. Control The DSP1 controls the data flow and updating of all parameters, including control of read/write address generation. It communicates with the BEP over the VME bus and provides the pipelink output with spectrum and trace data.
5-7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-3-5-4 Image Port
The purpose of the Image Port is to capture signal processed data from the Mid Processors or video data from the VCR, and route this data to the appropriate locations. Data from Mid Processors 1.) Data from the RFT Card and the SDP Card are transferred over the PipeLink in data packages called Frames, Packets and Tuplets, all depending on size of the package. 2.) At the Image Port the Packet is collapsed. A Frame contains enough data to construct one frame (e.g. one 2D frame), while one Tuplet contains enough data to construct one vector (e.g. one Color vector). The size of the vectors will depend on data type. 3.) The Image Port demultiplexes the different types of data, groups the same types and maps them into the proper ring buffers in the Image Memory located on the Image Port 2 card. Data from VCR 1.) Video and S-VHS (both in PAL and NTSC format) from the VCR (or another video source) is first digitized and then fed through a video multi-standard decoder providing decoded luminance (black and white) and chroma (color) data. 2.) Data is then transferred to a ring buffer in the image memory where it later can be fetched by Scan Converter for display on the system monitor. Memory Typically size of the Image Memory is 256 MBytes. The Image Port board is the data source and the BEP is the data destinations. Up to eight of the data sets below can be stored live simultaneously in the Image Memory in eight different ring buffers. 2D Tissue data Doppler data M-Mode Tissue data 2D Flow data M-Mode Color data Trace data Video Luminance data Video Chroma data RF data
5-8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-3-5-5 Internal I/O and Peripheral Control
The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources to multiple destinations. 5-3-5-6 SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of RGB can be fed to a color printer. Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and printers. The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers. Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and Modem. Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO. Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board. The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board. An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed.
External I/O Several signal are fed from the Internal I/O board to an External I/O board located on the rear of the system. This board contains data buffers and a galvanic isolation section. Different types of signals are fed to connectors accessible on the External I/O. R, G, B and Sync are provided for external RGB monitors or printers. Composite video, black and white video and S-VHS video are buffered and fed to output connectors for external monitors and printers. Two serial RS-232 ports are provided for external communication with e.g. the System CPU. An Ethernet signal from the BEP is fed to an Ethernet connector. It is used for connectivity, including DICOM Network.
5-9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-3-5-6-1 System Block Diagram
Card Rack Probe RX TX Front End Digitized received ultrasound signals MID Processors
Digital Data
Patient Isolated Sensors
Backend Processor Patient I/O Digital Trace Data Control PC2IP PC2IO PCVIC Video Signals Storage
VME BUS
SVGA Monitor
Internal I/O RS232 S-Video (Luma) 1 Modem S-Video/Audio RGB & Sync
Front Panel
S-Video/Audio
Top Console
External I/O
TCP/IP Network including External units & DICOM Network Phone Line (InSite)
VCR
Color Printer
B/W Printer
1)
S-Video (Luma) is the Luma (Black/White) part of the S-Video signal
Figure 5-2 Block Diagram, Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
5 - 10
5-3-6
Major Sub-Systems in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO

The following Sub-systems make up the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO: Front End Subsystem Mid Processors Back End Processor Patient I/O (Physio) (with ECG and Physio) Internal I/O External I/O Top Console (with monitor) Peripherals Modem
5 - 11
5-3-7
Front End Subsystem
Doppler Probe
RX128
Beam Former 64
Digitized received ultrasound signals to RFT Board
Probes
RELAY BOARD
XD BUS
FE BUS
VME bus
TX128
Front End Controller
Figure 5-3 The Front End
The Front End section performs the transmit and receive functions. The Front End Controller controls the ultrasound transmitter and receiver synchronization. The TX128 board makes the ultrasound transmit pulses. The RX128 board is the ultrasound receiver for the ultrasound echoes from blood/tissue. The two Beamformer boards digitizes the received ultrasound signal and sends it to the Mid Processors. The Relay board is the interface between the Probes and the Front End.
5 - 12
5-3-8
Mid Processors
Digitized received ultrasound signals from Front End
RFT - Radio Pipelink bus Frequency & Tissue
SDP Spectral Doppler
IMP2 Pipelink bus Image Port
PC2IP bus (Digital Video Data)
To Backend Processor
VME-bus S-Video/CVideo replay (from VCR)
Motherboard connector to Internal I/O module
Figure 5-4 The Mid Processors
This Mid Processors performs the signal conditioning for Tissue and Doppler. Color Flow processing is done by the Backend Processor. The Radio Frequency & Tissue (RFT) board, the Spectral Doppler (SDP) board and the Image Port (IMP2) board are located in the Front End Processor Card Rack. The RFT board receives digitized ultrasound signals from the Front End and performs the RF filtering and tissue processing. The result is sent via the Pipelink bus to SDP. The SDP board receives digitized Doppler data via the Pipelink bus, performs the pulsed and continuos Doppler processing and produces Doppler Audio. The processed Doppler result is sent via the Pipelink bus to IMP2. The Doppler Audio is routed via the Motherboard to the Internal I/O. The main functions of the Image Port (IMP2) board: Capture data from the RFT or the VCR (in playback), store it into its internal memory and then route it to the BEP via the PC2IP bus. Pick Color Flow data from the Pipelink bus and send it to the BEP via the PC2IP bus. Main Communication between BEP and the cards in the Card Rack (via the PC2IP Bus).
Doppler Audio
To/From FEC2 (Front End)
5 - 13
Section 5-4 Back End Processor

5-4-1 Introduction
The Back End Processor is a computer designed specially for the use in Ultrasound Scanners made by GE. The first version, called BEP-1 in this manual, has been used since the introduction of the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO ultrasound scanners. A new version, called BEP-2 in this manual, will be introduced second half of 2002 as a replacement for BEP-1, both for new ultrasound scanners from factory and for service replacement in the field. When the descriptions in this section applies only to one of the models, it will be marked in the text (BEP1 or BEP-2)
5-4-2
Signal Flow and Processing

The Back End Processor receives the data from the Front-End Electronics, stores it in memory, performs scan conversion to pixel domain, and drives the system RGB monitor. Back End Processor software is also providing processing of Color Flow, Doppler, and M-Mode Data. See Figure 5-6 "CPU/Backend Processor Block Diagram (BEP-1)" on page 5-15 for an overview of the Back End Processor.
5-4-3
Location of the Back End Processor

The BEP is located on the left side, inside the scanner. The cover on the left side has been removed in Figure 5-5 "Backend Processor Mounted in Scanner (BEP-1 shown)" on page 5-14.
Backend Processor
Front of Scanner
BEP seen from Left Side of Scanner
Figure 5-5 Backend Processor Mounted in Scanner (BEP-1 shown)
5 - 14
Section 5-4 - Back End Processor
5-4-4
BEP-1 Block Diagram
P C MO T HE R B O A R D F ro nt P anel
HD L ed
SLOT 7
E T HE R NE T
P CI Slo t #5
SLOT 6 RS232 #3 RS232 #4 I2C RS422 INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
PC2IP
HA R D DR IV E
P C 2IP
P CI Slo t #4
SLOT 5 IDE #1 TOP DRIVE BAY
ECG
UNUS E D S L O T
P CI Slo t #3
SLOT 4
MIDDLE DRIVE BAY
O P T IO NA L MO D O P T IO NA L S C S I C A R D
P CI Slo t #2
SLOT 3 BOTTOM DRIVE BAY
CD RW
IDE #2
UNU S E D S L O T
P CI Slo t #1
JCD1
SLOT 2
UP S B attery
A G P V IDE O
AG P Slot
SLOT 1 JWR1
CP U #1
10/100bT
256DIMM Slot #4 MB DIMM
PARALLEL
256 MB DIMM
AT X P OWE R S UP P L Y
256 MB DIMM
DIMM Slot #3
DIMM Slot #2
DIMM Slot #1
USB1
UP S
JFP1
JW OL1
CP U #2
USB2 COM1 COM2 (EXT)
AC POWER
P C IO MO DUL E
POW ER S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 P C IO B oa rd Control
SVGA IN
SVGA OUT 1
RGB OUT P C V IC B oa rd
Figure 5-6 CPU/Backend Processor Block Diagram (BEP-1)
5 - 15
5-4-5
NOTE:
BEP-1 Description
Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP-1) is minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances. The EMC enclosure houses an ATX Power Supply with UPS battery backup, an ATX style motherboard with minimum of 512 MB of ram and two 733 MHz processors 5 PCI slots on the mother board contains the following: 1.) Blank 2.) Optional SCSI Card for MO Drive 3.) Blank 4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor 5.) Network Interface Card - 3Com Ethernet Card Analog output complies with the SVGA specification. Resolution (on monitor) is 800x600. Support for 32 bit True Color Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes. 128-bit internal memory interface. Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec). Power and Internal PCI control signals Two (2) USB Ports
5 - 16
5-4-6
BEP-2 Block Diagram
PC MOT HE R B OA R D F ront P anel

H D L ed
SLOT 6
Unus ed
P CI Slot #6
SLOT 5
RS232 #3 RS232 #4 I2C RS422
PC2IP
P C 2IP
INTERNAL DRIVE BAY
P CI Slot #5
SLOT 4
HAR D DR IVE
P CI Slot #4
IDE #1
TOP DRIVE BAY
Unus ed
P CI Slot #3
ECG Unus ed
P CI Slot #2
SLOT 1 MIDDLE DRIVE BAY
MOD S C S I C ard
P CI Slot #1
BOTTOM DRIVE BAY
CD RW
IDE #2
Unus ed
AG P Slot
AGP SLOT
UP S B attery
Connector C USB3/4
Connector G
Motherboard SVGA USB3/4 Connector F USB1/2 COM1

DIMM Slot #1
512 MB DIMM
A T X P OW E R S UP P L Y
Connector B
256 MB DIMM
UP S
DIMM Slot #2
CPU
PARALLEL 10/100bT
AC POWER
Connector I
P C IO MODUL E
POWER S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 P C IO B oard Control
F AN quic k dis c onnect
SVGA IN
SVGA OUT 1
CHASSIE F AN
RGB OUT P C V IC B oard
Figure 5-7 CPU/Backend Processor Block Diagram (BEP 2)
5 - 17
5-4-7
NOTE:
BEP-2 Description
Specifications mentioned about the Back End Processor (BEP-2) is minimum requirements. The actual hardware could exceed these specifications as technology advances. The EMC Enclosure House A Power Supply with UPS battery backup, An Intel Motherboard with 768 Mbytes of ram and a single 2.0 GHz P4 processor w/ 400 MHz FSB. Six (6) USB Ports One (1) Serial Port (COM1 used for modem connection) USB to Serial adapter cable (USB #3 to II/O B7) for External I/O serial output AGP Video output from the motherboard (AGP Card Slot empty) LAN output from the motherboard (PCI Card Slot 6 empty)
Use of 5 PCI slots on Mother Board

1.) Blank 2.) Optional SCSI Card for MO Drive 3.) Blank 4.) PC2IP Card - GE designed. PCI Bus interface to the Front End Processor 5.) Blank Analog output complies with the SVGA specification. Resolution (on monitor) is 800x600. Support for 32 bit True Color Minimum of 8 Mbytes of high speed Video RAM, expandable to at least 16 Mbytes. 128-bit internal memory interface. Hardware supported asynchronous bit block transfer (80 Mpixels/sec). Power and Internal PCI control signals
5 - 18
5-4-8
PCVIC Card
SVGA output to the monitor RGB output to color printer
5-4-9
UPS Battery Operation

The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as: Circuit Breaker in the OFF position System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
5 - 19
5-4-10
Internal Storage Devices:

Minimum 20 Gigabyte EIDE Hard Disk Drive (HDD) inside the Back End Processor cabinet. 5.25 inch Magneto-Optical Drive (MOD) (option) available from front of scanner. CD-RW Drive available from front of scanner.
5-4-11
5-4-11-1
Inputs
AC Power Table 5-2
Input
230 VAC
AC Power
Description
AC Power
Connection from:
AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
5-4-11-2
DC Voltages Table 5-3

Input
+5Vstb GND
DC Input Voltages
Description
Standby voltage Electrical Ground
Connected to:
DC Power Supply via Backplane DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/ O
5 - 20
5-4-11
5-4-11-3
Inputs (contd)
Input Signals Table 5-4 Input Signals
Description
Power verification signal from Card Rack Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O. Interrupt signal from I2C Bus Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console)
Signal Name
PWR_OK* ON/OFF Switch I2C Register Interrupt Microphone in to BEP Audio in to BEP
Signal Path
Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO Top Console > IIO > PC2IO ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO EIO > IIO > PC2IO Top Console > IIO > BEP Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP
Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP
5-4-11-4
Bi-directional Signals Table 5-5 Bi-directional Signals

Description
Control Signals to and from the UPS Not Used Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. Not Used Control signal to Internal VCR USB bus to Top Console Not Used Modem Standard TCP/IP Ethernet USB Bus for External Units
Signal Name
UPS Control RS232 RS232 XDCTRL I2C Bus Spare RS232 VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) USB #1 COM 1 COM 2 Ethernet USB #2
Signal Path
BEP > IIO PC2IO > IIO > Not Used PC2IO > IIO > EIO PC2IO > IIO > Not Used PC2IO > IIO > VCR PC2IO > IIO > Top Console PC2IO > IIO > EIO PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
5 - 21
5-4-12
Outputs
Table 5-6 Output Signals
Description
DC Voltage DC Voltage Active Low
Signal Name
+5VDC +12VDC PS_ON* Standby SVideo CVideo VGA VGA
Signal Path
PC2IO > IIO PC2IO > IIO PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack PC2IO > IIO > Top Console
SVideo Out Composite Color Video VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console) BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Audio Out from BEP Video Trig Signal
PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO BEP > Top Console PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO This signal is not used on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO BEP > IIO > Internal VCR BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR PC2IO > IIO > EIO
BW Video RGB
Audio Out TRIG
5 - 22
Section 5-5 Patient I/O (Physio)

The Patient I/O is mounted inside the Backend Processors cabinet with its connector panel available on the front of the scanner. The Patient IO contains the electronics for ECG, phono and two analog inputs. One of the inputs has programmable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The electronics also contains a pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.
ISOLATION
PHONO
PHONO
ECG / RESPIRATION
ECG
A/D
Digital Trace Data to PC2IO
AUX 1 AUX 2 (Pulse/Pressure)
AUX1 AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)
Figure 5-8 Pat I/O - Block Diagram Available inputs Phono (from a phono heart microphone) ECG / Respiration AUX1 AUX2 (Pulse/Pressure)
These signals are optically isolated from the rest of the system.
5 - 23
Section 5-6 Internal I/O

The Internal I/O is the interface between the Card Cage, BEP Module, and the rest of the system, including the Top Console and the Peripherals.
TO CARD RACK
SONY VCR SVO-9500MD Remote

Right Left Right
AUDIO OUT AUDIO IN
SONY B/W PRINTER UP890MD
A8 A9 A6 A7 A2 A15 A11 A10 A1 A3 A14

Cable #7
Left Cable #17
B/W Video In
RS-232C
Cable #17 Cable #3
VIDEO OUT
Cable #4 Cable #16 Cable #16
RS-232C
SONY COLOR PRINTER UP-2900MD
VIDEO IN
Video Output
USER INTERFACE
Cable #2
OP PANEL Op Panel I/F Video Mic
A4
USB, +12PC, MIC IN, AUDIO OUT PS SUPPLY ON FAN SPEED CONTROL
AC Power MONITOR
A5
Cable #11
PC/VIC
50M
B5
PC2IO
50M
D1 I/O-PC2IO
Signals Cable
B6 B7 B8
Cable #10 Cable #9 Cable #9 Cable #18
D2 Power from PC COM2 (EXT) COM1 USB #2 USB #1 10/100 T

PC MOTHERBOARD
B2
TO EXTERNAL I/O BOARD
Cable #18
B1 B3
Cable #19
Line In Line Out Mic In

AGP VIDEO PCI VIDEO SOUND CARD PC2IP
B4
Cable #29
CD/RW MOD ECG
INTERNAL I/O BOARD
SCSI FLOCK OF BIRDS

(option)
PC MODULE
Figure 5-9 Internal I/O Module Overview
5 - 24
Section 5-6 - Internal I/O
Section 5-6
Internal I/O (contd)
Figure 5-10 Internal I/O Back End Processor Connections The Internal I/O board performs buffering and distribution of video and control data from various sources to multiple destinations. SVGA (R, G, B and Sync.) are fed from the BEP, directly up to the system monitor. Another set of RGB can be fed to a color printer. Composite video, black and white video and S-Video are buffered and distributed to VCR and printers. The analog Doppler signals are fed from the Spectrum Doppler board to the VCR audio inputs and through a switch where audio from VCR playback also is input, to the BEP and then to the speakers. Serial RS-232 interface signals from the BEP are fed to the destinations; VCR, Color Printer and Modem. Serial USB interface signals from the BEP are fed to the Front Panel and to EIO. Remote control signals for printers are generated on the I/O board. The Footswitch is connected to the I/O board. An AC Power Interface controls power on/off and fan speed. Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 25
5-6-1
Location in the Unit

The Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).
Internal I/O is located behind the cables at the rear of the Back End Processor. Back of System
Figure 5-11 Internal I/O: Location in the System (Seen from Left Side)
5-6-2
LEDs
Nine green LEDs indicate that the respective DC Voltages are OK.
Figure 5-12 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.
5-6-3
Fuses
All output voltages are fused
5-6-4
Jumpers and Dip-switches

TBD
5 - 26
5-6-5
Inputs
DC Voltages
Table 5-7
Input
+3.3 VDC +5 VDC +10 VDC +15 VDC -15 VDC
DC Input Voltages
Description
Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage
Connection from
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 Backend Processor > J17 Backend Processor > J17)
+6 VDC (analog) 5 VDC (analog) +5 VDC +12 VDC
Video Input Signals
Table 5-8
Input
SVGA SVHS SVHS Luma Comp. Video Comp. Video
Video Input Signals

Description
Video Signal to External I/O Video Signal to VCR & External I/O Video Signal to MBD (IMP) Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O Video Signal to External I/O Video Signal to MBD (IMP)
Connection from
PC2IO (Connector J16) PC2IO(Connector J16) VCR (Connector J11) PC2IO (Connector J16) PC2IO (Connector J16) Color printer
Audio Input Signals
Table 5-9
Input
Audio Input Signals

Description Connection from
MBD (IMP) VCR Audio signals, summed and distributed BEP
Two channel audio Two channel audio Two channel audio
5 - 27
5-11-13-3
Inputs (contd)
Serial Ports
Table 5-10
Input
USB USB Ethernet RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
Serial Ports
Description
Standard USB Serial Bus Standard USB Serial Bus Standard Ethernet Standard RS232 Serial Bus Standard RS232 Serial Bus Standard RS232 Serial Bus Standard RS232 Serial Bus
Connection from
BEPM - Top console BEPM - IEIO BEPM - IEIO BEPM COM1 - IEIO BEPM COM2 - IEIO PC2IO - Spare (J16) PC2IO - VCR (J16) PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16) PC2IO UPS (Connector J16)
Control Signals
Table 5-11
Input
Control Signals
Description
Spare Spare To EIO To AC Power To MBD and AC Power To Relay To Top Console
Connection from
MBD/FEC (Connector J??) MBD/FEC (Connector J?) PC2IO (Connector J16) MBD (Connector J?) PC2IO (Connector J16) Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO Test (Connector J?) PC2IO (Connector J16)
Control signals Control signals Trace trigger Fan control signals Power control signals Power on/off Standby
5 - 28
5-6-6
Outputs
DC Voltage
Table 5-12
Output
+5 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC, -5 VDC analog +5 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC, -5 VDC analog +5 VDC, +15 VDC, +12 VDC +15 VDC +5 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC, +15 VDC, -5 VDC analog +6 VDC analog
DC Output Voltages
Description
From BEP
Connection to
From Card Rack
Spare (Connector J21)
From BEP
From Card Rack
Not Used
From Card Rack From BEP From Card Rack From BEP
Not Used
Top Console
EIO From Card Rack
AUDIO
Table 5-13
Output
Audio (two channels)
Audio Outputs
Description Connection to
Top Console speakers and BEP Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP VCR and IEIO
5 - 29
5-11-13-4
Outputs (contd)
Interface Connectors Component Side
Table 5-14
Input
A1/J1 A2/P4 A3/P5 A4/J2 A5/P4 A6/J6 A7/J7 A8/J8 A9/J9 A10/J10 A11/J11 B1/J12 B2/J13 B3/J14 B4/J15 B5/J16 B6/J17 B7/P18 B8/P19 B9/P25 J32
Connectors, Component Side

Description
B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female. VCR remote ctrl RS232: 9pins D-sub, male. Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male. Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female. Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male. Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack. Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack. Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack. Audio in from VCR, right SVHS out to VCR SVHS in from VCR USB to Top console USB to external I/O Ethernet Audio I/O PC2IO signals PC2IO power COM1 COM2 UPS remote control MBD signals and power
Connection from
Table 5-15
Connectors, Solder side

Input
A12/J21 A13/J20 A14/J24 A15/P23 A16/P22 P30
Description
Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female Rotation adapter signals, 15pins Dsub, male Spare signals, 25pins D-sub, female EIO signals and power, 110pins male
Connection from
5 - 30
Section 5-7 Top Console
Top Console
Monitor
SVGA from Backend Processor (via Internal I/O)
115 VAC from AC Distribution Box (AC Power) Stereo Audio from Internal I/O
Speaker Control Panel GND
Speaker
ON/Standby
USB from/to Backend Processor (via Internal I/O)
ON/OFF to Internal I/O
12VDC from Backend Processor, +15VDC from Card Rack (both via Internal I/O)
Figure 5-13 Top Console Block Diagram
The Top Console includes; a SVGA video monitor a Control Panel with; an ON/OFF (standby) switch an alphanumeric (QWERTY) keyboard controls for manipulating the picture quality and for use in Measure & Analyze (M&A)
speakers for stereo sound output (used during Doppler scanning/replay)
5 - 31
Section 5-8 Peripherals

5-8-1 On-board Peripherals
(See Approved On-board Peripherals on page 3-32.) VCR (connected to Internal I/O) Black & White Video Printer (connected to Internal I/O) Color Video Printer (connected to BEP - D5) Modem (connected to External I/O)
5-8-2
External Peripherals
(See Off-board Peripherals on page 3-32.) Color Inkjet Printer Footswitch, Phone Line and Ethernet are connected to External I/O
5 - 32
Section 5-8 - Peripherals
Section 5-9 Modem

The modem is intended for an analog phone line. It is used for InSite/iLink communication with the Online Center.
External I/O
Internal I/O
RS232
Modem
DC Voltage
Analog phone line
AC/DC Converter
230 VAC From AC Power
To hospitals analog phone line
Figure 5-14 Modem Block Diagram
5 - 33
Section 5-10 Power Distribution

5-10-1 Overall AC Power Distribution
Fan regulator AC Ctrl Assy Mains Switch Filter 115 or 230 VAC Inrush Limit 230 VAC Select Voltage 115 VAC 230 VAC TX Power 115 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC DC Power 20 VAC
Fan
IIO
DC Voltages to Cards
Transformer Transformer Box
AC Power
TX Voltage Card Rack
AC/DC
UPS
Battery
Monitor DC Power distribution inside Backend Processor
Manually Selected: 115 VAC or 230 VAC
Backend Processor
Black & White Printer
AC/DC Converter
Modem
Color Video Printer
VCR (Video Recorder)
Figure 5-15 Overall Power Distribution
5 - 34
Section 5-10 - Power Distribution
5-10-2
Overview
The AC Powers main tasks are to supply the various internal subsystems with AC power and to galvanically isolate the scanner from the on site Mains Power System. To reduce inrush current, an inrush current limiter as well as an EMI filter. Voltage to peripherals can be configured to either 115 VAC or 230 VAC. The AC Power also controls and supplies the 20VAC needed by the systems cooling fan.
5-10-3
AC Power Distribution Box (PWB)
TRANSFORMER BOX
115Vac 230Vac
AC DISTRIBUTION PWB
INRUSH LIMIT
TO OUTLET
AC INLET BOX
Cable #27 L 230Vac 20Vac Mains switch
TO PERIPHERIALS (115 or 230 Vac)
230 115
TO MONITOR (115 Vac) Cable #13
TO MODEM (230 Vac) TO PC (230 Vac) Fan regulator
TO CARD RACK (230 Vac) CABLES INTERNAL IN AC CONTROL MODULE #27
TO A14 ON INTERNAL I/O

POWER SUPPLY ON, FAN SPEED CONTROL Cable #7
M
Figure 5-16 AC Power Distribution The mains cord has plugs in both ends. A female plug connects to the scanner and a male plug to the mains outlet on site. The mains voltage is routed via an EMI filter to the Mains Switch, located on the rear of the system. The Mains Switch is of the auto fuse type, if for some reason the current grows to high, the switch will automatically break the power. From the Mains Switch, the AC power is routed via an Inrush Current Limiter (titled: Inrush Limiter in Figure 5-16) to a internal outlet connector for the Mains Transformer.
5 - 35
5-10-3
AC Power Distribution Box (PWB) (contd)

The Transformer is the galvanic barrier between the rest of the scanner and the on site AC Mains. Input voltage to the transformer can be either 230VAC or 115 VAC (two different part numbers/FRUs). The configuration of the plug on the cable to the AC Transformer is different for the two AC Voltages. From the AC Transformer, there are three outlets; 20 VAC 115 VAC 230 VAC
The 20 VAC is routed via the fan regulator to the system fan. The 115 VAC is routed via a fuse to an AC Voltage selector, used for selecting the right output voltage for the Peripherals outlet and the Monitor. (The alternative voltage to this outlet is 230 VAC.) The 230 VAC output from the Transformer is routed via a fuse and distributed to the AC Voltage selector for the Peripherals outlet and to the following AC outlets: Modem Back End Processor Card Rack
Figure 5-17 Connectors on Back of AC Controller
5 - 36
5-10-4
5-10-4-1
DC Power
General Description The DC Power module is a switch mode power supply, enclosed in a metal frame that slides into the Card Rack. The module connects to the Mother Board (Backplane) through two F48 pin male connectors and supplies DC voltage via the Backplane, to all the boards in the Card Rack, and to I/O and Front Panel.
5-10-4-2
Front of Scanner
DC Power Supply
Figure 5-18 DC Power: Location in the Unit 5-10-4-3 Inputs AC Voltage. Plug P1, 230 VAC
Table 5-16
Input
230 VAC
Input, Plug P1, 230 VAC

Description
AC Input via a three pin male (IEC) mains inlet
Connection from:
Cable from the AC Power Distribution Box
5 - 37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-10-4-3 Inputs (contd) Sense and Control Signals, Plug P3/4
Table 5-17
Sense and Control Signals, Plug P3/4

Description
Remote sense Remote sense Active low control signal used to turn the DC Power ON. Controls the AC Power output to TX Power. Not used Control signal. Is high when the DC voltages are within specification. Is low when power is on its way ON or OFF. Used for control of AC Power output to TX Power.
Input/Output
+ 3.3 Sense - 3.3 Sense PS_ON* SYNC.
Connection from/to:
+3.3 V from Motherboard -3.3 V from Motherboard From: ON/OFF (Standby) key on Front Panel? FEC
PWR_OK
5-10-4-4
Outputs AC Voltage Output, Plug P2
Table 5-18
Output
230 VAC
AC Voltage Output, Plug P2, 230VAC

Description
AC output via a three pin female (IEC) mains plug on cable. This power is output enabled by use of a relay. It is controlled by PS_ON* (active low) and PWR_OK (high) TX Power
Connected to
5 - 38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-10-4-4 Outputs (contd) DC Output Voltages, Plug P3/P4
Table 5-19
Output
+ 3.3 V
DC Output Voltages, Plug P3 & P4

Description
DC output voltages, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
Connected to:
BF64 (two boards) BF64 (two boards) FEC
+ 5 Vd
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The d indicates that this voltage is used for digital circuits.
RFT SDP IMP2 Front Panel I/O Relay TX RX Relay RX
+ 6 Va
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits
- 5 Va
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits.
BF64 (two boards) FEC RFT SDP IMP2 TBD
+5Vstb +10 V
Standby voltage DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
TX Relay
+15 V
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
RX Front Panel I/O RX Front Panel I/O All boards
- 15 V GND
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane) Distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
5 - 39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-10-4-5 Fuses None.
A current limiter will switch off the power if + 3.3 V, +5 V or +15 V outputs are overloaded Over Voltage Protection is provided for these voltages: + 3.3 V + 5 Vd +/- 5 Va +/- 15 Va
5-10-4-6
Voltage will be turned off if the temperature grows too high.
Jumpers and Dip-switches None.
5-10-4-7
LEDs None. (Observe the LEDs on Internal I/O to check DC Voltage Status, see "Internal I/O" on page 5-79.)
5 - 40
5-10-5
5-10-5-1
TX Power Supply
General Description The TX Power is a switch mode power supply module. It is used to generate two symmetrical pairs of digitally programmable voltages for the transmitters in the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO scanner, and a fixed +/ - 100VDC Probe MUX Voltage used by the multiplexers in Linear Array Probes with more than 128 transducer elements. It is enclosed in a metal frame that slides into the Card Rack. The module connects to the Mother Board (Backplane) through a 32 pin connector A pin between the two upper mounting holes, fits into the a corresponding hole in the Card Rack. This key is used to prevent it from being plugged into other scanners.
Pin on rear side of TX Powers Front Panel
Figure 5-19 TX Power Supply: Front Panel with Key (Pin)
5 - 41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-10-5-2 Location in the Unit
Front of scanner
TX Power Supply
Figure 5-20 TX Power Supply: Location in the Unit (below the DC Power Supply)
5 - 42
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-10-5-3 Inputs AC Voltage. Plug P1, 230 VAC
Table 5-20
Input
230 VAC
Input, Plug P1, 230 VAC

Description
AC Input via a three pin male (IEC) mains inlet
Connection from:
Cable from the DC Power Module
5-10-5-4
Outputs Output Voltages, Plug P2
Table 5-21
Output
Output Voltages, Plug P2

Description
TX Voltage 1 Voltage can be programmed to vary from +/- 2.5 V to +/80V Used to drive the transmitters in 2D Mode and M mode TX voltage 2 Voltage can be programmed to vary from +/- 2,5 V to +/40V Used to drive the transmitters in Doppler (CW/PW) mode and in Color Flow Mapping (CFM) mode Probe Multiplexing Voltage A fixed +/-100 V Voltage Used for the multiplexers in linear array probes with more than 128 transducer elements
Connected to:
TSV1
TX board
TSV2
TX board
PMXVOUT
RLY board
5-10-5-5
Fuses Output Power Protection Circuit with these functions: Protect probe and TX board if a failure make the voltage exceed limits Protect the power supply if there is a failure in probe or transmitter circuit serial communication with the FEC-2 module stops nominal Power limit is exceeded maximum Power limit is exceeded
A watch-dog disables the voltage (set it to zero Volt) if the;
5-10-5-6
Jumpers and Dip-switches None.
5-10-5-7
LEDs None.
5 - 43
Section 5-11 Circuit Boards

5-11-1 Overview
This section describes the Circuit Boards in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Table 5-22
Sub-section
5-11-2 5-11-3 5-11-4 5-11-5 5-11-6 5-11-7 5-11-8 5-11-9 5-11-10 5-11-11 5-11-12 5-11-13 5-11-14 5-11-15 5-11-16 5-11-17
Contents in Section 5-11

Description
Relay Board, RLY Transmitter Board, TX128 Receiver Board, RX-128 Beamformer Board(s), BF-64 Front End Controller Board, FEC-2 Transducer Bus Boards, XD BUS Boards RF & Tissue Processor Board, RFT Spectrum Doppler Processor Board, SDP Image Port 2 Board, IMP2 Backend Processor Patient I/O Internal I/O External I/O Interconnect Cabling Motherboard (Back Plane) Modem
Page Number
5-45 5-47 5-50 5-53 5-56 5-61 5-62 5-66 5-70 5-74 5-78 5-79 5-87 5-90 5-92 5-93
5 - 44
Section 5-11 - Circuit Boards
5-11-2
5-11-2-1
Relay Board, RLY

General Description The Relay Board has three PA probe connectors, a blind PA slot used to park a fourth probe and a connector for a stand alone Doppler probe containing two transducer elements. In receiving mode, the Relay Board connects the transducer channels from the selected probe to the RX-128 and TX-128 boards via the XDBUS. The Relay Board routes the TX power supplies to the active probe. It also routes the Probe Multiplexer Control Signal to the active probe.
5-11-2-2
Front of Scanner
RLY Board
Figure 5-21 RLY Board: Location in Unit
5 - 45
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-2-3 Inputs DC Voltages
Table 5-23
Input
+ 5 Va

Description
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. Distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
Connected from:
DC Power Supply > Backplane
- 5 Va GND
DC Power Supply > Backplane DC Power Supply > Back Plane
Input Signals
Table 5-24
Input
EL1-128
Input Signals
Description
Received signals (echoes) and Transmitted pulses (1 of 3 probe connectors)
Connection from:
The active probe
Control Signals
Table 5-25
Input
Input Signals
Description
Digital data bus used for control of the boards in the Front End Probe Configuration
Connection from:
RLY > Backplane > FEC RLY > Backplane > FEC
Front End Data Bus Probe MUX Control
5-11-2-4
Outputs Output Signals
Table 5-26
Output
XD1 - 128 CW or PW TX CW or PW RX
Output Signals
Description
128 signals to TX-128 and RX-128 CW or PW Doppler transmitter pulses CW or PW Doppler RX signals (echoes)
Connection to:
XD Bus Boards Stand Alone Doppler probe Stand Alone Doppler probe
5-11-2-5
Fuses, Jumpers and Dip-switches None
5-11-2-6
LEDs None.
5 - 46
5-11-3
5-11-3-1
Transmitter Board, TX128

General Description The Transmitter Board (TX128) contains 128 individually controlled transmit channels and provides transmit pulses to the transducer array (the probes). Outputs The outputs from the TX128 board are the 128 transmitters channels XD1-128. They are fed from the P4 and P5 connectors via the XD Bus Boards to the Relay Board and then to the selected PA connector.
5-11-3-2
Front of Scanner
TX128 Board
Figure 5-22 TX128 Board: Location in Unit
5 - 47
Table 5-27
Input
+5 Va +10 V GND
Input, DC Voltages
Description
DC voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. DC voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The + 10V is only used by this board. Ground is distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). TX Voltage 1 Voltage can be programmed to vary from +/- 2.5 V to +/80V Used to drive the transmitters in 2D Mode and M Mode TX voltage 2 Voltage can be programmed to vary from +/- 2,5 V to +/40V Used to drive the transmitters in Doppler (CW/PW) mode and in Color Flow Mapping (CFM) mode
Connection from:
DC Power DC Power DC Power
TSV1
TX Power Supply > Backplane
TSV2
TX Power Supply > Backplane
Control Signals
Table 5-28
Input
FE_D0-15 FE_PA0-9 FE_SA0-5 TX_TRIG_L
Input, Control Signals

Description
Front End Data bus, Digital TTL Front End Page Address bus, Digital TTL Front End Device Select Address bus, Digital TTL Transmit trigger, Digital TTL
Connection from:
Front End Controller > Back Plane Front End Controller > Back Plane Front End Controller > Back Plane Front End Controller > Back Plane
5-11-3-4
Outputs Table 5-29

Output
XD1 - 128
Output TX pulses, Plug P4 & P5

Description
128 transmitter channels via the connectors P4 and P5 to the XD Bus Board
Connected to:
TX128 > XD Bus Board > Relay Board
5-11-3-5
Fuses, Jumpers and Dip-switches None
5 - 48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-3-6 LEDs
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
Figure 5-23 TX128 Board: LEDs
Table 5-30
LED #
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
LEDs on the TX128 Board

LED Color
- Red - Green - Yellow - Yellow - Yellow
Description
Board Failure Board OK Front End Bus Protocol Error Scan Spare
Normally State
Normally OFF Normally ON Normally OFF Normally OFF Normally OFF
5 - 49
5-11-4
5-11-4-1
Receiver Board, RX-128

General Description The RX-128 Board has 128 identical receive channels. The signal in each channel is fed via a Transmit/Receive (T/R) switch to a preamplifier. The next step is a Time Controlled Gain (TGC) amplifier used to equalize the signal strength from the near field, the mid field and the far field.
5-11-4-2
Front of Scanner
RX-128 Board
Figure 5-24 TX128 Board: Location in Unit
5 - 50
Table 5-31
Input
+ 5 Va
DC Input Voltages, Plug P3 & P4

Description
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane) DC output voltages, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane) Distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
Connected to:
DC Power Supply via Backplane
- 5 Va
+15 V - 15 V GND
DC Power Supply via Backplane DC Power Supply via Backplane DC Power Supply via Backplane
Input Signals
Table 5-32
Input
XD1 - XD128 Test SIG
Input Signals
Description
Signals containing the received back-scattered echoes from the active probe. Analog test signal TGC Control Voltages
Connection from:
Relay Board via the XD Bus Boards FEC Board FEC Board
ATGCVP/ATGCVN
5-11-4-4
Table 5-33
Output
RX1 - RX128
Output Signals
Description
128 RX signals (echoes)
Connection to:
Beamformer Boards via Backplane
5-11-4-5
Fuses None
5-11-4-6
Jumpers and Dip-switches None
5 - 51
LD4 LD3 LD2 LD1
Figure 5-25 RX-128: LEDs (on the Solder Side of the Board)
Table 5-34
LED #
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4
RX-128: LEDs (on the Solder Side of the Board)

LED Color
- Red - Green - Yellow - Yellow
Description
Board Failure Board OK Spare Spare
Normally State
Normally OFF Normally ON Normally OFF Normally OFF
5 - 52
5-11-5
5-11-5-1
Beamformer Board(s), BF-64

General Description The Beam Former Boards convert the analog signals from the RX-128 board to digital form, and performs receive focusing and steering by digital signal delays. Each BF-64 board can handle 64 channels, so two boards are used to handle the 128 channels from the RX-128 board. The output from the first board is fed to board #2 and summed with the signal on board #2, so the output from board #2 contains the data from all the 128 channels.
5-11-5-2
Front of Scanner
BF-64 Boards
Figure 5-26 BF-64 Boards: Location in Unit
5 - 53
Table 5-35
Input
+ 3.3 V + 5 Vd

Description
DC voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Backplane) DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The d indicates that this voltage is used for digital circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. Distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
Connected to:
DC Power Supply via Backplane DC Power Supply via Backplane
- 5 Va GND
Input Signals
Table 5-36
Input
RX1 - RX128 FE Bus
Input Signals
Description
Receiver signals Front End Bus This input is used on BF64 #2: The output signal from previous board.
Connection from:
RX-128 board FEC Board BF64 Board #1
MLA0 and MLA1
5-11-5-4
Table 5-37
Output
Output Signals
Description
This is the digital output from the board.
Connection to:
From BF64 #1: To BF64 #2. From BF64 #2: To RFT
MLA0 and MLA1
5-11-5-5
Fuses None.
5-11-5-6
Dip-switches None.
5 - 54
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-5-7 LEDs and Jumpers
LD2 LD1 LD3 LD4 LD5
10
2 SW1
Figure 5-27 BF64: LEDs and Jumpers
Table 5-38
LED Color
- Red - Green - Yellow - Yellow - Red
LEDs on the BF-64 Boards

Description
Board Failure Board OK Not Used Not Used Supply Voltage Error
Normally State
Normally OFF Normally ON Normally OFF Normally OFF Normally OFF
5 - 55
5-11-6
5-11-6-1
Front End Controller Board, FEC-2

General Description The Front End Controller Board controls the other boards in the Front End. Most of the control is done through the Frond End Bus. Main tasks done by the board: System Master Clock generator Transmitter Control ATGC Control Receive Focusing Control Analog Test Signal Generator High Voltage Control and supervision Probe Sensing Control of Relay Board Temperature Sensing for TEE probes Step Motor Control for TEE probes Temperature Sensing for circulated air
5-11-6-2
Front of Scanner
FEC-2 Board
Figure 5-28 FEC-2 Board: Location in Unit 5 - 56 Section 5-11 - Circuit Boards
Table 5-39
Input
+ 3.3 Vd
DC Input Voltages
Description
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The d indicates that this voltage is used for digital circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The d indicates that this voltage is used for digital circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. Distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
Connected to:
+ 5 Vd
- 5 Va
+ 15 Va
- 15 Va GND
Signal Inputs
Table 5-40
Input
PRPRES
Signal Inputs
Description
Probe Present Indicates the voltages and currents from the TX Supply Used for communication with the rest of the system (not the Front End Boards). Commands and data from the VME Bus can be routed via the Front End bus to the other boards in the Front End.
Connection from:
Relay Board TX Power
High Voltage V & I Sense
VME Bus
The Backend Processor
5 - 57
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-6-4 Output Output Signals
Table 5-41
Output
TXTRIG_L SYNC_L TSIG
Output Signals
Description
Starts the transmitter sequence Signal used to synchronize the Beam Formers Test Signal Differential signals used to control TGC on the RX Board One serial data line and several select lines to the TX Supply
Connection to:
TX128 boards BF64 boards RX-128 Board RX-128 Board TX Supply
ATGCVP/ATGCVN TX Voltage Control
5-11-6-5
LEDs Description, Main Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Table 5-42

LED #
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5
FEC-2, Lower Batch of LEDs, Main DSP

LED Color
- Red - Green - Yellow - Yellow - Yellow
Description
Board Failure Board OK System in scanning mode Probe Change No-Probe
Normally State
Normally OFF Normally ON ON when scanning OFF in Freeze ON during probe change OFF if no-probe has been selected OFF.
LD6
- Yellow
TX Overrange
ON if excessive TX Voltage is output Blinking, surveillance period
LD7 LD8
- Yellow - Yellow
VME Access DSP Running
ON when communicating with BEP. BLINKING (1 Hz) heartbeat
5 - 58
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-6-6 LEDs Description, Slave DSP Table 5-43
LED #
LD27 LD28 LD29 LD30
FEC-2, Upper Batch of LEDs, Slave DSP

LED Color
- Yellow - Yellow - Green - Ref
Description
Rack temperature surveillance TX Power surveillance Up and running Failure or reprogramming
Normally State
Blinking Blinking ON Blinking OFF
5-11-6-7
FEC-2, LEDs
LD30 LD29 LD28 LD27
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7 LD8
Figure 5-29 FEC-2, LEDs 5-11-6-8 Fuses and Dip-switches None Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 59
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-6-9 Jumpers

SW3 40 39
SW2 SW1 Connector used in factory test SW5 12 11 Connector used in factory test 2 1 Connector used in factory test SW4 12 11 SW10 2 1
SW7 10 9 Connector used in factory test 2 1
Figure 5-30 FEC-2, Jumpers and Connectors
5 - 60
5-11-7
5-11-7-1
Transducer Bus Boards, XD BUS Boards

General Description The two XD BUS Boards plugs into the rear edge connectors on the Relay Board, the TX128 Boars and on the RX-128 Board. The XD signals to and from the probes (via the Relay Board) are routed via this board.
5-11-7-2
Front of Scanner
XD BUS Board
XD BUS Board
Figure 5-31 XD BUS Boards: Location in Unit 5-11-7-3 Inputs Input Signals
Table 5-44
Input
XD1 - XD128
Input Signals
Description
Back scattered echo signals (Receive Mode) and Transmitter pulses (Transmit Mode)
Connection from:
Active Probe via Relay board in Receive Mode TX128 in Transmit Mode.
5 - 61
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-7-4 Outputs Output Signals
Table 5-45
Output
XD1 - XD128
Output Signals
Description
Transmitter pulses (Transmit Mode) and Back scattered echo signals (Receive Mode)
Connection to:
Active Probe via Relay board in Transmit Mode RX-128 in Receive Mode.
5-11-7-5
Fuses, Jumpers, Dip-switches and LEDs None
5-11-8
5-11-8-1
RF & Tissue Processor Board, RFT

General Description The RFT board extracts Tissue Data, Spectrum Data and IQ & Color Data from the digital data stream on its input. It also performs different types of Tissue Processing.
5-11-8-2
Front of Scanner
RFT Board
Figure 5-32 RFT Board: Location in Unit 5 - 62 Section 5-11 - Circuit Boards
Table 5-46
Input
+ 5 Vd
DC Input Voltages
Description
DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The d indicates that this voltage is used for digital circuits. DC output voltage, distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane). The a indicates that this voltage is used for analog circuits. Distributed via Mother Board (Back Plane)
Connection from:
- 5 Va GND
Input Signals
Table 5-47
Input
MLA 0 & MLA 1 VME Bus Front End Bus
Input Signals
Description
Input data stream Data communication Information about the type of data and the data sample. BEP FEC
Connection from:
5-11-8-4
Table 5-48
Output
Output Signals
Description
Clock distribution Digital Data Transfer Production Test Plug Production Test Plug Data communication BEP (via P1) BEP, SDP and IMP
Connection to:
Clock distribution Pipelink P4 P5 VME Bus
5-11-8-5
Fuses and Dip-switches None
5 - 63
5 - 64
39 1 P5
40 2
SW800 P4 12 11
Figure 5-33 RFT, LEDs and Jumpers
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-8-7 LEDs Table 5-49

LED #
LEDs on the RFT Board

LED Color
- Red - Green - Yellow - Yellow - Yellow - Red - Red - Red
Description
Board Failure Board OK DSP Runs Data Out on Pipelink Spare Clock Problems Clock Problems Clock Problems
Normally State
OFF ON BLINKING ON During Data Transfers to Pipelink OFF OFF OFF OFF
5 - 65
5-11-9
5-11-9-1
Spectrum Doppler Processor Board, SDP

General Description This board performs Spectrum Analysis on the Doppler signals and makes the velocity traces, The Doppler audio channels are generated on this board. During Duplex modes (e.g. 2D and Doppler), The Missing Signal Estimator will fill the gaps in the Doppler spectrum by stretching the real spectrum out to fill the missing time. A serial link from the Internal I/O board, feeds the A/D converted traces (like ECG, Phono and Pressure) into the SDP. These signals are sent together with the Doppler data via the Pipelink bus to the Image Port Board.
5-11-9-2
Front of Scanner
SDP Board
Figure 5-34 SPD Board: Location in Unit
5 - 66
Table 5-50
Input
+ 5 Vd

Description
Connection from:
- 5 Va GND
Input Signals
Table 5-51
Input
Pipelink
Input signals
Description
Doppler Signals extracted Analog Traces Data communication
Connection from:
RFT Board Patient I/O via Internal I/O BEP
Serial Trace Data VME Bus
5-11-9-4
Table 5-52
Input
Pipelink Audio Output VME Bus
Output Signals
Description
Doppler Signals extracted Analog Doppler (I and Q) signals to Front Panel speakers and VCR Data communication
Connection from:
RFT Board Internal I/O BEP
5-11-9-5
Fuses and Dip-switches None
5 - 67
P4 40 39 LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6 LD7
P5 12 11
2 P6 12
11
SW1 SW3
1 LD8 LD9 LD10 LD11 LD12
Figure 5-35 SDP, LEDs and Jumpers
Table 5-53
LED #
LEDs on the SDP Board

LED Color Description
Upper Batch of LEDs
Normally State
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4
- Red - Green - Yellow 0 - Yellow 1
DSP1 Status Board OK DSP1 Local SW Running DSP1 Ready for Data
OFF. ON if errors/warnings detected. ON OFF if error detected. FLASHING ON when scanning, else OFF
5 - 68

LED #
LD5 LD6 LD7
LEDs on the SDP Board

LED Color
- Yellow 2 - Yellow 3 - Yellow 4
Description
DSP1 has received data Data Out on Pipelink Audio Path OK Lower Batch of LEDs
Normally State
ON in Doppler mode, else OFF ON during data transfer to Pipelink FIFO ON in Doppler Mode and audio present.
LD8 LD9 LD10 LD11
- Red - Green - Yellow - Yellow
Board Failure Board OK DSP2 Local Software Running Audio Path OK
Normally OFF ON if errors detected Normally ON OFF if errors detected Flashing ON in Doppler Mode and audio present. OFF ON if SDP clock is out of phase with RFT clock. NOTE: If system is working and LED is ON: System OK.
LD12
- Red
Pipelink Clock Problem
5 - 69
5-11-10
5-11-10-1
Image Port 2 Board, IMP2

General Description Image Port 2 (IMP2) can capture processed data live from the scanner, or video from the VCR, and stores this data to the appropriate locations in the internal Image Memory (on-board the IMP2 board). These data will either be picked up by software running on the Backend Processor for scan converting and real time imaging, or by software for replay or history processing. The following data types can be handled: 2-D Tissue Data Doppler Data M-Mode Data Color Flow Data Trace Data Video Y-Component Data Video UV-Component Data Color M-Mode Data RF Data Video (SVideo - PAL/NTSC, CVideo - PAL/NTSC)
5-11-10-2
Front of Scanner
IMP2 Board
Figure 5-36 IMP2 Board: Location in Unit 5 - 70 Section 5-11 - Circuit Boards
Table 5-54
Input
+ 5 Vd
DC Output Voltages
Description
Connection from:
- 5 Va GND
Input Data
Table 5-55
Input
Pipelink
Video and PipeLink Input Data

Description
Live scan data Composite Video or Super VHS Video. Supported Formats:
Connection from:
SDP
Video
SVHS - PAL SVHS - NTSC PAL NTSC
VCR via Internal I/O
5-11-10-4
Outputs Data to the Backend Processor
5-11-10-5
Fuses None
5 - 71
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-10-6 Jumpers and Dip-switches
SW8
SW12
SW2 10 SW5 2 SW13 1 9 SW10
SW9
SW4
SW3
Figure 5-37 IMP2, Jumpers and Switch
5 - 72
LD1 LD2 LD3 LD4 LD5 LD6
Figure 5-38 IMP2, LEDs
Table 5-56
LED #
DL6 DL5 DL4 DL3 DL2 DL11
IMP2, LEDs
LED Color
- Red - Yellow - Yellow - Yellow - Green - Red
Description
CPU self test failure or reset CPU addressing local bus Lit when firmware empties data FIFO to Image Memory Lit when IMP2 registers/FIFOs are accessed by the local CPU Board OK Board Failure
Normally State
Normally OFF Dimmed light Dimmed light Dimmed light Normally ON Normally OFF
5 - 73
5-11-11
5-11-11-1
Backend Processor
General Description See "Back End Processor" on page 5-14.
5-11-11-2
Backend Processor
Front of Scanner
Figure 5-39 Backend Processor mounted in scanner 5-11-11-3 Inputs AC Power
Table 5-57
Input
230 VAC
AC Power
Description
AC Power
Connection from:
AC Distribution Box > Backend Processor
DC Voltages
Table 5-58
Input
+5Vstb GND
DC Input Voltages
Description
Standby voltage Electrical Ground
Connected to:
DC Power Supply via Backplane DC Power Supply via Backplane and II/ O
5 - 74
5-11-11
Backend Processor (contd)

Input Signals
Table 5-59
Input Signals
Description
Power verification signal from Card Rack Signal from the ON/OFF switch on the Control Panel and from the Reset button on the rear of the External I/O. Interrupt signal from I2C Bus Microphone signal from Monitor (Top Console)
Signal Name
PWR_OK* ON/OFF Switch I2C Register Interrupt Microphone in to BEP Audio in to BEP
Signal Path
Card Rack > IIO > PC2IO Top Console > IIO > PC2IO ON/OFF Reset (EIO) > IIO > PC2IO EIO > IIO > PC2IO Top Console > IIO > BEP Replay Audio from VCR > IIO > BEP
Audio from VCR or Doppler Audio
Doppler Audio Out from Card Rack > IIO > BEP
5-11-11-4
Bi-directional Signals Table 5-60 Bi-directional Signals

Description
Control Signals to and from the UPS Not Used Data bus used for Remote Control of External Units and for reading module versions. Not Used Control signal to Internal VCR USB bus to Top Console Not Used Modem Standard TCP/IP Ethernet USB Bus for External Units
Signal Name
UPS Control RS232 RS232 XDCTRL I2C Bus Spare RS232 VCR Remote Ctrl (RS232) USB #1 COM 1 COM 2 Ethernet USB #2
Signal Path
BEP > IIO PC2IO > IIO > Not Used PC2IO > IIO > EIO PC2IO > IIO > Not Used PC2IO > IIO > VCR PC2IO > IIO > Top Console PC2IO > IIO > EIO PC2IO > IIO > EIO (Rear of Module) > Modem BEP > IIO > EIO > External Network BEP > IIO > EIO > External USB Unit
5 - 75
5-11-11
5-11-11-5

Outputs Table 5-61 Output Signals
Description
DC Voltage DC Voltage TBD (Active Low) TBD SVideo Out Composite Color Video VGA High Resolution Video to External Video Screen VGA High Resolution Video to Internal Video Screen (Top Console) BW Video from RGB. This signal is not used on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Audio Out from BEP Video Trig Signal
Signal Name
+5VDC +12VDC PS_ON* Standby SVideo CVideo VGA VGA
Signal Path
PC2IO > IIO PC2IO > IIO PC2IO > IIO > Card Rack PC2IO > IIO > Top Console PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO BEP > Top Console PCVIC > PC2IO > IIO > EIO This signal is not used on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO BEP > IIO > Internal VCR BEP > IIO > EIO > External VCR PC2IO > IIO > EIO
BW Video RGB
Audio Out TRIG
5 - 76
5-11-11
5-11-11-6

UPS Battery The UPS batteries provide power to the Back End Processor to enable a controlled shut down of the processor.
In Line 20A Fuse

Label to be attached to this surface Spacer seperates batteries
Heat-shrink holds batteries together and insulates terminals.
Battery 1
Battery 2
Compression tape used to minimize battery pack movement while installed in chassis
Figure 5-40 Battery Block Diagram
In line 20A fuse
Figure 5-41 Battery pack The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the off condition. The off condition is defined as: Circuit Breaker in the OFF position System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position. Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 77
5-11-12
5-11-12-1
Patient I/O
General Description The Patient I/O contains the electronics for ECG, Phono and two analog inputs. One of the analog inputs has programable gain. The module extracts respiration from ECG. The patient leads can be rotated by software (i.e. it is possible to change between Lead I, II and III by pushing a button) The electronics also contains a pacemaker detector. The four inputs are separately isolated because of safety requirements.
5-11-12-2
Location in the Unit Inside the Backend Processor with the connector panel available from the front of the system.
5-11-12-3
Inputs ECG Phono Two Analog Inputs
5-11-12-4
Outputs Serial Trace Data via Internal I/O to the SPD Board
5 - 78
5-11-13
5-11-13-1
Internal I/O
General Description
Figure 5-42 The Internal I/O Module seen from the BEP Side
The Internal I/O Module distributes signals and DC Voltages from and to different parts of the system. Video and audio signals are distribution between the Backend Processor, External I/O, Top Console and peripherals. USB, Ethernet and RS232 signals are routed from the Backend Processor to the External I/O for external communication. USB signals are routed between the Backend Processor and the user interface. Serial Bus signals are routed from the Backend Processor to control VCR and UPS. Signals for power- and fan control are routed trough the module.
The module has direct board-to-board connections with the motherboard and the External I/O Module. All other connections are done via cables. Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 79
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-13-2 Location in the Unit
The Internal I/O Module is plugged into the Card Rack (at the end nearest to the rear of the system).
External I/O
Rear side of System Internal I/O Right side of System
Figure 5-43 Internal I/O: Location in the System (Seen from Right and Rear Side)
5 - 80
Table 5-62
Input
+3.3 VDC +5 VDC +10 VDC +15 VDC -15 VDC
DC Input Voltages
Description
Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage Input DC Voltage
Connection from
DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 DC Power Supply > Backplane > J32 Backend Processor > J17 Backend Processor > J17)
+6 VDC (analog) 5 VDC (analog) +5 VDC +12 VDC
Video Input Signals
Table 5-63
Input
SVGA SVHS SVHS Luma Comp. Video Comp. Video
Video Input Signals

Description
Video Signal to External I/O Video Signal to VCR & External I/O Video Signal to MBD (IMP) Video Signal to B&W Printer and External I/O Video Signal to External I/O Video Signal to MBD (IMP)
Connection from
PC2IO (Connector J16) PC2IO(Connector J16) VCR (Connector J11) PC2IO (Connector J16) PC2IO (Connector J16) Color printer
5 - 81
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-13-3 Inputs (contd) Audio Input Signals
Table 5-64
Input
Audio Input Signals

Description Connection from
MBD (IMP) VCR Audio signals, summed and distributed BEP
Two channel audio Two channel audio Two channel audio
Serial Ports
Table 5-65
Input
USB USB Ethernet RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232
Serial Ports
Description
Standard USB Serial Bus Standard USB Serial Bus Standard Ethernet Standard RS232 Serial Bus Standard RS232 Serial Bus Standard RS232 Serial Bus Standard RS232 Serial Bus
Connection from
BEPM - Top console BEPM - IEIO BEPM - IEIO BEPM COM1 - IEIO BEPM COM2 - IEIO PC2IO - Spare (J16) PC2IO - VCR (J16) PC2IO - Color printer (Connector J16) PC2IO UPS (Connector J16)
5 - 82
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-13-3 Inputs (contd) Control Signals
Table 5-66
Input
Control Signals
Description
Spare Spare To EIO To AC Power To MBD and AC Power To Relay To Top Console
Connection from
MBD/FEC (Connector J??) MBD/FEC (Connector J??) PC2IO (Connector J16) MBD (Connector J??) PC2IO (Connector J16) Top Console ON/OFF Switch and EIO Test (Connector J??) PC2IO (Connector J16)
Control signals Control signals Trace trigger Fan control signals Power control signals Power on/off Standby
5 - 83
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-13-4 Outputs DC Voltage
Table 5-67
Output
+5 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC, -5 VDC analog +5 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC, -15 VDC, -5 VDC analog +5 VDC, +15 VDC, +12 VDC +15 VDC +5 VDC +12 VDC +5 VDC, +15 VDC, -5 VDC analog +6 VDC analog
DC Output Voltages
Description
From BEP
Connection to
From Card Rack
Spare (Connector J21)
From BEP
From Card Rack
Not Used
From Card Rack From BEP From Card Rack From BEP
Not Used
Top Console
EIO From Card Rack
AUDIO
Table 5-68
Output
Audio (two channels)
Audio Outputs
Description Connection to
Top Console speakers and BEP Audio (Doppler sound) from MBD (IMP), VCR, BEP VCR and IEIO
5 - 84
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-13-4 Outputs (contd) Interface Connectors Component Side
Table 5-69
Input
A1/J1 A2/P4 A3/P5 A4/J2 A5/P4 A6/J6 A7/J7 A8/J8 A9/J9 A10/J10 A11/J11 B1/J12 B2/J13 B3/J14 B4/J15 B5/J16 B6/J17 B7/P18 B8/P19 B9/P25 J32
Connectors, Component Side

Description
B&W printer, 15pins HD-sub, female. VCR remote ctrl RS232: 9pins D-sub, male. Color printer - RS232: 9pins D-sub, male. Top Console - Power & signals: 15pins D-sub, female. Top Console - Signals: 15pins D-sub, male. Audio out to VCR, left: Phono jack. Audio out to VCR, right: Phono jack. Audio in from VCR, left: Phono jack. Audio in from VCR, right SVHS out to VCR SVHS in from VCR USB to Top console USB to external I/O Ethernet Audio I/O PC2IO signals PC2IO power COM1 COM2 UPS remote control MBD signals and power
Connection from
5 - 85
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-13-4 Outputs (contd) Table 5-70 Connectors, Solder side
Input
A12/J21 A13/J20 A14/J24 A15/P23 A16/P22 P30
Description
Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female Spare power, 15pins D-sub, female AC power ctrl, 9pins D-sub, female Rotation adapter signals, 15pins Dsub, male Spare signals, 25pins D-sub, female EIO signals and power, 110pins male
Connection from
5-11-13-5
Fuses All output voltages are fused
5-11-13-6
Jumpers and Dip-switches TBD
5-11-13-7
LEDs
Figure 5-44 Internal I/O: Green LEDs for Power Status.
5 - 86
5-11-14
5-11-14-1
External I/O
General Description The External I/O is the interface between the scanner and all external devices.
Figure 5-45 External I/O Connector Panel 5-11-14-2 Location in the Unit On the rear of the scanner, above the power inlet and power breaker. 5-11-14-3 Input Signals Table 5-71
Input
Footswitch Connector
Input Signals
Description Connection from/via/to
Footswitch is a mechanical switch that connect a signal to Footswitch > External I/O > Internal I/O ground. > PC2IO (BEP) Internal level is TTL (0-3.3V) DC Voltages from BEP
+5 VDC +12 VDC
Used for Optical Couplers on RS232 signals DC Voltages from Card Rack
PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ O
+5 VDC +15 VDC -5 VDC analog +6 VDC analog Used for Optical Couplers on Footswitch Card Rack > Internal I/O > External I/O
5 - 87
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-14-4 Bi-directional Signals Table 5-72 Bi-directional Signals
Description
Standard 10/100 Base TX Ethernet Serial RS-232 port (Not used in Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO) Standard USB (Universal Serial Bus), (0-5V)
Signal Name
Ethernet COM1 USB
Signal Path
Ethernet - External I/O - Internal I/O BEP (Ethernet Connector) External Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1) USB Device - External I/O - Internal I/O - BEP (USB #2)) Analog Phone Line - External I/O (Connector Panel) - External I/O (Rear Side)- Modem Modem - External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O - BEP (COM1) External I/O (Rear Side) - Internal I/O
Modem
Internal Modem Telephone Line Connection Serial RS-232 port (on rear side of External I/O)
COM2
Burn-in Power On/ Burn-in Power On/Off Control (on rear side of External I/O) Off Control - Used for factory testing.
5-11-14-5
Output Signals Table 5-73 Output Signals

Description
Stereo audio to external VCR. (Same signal as delivered to internal VCR).
Signal Name
Stereo Audio
Signal Path
Audio Source (Internal VCR/ Microphone/BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External VCR.
Composite Video Super Video (SVHS) Black and White video Trig SVGA Remote Expose #1 Remote Expose #2
External composite video, 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ sync negative. O > External Composite Video Device Super Video Luminance: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. Color: 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced. External black and white video 1.0Vp-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, sync negative. Trigger Signal, 0-3.3V SVGA (RGBS) high resolution video output (Same signal as sent to the systems monitor) A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals A SW controllable relay, to control external peripherals PCVIC > PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/O > External Monitor PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ O > External Peripheral PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ O > External Peripheral PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ O > External VCR PC2IO (BEP) > Internal I/O > External I/ O > External B/W Video Device
5 - 88
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-14-6 Fuses (internal in unit) 5-11-14-7 F400-403 F800-804 F200-201 F300
5-11-14-8
LEDs None
5 - 89
5-11-15
Interconnect Cabling
See Figure 5-47

TO AC INLET BOX
BEP mo
SYNC B G
Cable
Cable
Cable
#24
#25
#26
INPUT R SVIDEO VIDEO R G REMOTE 1 REMOTE 2 B SYNC Cable

Mushashi Flat panel video cable is not used
#1
RS422, I2C
Cable
SVIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO Cable
#2
RS-232C AC IN Cable
#21
TO AC BOX Cable
D5
F
D4
F
D3
F
D1 50M
D2
F
AC IN Cable
BW VIDEO IN BW VIDEO OUT REMOTE
#3
#13
TO AC INLET BOX
Cable
Cable
#13
#9
Cable
#19
Cable Cable Cable
#18
Cable
#29
#16
#10
AC IN VIDEO IN Cable Cable MIC VIDEO OUT REMOTE FOOTSWITCH RS-232C Cable LEFT INDICATOR AUDIO IN RIGHT LEFT AUDIO OUT RIGHT Cable Cable
#16
#11
#4
USB; +12PC; MIC IN; AUDIO OUT S-Video; C-Video; I2C; RS232 (X4)
MONITOR OUT
#17 #17
Cable
#5
50M
Parking conector
BACKPLANE
M F M M F F F M M F
DC POWER
AC OUT AC IN
A8 A9
2mm male connector
A6 A7
A2
A11 A10 A12

M F
A1
A3 A14
F
A4
A5
B5
B6
B7
B8
B2
B1
B3
B4
A13
F
A16
M
A15
2mm male connector
IMAGE PORT
RX-128
RELAY
TX-128
BF-64
BF-64
FEC2
RTF2
SDP
TX PWR
SVGA OUT USB S-Video OUT
DOPPLER
TO AC INLET BOX
#7
PSON; FAN SPEED CONTROL
external IO PWB
Cable
C-Video OUT BW Video OUT 10/100Base-TX
68M
#13
external IO upper PWB
Cable
Cable
BURN IN POWER ON/OFF CONTROL
#6
M
RS232 (COM1:) Audio (R) Audio (L) TRIGGER FOOTSWITCH
Cable
#13
MODEM AC TO DC CONVERTER TO AC INLET BOX
EXPOSE #1 EXPOSE #2 MODEM
See Figure 5-47
Figure 5-46 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Interconnect Cabling, (Left Part of Drawing) 5 - 90 Section 5-11 - Circuit Boards
#13
RGB OUT
OEDIV P A
O/I LANRETXE
eludoM
O/I LANRETNI
OI2CP
ME DO M
CIVCP
Cable
YLPPUS REWOP XTA
SPU
ROTINOM
AC POWER VIDEO MIC S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 I2C RS232(X4) SVGA OUT to top console POWER FROM BEP SVGA IN
ECAFRETNI RESU LENAP PO

OP PANEL I/F
AC POWER
Serial interface to/from UPS
KCARDRAC
DM098-PU YNOS RETNIRP W/B
SEBORP
DM0092-PU YNOS RETNIRP ROLOC DM0059-OVS YNOS RCV NMULOC
5Vstb
JWOL1
GND
DC POWER
IDE #1
JFP1
POWER on/off (RESET*)
#23
COM2 (Modem)
MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN
PARALLEL
10/100bT
COM1
USB2
USB1
M
5-11-15
Interconnect Cabling (contd)

See Figure 5-46
TO AC INLET BOX
BEP module
eludom ec fre e P CE
tni
AC POWER
Cable
#26
5Vstb
JWOL1
GND
DC POWER
Cable IDE #1
JFP1
#22
IDE #2
RS422, I2C
Cable
#23
Cable
#21
AC BOX
D5
F
D4
F
D3
F
D1 50M
D2
F
Cable # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
P/N: FB200789 FB200790 FB200791 FB200792 FB200793 FB200794 FB200795 FB200796 FB200797 FB200798 FB200799 FB200800 FB200802 FB200803 FB200804 070M0017 070M0018 070D2802 070D2902 070M0016 FB200851 FB200829 FB200801 FB200852 FB200836 FB200837 --FB200805 FB200748
E V IR D D RA H
tn
ita
R - DC
OEDIV P A
DRAC DNUOS
OEDIV ICP
PI2CP
IS CS
Cable
#8
Cable
#9
Cable Cable
Cable
#19 #18
Cable
#29
#10
DC POWER
AC OUT
Cable
#11
Cable
#20
XDIF
PCI BUS EXTENSION CABLE
SMORGASBOARD
USB; +12PC; MIC IN; AUDIO OUT
S-Video; C-Video; I2C; RS232 (X4)
SPARE
BMP
CFP
TD2
TD1
TD3
TD4
230Vac
INRUSH LIMIT
115Vac
L 230Vac 50M
M F M M F F F M M F
Mains switch
20Vac 115 OR 230 Vac TO PERIPHERIALS 115Vac 230 115
A6 A7
A2
A11 A10 A12

M F
A1
A3 A14
F
A4
A5
B5
B6
B7
B8
B2
B1
B3
B4 TO MONITOR
A16
M
A15
2mm male connector
Cable
#13
SVGA OUT USB
TO MODEM
230Vac
TO PC
230Vac
Fan regulator
TO CARD RACK S-Video OUT
230Vac
#7
external IO PWB
Cable
C-Video OUT BW Video OUT 10/100Base-TX Cables internal in ACCTRL module
Cable
#6
M
Cable
#13
See Figure 5-46
Figure 5-47 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Interconnect Cabling (Right Part of Drawing) Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory) 5 - 91
thgi
sv.
5 1r m p m e r oV D d D o de
51ram00
iva
ss
n ah
s ab
XOB TELNI CA
AC DISTRIBUTION PWB
KCARDRAC IHSASUM
EQ
AC IN
DRAOBREHTOM CP
DOM
,G
XOB RMFX
O/I LANRETXE
eludoM
O/I LANRETNI
OI2CP
YLPPUS REWOP XTA
ME DO M
SPU
CIVCP
RO
S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 I2C RS232(X4) SVGA OUT to top console COM2 (Modem) POWER FROM BEP RGB OUT MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN PARALLEL 10/100bT SVGA IN COM1 USB2 USB1
M
YLNO IHSA SUM
YLNO IHSA SUM

AGP SLOT
RS232 (X4) I2C RS422 PSON POK
DIGITAL OUT SPEAKER OUT MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN
PCI SLOT 4
PCI SLOT 1
PCI SLOT 2
PCI SLOT 5
PCi SLOT 3
68M
PC2IP
M
BACKPLANE
TO OUTLET
Cable
#27
#27
5-11-16
5-11-16-1
Motherboard (Back Plane)

General Description The Motherboard is the Card Racks Back Plane. It distributes DC Voltages from the DC Power to all the boards in the Card Rack and interconnects (distributes signals and data buses between) the different boards.
5-11-16-2
Location in the Unit Rear of Card Rack.
5-11-16-3
Inputs See the different boards description
5-11-16-4
Outputs See the different boards description
5-11-16-5
Fuses None
5-11-16-6
5-11-16-7
LEDs None
5 - 92
5-11-17
5-11-17-1
Modem
General Description The modem is a standard MultiTech modem that connects to an analog phone line.
5-11-17-2
Board Rack
Modem
Figure 5-48 Modem: Location in Unit 5-11-17-3 Inputs/Outputs 5-11-17-4 DC Voltage from Modem Power (AC/DC Converter) RS232 from Backend Processor via Internal I/O and External I/O Analog Phone line via External I/O
Fuses None
5-11-17-5
5 - 93
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-11-17-6 LEDs The Modem has ten LEDs on its front.
TDRD CD 56
3314OHTRECFX
Figure 5-49 LEDs on Modems Front Panel
Table 5-74
LED Color - Red - Red - Red - Red - Red - Red
LEDs on Modem
Description TD (Transmit Data) RD (Receive Data) CD (Carrier Detect) 56 (56K Mode) 33 (V.34 Mode) 14 (V.32bis Mode) Normally State Flashes during use. Flashes during use. ON when detecting a carrier from another modem and during communication. OFF indicates no or broken connection. During Power On: Briefly Flashing These LEDs indicates communication speeds above 14 kbs. If one of this LEDs are ON during communication, it will stay ON until the modem is reset or connected the next time. At speeds below 14 kbs, these LEDs are OFF. ON when dialing, online, or answering a call Flashes if puls dialing Off when modem not in use ON when the system initializes the modem. It indicates that the modem is ready for an outgoing or incoming call. OFF indicates that communication on the RS232 (COM) port has been broken. The connected (remote) modem will disconnect. ON: Error Correction (V42) is turned ON Blinking: Compression turned ON OFF: Normal operation.
- Red
OH (Off hook)
- Red
TR (Terminal Ready)
- Red
EC (Error Correction (V.42))
- Red
FX (Fax)
Always OFF
5 - 94
Section 5-12 Video Specifications

5-12-1 PAL
Table 5-75 PAL Video Specification Horizontal Timing
Horizontal Total (HT) Horizontal Start (HS) Horizontal Active (HA) Pixel Clock Freq us us us 14.7 MHz Vertical Timing (Interlaced) Vertical Start (VS) Active Lines (VA) Total Lines (VT) Frame Rate 53 Lines 944 pixels 152 pixels 768 pixels (PAL)
/ field
(=PAL standard) (=PAL standard) (=PAL standard)
Lines / frame 625 Lines
/ frame
25Hz
5-12-2
NTSC
Table 5-76 NTSC Video Specification Horizontal Timing
Horizontal Total (HT) Horizontal Start (HS) Horizontal Active (HA) Pixel Clock Freq us us us 12.272725 MHz 780 pixels 118 pixels 640 pixels (NTSC)
Vertical Timing (Interlaced)

Vertical Start (VS) Active Lines (VA) Total Lines (VT) Frame Rate 17 Lines
/ field (=NTSC standard) (=NTSC standard) (=NTSC standard)
(525 - 17) Lines / frame
525 Lines / frame

30Hz
Section 5-13 System Logs

The available logs can be viewed via the Common Service Interface, see "Error Logs" on page 7-7.
5 - 95
Section 5-14 Board Rack Cooling System

5-14-1 General Description
The Board Rack cooling system includes following components: Dust Filter Dust Filter Frame Air Inlet channel Fan Assembly
Other components that influence on the airflow is the Board Rack itself. The air is sucked in from the rear side of the system through the Filter Cover and the Filter. It passes the Fan Assembly directly into the upper part of the rear side of the Board Rack and makes a cooling air current between the Boards before it blows out against the floor. See Figure 5-50.
5-14-2

The Fan Assy is located between the Board Rack and the Filter, which can be seen on the rear side of the System.
Air inlet through Filter
Airflow through Board Rack behind Side Cover Fan Assy Air outlet under the System
Figure 5-50 Airflow through the System
5 - 96
Section 5-14 - Board Rack Cooling System
Section 5-15 Top Console Movement

5-15-1 General Description Vivid 7
(Vivid 7 PRO - see section 5-15-5 on page 5-100) The Top Console includes Monitor, Monitor Shelf, Speakers and Operator Panel. The Consoles movement backwards and forwards and to the sides is made possible by the Frogleg unit that links the Console to the rest of the System in a flexible multi movement joint. The handle (XY-release Handle) that unlocks the Frogleg, is located in the center lower side of the Front Handle. The Top Console can also be moved up and down. The handle (Z-release Handle) is located in the left grip of the Front Handle. A gas spring inside the system assists in the Z movement. It is actuated by pulling the Z-release Handle and at the same time lifting up or pushing down the Console with some pressure to assist up/down motion. A flexible harness of electrical and mechanical wires secures the connection between the Top Console and rest of the System.
5-15-2
Transportation of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO

The Console must be locked into the center (x/y) position before transporting the system as indicated on the label on the Front Handle.
OR
Figure 5-51 Label on Front Handle Chapter 5 - Components and Functions (Theory)
5 - 97
5-15-3
Monitor Monitor Shelf with Speakers
Operator Panel
Flexible harness
Extended Frogleg
Figure 5-52 Top Console, upper positions
XY-release Handle, releases Top Console for forward, backward and sideward movement,
Z-release Handle, releases Top Console for up and down movement.
Figure 5-53 Release Handles location (seen from the below the Top Console)
5 - 98
Section 5-15 - Top Console Movement
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-15-3 Location in the Unit (contd)
Top Console in low, locked position
Top Console in low, extended position
Top Console turned left
Figure 5-54 Top Console movement, forward and sideward
5 - 99
5-15-4
General Description Vivid 7 PRO

The Top Console includes Monitor, Monitor Shelf, Speakers and Operator Panel. The Console can be moved from side to side. It can be locked in center position by a mechanism located inside the Console. The handle (XY-release Handle) that open for sideway movement, is located in the center lower side of the Front Handle. The Top Console can also be moved up and down. The handle (Z-release Handle) is located in the left grip of the Front Handle. A gas spring inside the system assists in the Z movement. It is actuated by pulling the Z-release Handle and at the same time lifting up or pushing down the Console with some pressure to assist up/down motion. A flexible harness of electrical and mechanical wires secures the connection between the Top Console and rest of the System.
5-15-5
Location in the Unit Vivid 7 PRO
Figure 5-55 Vivid 7 PRO - Top Console Movement
XY-release Handle, releases Top Console for sideward movement,
Z-release Handle, releases Top Console for up and down movement.
Figure 5-56 Vivid 7 PRO Console Swivel Mechanism
5 - 100
Section 5-15 - Top Console Movement
Section 5-16 Common Service Platform

5-16-1 Introduction
The Service Platform contains a set of software modules that are common to many of GEs ultrasound and cardiology systems. This web-enabled technology provides linkage to e-Services, e-Commerce, and the iCenter, making GEs scanners more e-enabled than ever.
5-16-2
iLinq Interactive Platform Features

Many of the services of the Common Service Platform come from its integration with iLinq. The following sections contain a brief introduction of iLinqs features.
5-16-2-1
Web Server/Browser The Service platform and other Service software use the iLinq web server and browser.
5-16-2-2
Connectivity This feature provides basic connectivity between the scanner and the OnLine Center (OLC).
5-16-2-3
Configuration This feature provides the interfaces to configure various iLinq parameters.
5-16-2-4
Contact GE Allows a one-switch touch for the user to contact the OnLine Center and describe problems with their scanner in an easy and convenient way.
5-16-2-5
Interactive Application The main application is displayed in the form of HTML pages whenever the browser starts. This is the entry point for any user to start any iLinq application.
5 - 101
5-16-3
Global Service User Interface (GSUI)

GSUI is the pattern for the user interface. This interface standard will be followed by all modalities to achieve a common look-and-feel for service software across all GEMS products.
5-16-3-1
Internationalization The user interfaces provided by the service platform are designed for GE personnel and as such are in English only. At this time there is no multi-lingual capability built into the Common Service Interface.
5-16-3-2
Service Login Press the switch with the wrench icon ( ) in the status bar at the bottom of the video screen.
This switch links the user or the Field Engineer (FE) to the service login screen.
Figure 5-57 Service Login Screen
5 - 102
Section 5-16 - Common Service Platform
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 5-16-3-3 Access / Security
The service interface has different access and security user levels. Users are only granted access to the tools they are authorized to use.
Table 5-77
User Level
Operator Administrator
Access Authorization
Access Authorization
These service tools are normally used in-house and are protected with a password. Use the OnLine Center access method provided by iLinq. Access is protected with a password. Requires knowledge of a password.*
External Service GE Service
A modem on the scanner is specifically intended for iLinq use (by the user) and for InSite use. Every access request, whether successful or not, will be logged into a service access log that is viewable to authorized users. See Chapter 7 for more info about InSite and the Global Service User Interface.
5 - 103
5 - 104
Section 5-16 - Common Service Platform
Chapter 6 Service Adjustments

This section describes how to adjust the scanner.
Table 6-1
Section
6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5
Description
Overview Power Supply Adjustments Monitor Adjustments Front End Alignment Procedure Direction Lock and Brake Adjustment
Page Number
6-1 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4
Section 6-2 Power Supply Adjustments

It is not possible to adjust the power supplies on this unit.
Chapter 6 - Service Adjustments
6-1
Section 6-3 Monitor Adjustments

6-3-1 Cautions and Warnings
N/A
6-3-2
Access to Adjustments
The adjustments of the monitor is done via controls (buttons) on front of the monitor.
6-3-3
Adjustment Procedure(s)
The display monitors contrast and brightness controls may need periodic adjustment due to changes in ambient light. They are adjusted from the three buttons on the front part of the display monitor.
CONTRAST
BRIGHTNESS
Left Button
Center Button
Right Button
Figure 6-1 Adjust Contrast and Brightness
6-2
Section 6-3 - Monitor Adjustments
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 6-3-3-1 Adjust Contrast
1.) Press Left button on the display monitor once (see Figure 6-1). 2.) Press Right button to increase contrast. 3.) Press Center button to decrease contrast. The amount of contrast is shown on a slider on the screen (see Figure 6-1). 6-3-3-2 Adjust Brightness 1.) Press the Left button on the display monitor twice (see Figure 6-1). 2.) Press the Right button to increase brightness. 3.) Press the Center button to decrease brightness. The amount of brightness is shown on a slider on the screen (see Figure 6-1).
Section 6-4 Front End Alignment Procedure

6-4-1 Introduction
Front End Alignment Procedure (Beam Former Calibration Procedures) are performed to calibrate each ADC channel of the two Bean Former (BF) inputs. The system calibrates the ADC to zero output when there is no signal on the input. These bias voltages are stored in Backend Processor.
6-4-2
When to do a Front End Alignment Procedure

Do the Front End Alignment procedure; when installing a new Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO after software has been updated or replaced when BF boards have been interchanged when a BF board has been replaced when the Backend Processor has been replaced
6-4-3
Procedure
See 7-4-5 - Beamformer Calibration (Front End Alignment) starting on page 7-65.
6-3
Section 6-5 Direction Lock and Brake Adjustment

6-5-1
6-5-1-1
Front Caster Brakes Adjustment Procedure

Manpower 2 persons
6-5-1-2
Tools Hexagon key 3/32 inch Phillips screw driver size 2
6-5-1-3
Preparations 1.) Set Rear Brakes to prevent system from rolling. 2.) Remove Front Bumper as described in "Front Bumper Removal Procedure" on page 8-50.
6-5-1-4
Front Caster Brakes Adjustment
Adjustment screws
2 mm opening
Brakedog "bites"
Figure 6-2 Front Brakes adjustment 1.) Use a hexagon key, and screw the adjustment screw until the opening between brake dogs and tires are approximate 2 mm. 2.) Install Front Bumper as described in "Front Bumper Installation Procedure" on page 8-50. 3.) Test Front Brakes. 6-4 Section 6-5 - Direction Lock and Brake Adjustment
6-5-2
6-5-2-1
Direction Lock Adjustment Procedure

Manpower 1 person, 30 minutes
6-5-2-2
Tools Open end wrench, 13 mm
6-5-2-3
Preparations 1.) Block Rear Casters. 2.) Push down Direction Lock Pedal. 3.) Turn Casters until they locks in forward pointing position.
6-5-2-4
Direction Lock Adjustment 1.) Loosen the retaining nuts on the brake rods on both Front Casters to allow room for adjustment. 2.) Remove the lock pins that secures the balljoints (See Figure 6-3). 3.) Pull balljoints apart.
Brake lever
Adjustment nut Retaining nut
Lock pin
Figure 6-3 Front Caster Brake Arm and Ball Joint Parts 4.) Each part of the separated balljoint shall match each other when the brake lever on the Casters are in direction lock position, which is in left position on both Casters.
6-5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 6-5-2-4 Direction Lock Adjustment (contd) 5.) Turn adjustment nuts until the balljoints matches.
Adjustment nut Retaining nut Lock Pin
Figure 6-4 Balljoint with Lock Pin 6.) Press the balljoint together. 7.) Install the lock pins, see Figure 6-3. 8.) Fasten the retaining nuts. 9.) Test Direction Lock.
6-6
Section 6-5 - Direction Lock and Brake Adjustment
6-5-3
6-5-3-1
Rear Brakes Adjustment

Manpower 2 persons, 1 hour
6-5-3-2
Tools Hexagon key 3/32 inch Phillips screw driver size 2
6-5-3-3
Preparations 1.) Remove Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-6. 2.) Remove Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-8. 3.) Remove the Caster as described in "Rear Casters Removal Procedure" on page 8-41
6-5-3-4
Rear Brakes Adjustment 1.) Use a 3/32 inch hexagon key to adjust the brake until the space between brakedogs and tires are approximate 2 mm.
Figure 6-5 Rear Brakes adjustment 1.) Replace the Caster and tightly fasten it with four screws. 2.) Install Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-8. 3.) Install Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-6.
WARNING
Use extreme caution in the next two steps. The scanner will be unstable.
4.) Remove the Wooden Wedge. 5.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board.
6-7
6-8
Section 6-5 - Direction Lock and Brake Adjustment
Chapter 7 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
This section describes how to setup and run the tools and software that help maintain image quality and system operation. Very basic host, system and board level diagnostics are run whenever power is applied. Some Service Tools may be run at the application level.
Table 7-1
Section
7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5
Description
Overview Diagnostics Common Diagnostics Acquisition Diagnostics Troubleshooting
Page Number
7-1 7-3 7-44 7-59 7-67
7-1-2
Service Software Tools

Two major Service Software tools are available; Global Service User Interface with Common Diagnostics This software tool makes it possible for you to do tests on various functions on the Backend Processor. It also includes an acquisition test that tests most of the PCBs in the Front End Rack. If this test fails, detailed Acquisition Diagnostics tests are available via Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs software menus. Acquisition Diagnostics This software tool includes detailed Acquisition Diagnostics tests available via Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs software menus. It is running on the Backend Processor too. It includes both a Test All function that is the same test as available from the GSUI, but also tests on PCB level.
7-1-3
Special Service Tool

Test Attenuator, PN: AA200215
Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting
7-1
7-1-4
7-1-4-1
Frequently Asked Questions

Error Message(s) During Start Up Table 7-2
Error Message
Error Message(s) During Start Up

Description What to Do
If you want to keep the option(s) active, it is time to order the option(s) now. Contact your GE sales representative for more details.
This message, displayed when starting Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO, indicates that one or more of the If you dont need the option(s), you can ignore this installed options soon will expire. Typically, this will message. be the case when a demo option is about to expire. You must click OK to continue the start up of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
This message indicates that all of the installed options have expired. Typically, this will be the case when all demo options have expired.
Contact your GE sales representative for more details.
7-2
Section 7-2 Diagnostics

7-2-1 Diagnostic Procedure Summary
Two software based diagnostics tools are available on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO; Global Service User Interface (GSUI) and Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Front End System Test
To be able to use these Service Tools, the Backend Processor must be up and running to some extent. If the Backend Processor doesnt starts, its not possible to use the software service tools! A typical approach would be to first log on to the GSUI and run the tests there. If the Acquisition test fails, it is time to switch to Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Front End System Test. 7-2-1-1 List of Service Tools Available via GSUI Table 7-3 List of Service Tools Available via GSUI
Description
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Error Logs Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Diagnostics [Not Populated] [Not Populated] [Not Populated] Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Service Utilities [Not Populated] [Not Populated]
Software Tool
Error logs Diagnostics Image Quality Calibration Configuration Utilities Replacement PM
Operator
x x x -
Administra tor
x x x -
External Service
x x x -
Page Number
7-7 7-23 7-28 7-29 7-31 7-32 7-42 7-43
7-3
7-2-2
7-2-2-1
Common Service Diagnostic Interface (Ultrasound Interface)

Connect PC to the Ultrasound Unit It is not necessary to connect a PC to Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO to use the GSUI.
7-2-2-2
Log-in to GSUI Double-click the button with the wrench icon ( ) in the status bar at the bottom of the video screen. This button links the user or the Field Engineer (FE) to the Service Login Screen.
Figure 7-1 Service Login Screen Log on as External Service with password: gogems (all lowercase letters).
7-4
Section 7-2 - Diagnostics
7-2-3
Service Home Page

When the Common Service Desktop is started, the Service Home Page appears. The Home Page contains System Location, System IP Address and Application Status. The navigation bar at the top of the screen allows the user to select from several tools and applications.
NOTE:
When using the Common Service Desktop do NOT iconify any of the Common Service Desktop windows. If you iconify them they end up in the lower left-hand corner of the screen behind the Service Desktop Manager window and cannot be restored.
Figure 7-2 Service Interface Home Page
7-5
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-3-1 Menu Bar Description
On top of the Service Interface Home Page, there is a Menu Bar where you can choose between these screens, see Figure 7-3; Error Logs Diagnostics Image Quality Calibration Configuration Utilities Replacement PM Home
Figure 7-3 Service Interface Home Page Click an icon to open the respective screen.
7-2-4
Description of Screens
Each screen may include one or more "sub-screens". The next sections describes the different screens available.
7-6
7-2-5
Error Logs
From the Error Logs page the Log Viewer displays five categories with pull-down sub-menus.
Figure 7-4 Error Log Viewer Menu
7-7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-1 Logs
The sub-menus of the Logs category are System, Power, Informatics, Temperature, Probe, Board, DICOM and DCPower.
Figure 7-5 Logs Submenu
7-8
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-2 System
Select this screen to view System log. It displays all error messages from Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Figure 7-6 Example of System Error Log
7-9
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-3 Power Select this screen to view Power log.
Figure 7-7 Example of Power Log
7 - 10
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-4 Informatics Select this screen to view Informatics log.
Figure 7-8 Example of Informatics Log
7 - 11
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-5 Temperature Select this screen to view Temperature Log
Figure 7-9 Example of Temperature Log
7 - 12
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-6 Probe Select this screen to view Probe Log.
Figure 7-10 Example of Probe Log
7 - 13
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-7 Board Select this screen to view Board log.
Figure 7-11 Example of Board Log
7 - 14
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-8 DICOM Select this screen to view DICOM log.
Figure 7-12 Example of DICOM Log
7 - 15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-5-9 DCPower Select this screen to view DCPower Log Screen.
Figure 7-13 Example of DCPower Log Screen
7 - 16
7-2-6
Utilities
Figure 7-14 Utilities Category
7 - 17
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-6-1 Plot Log
Select Plot Log to make a plot of the active log on screen.
Figure 7-15 Utilities, Plot Log (example)
7 - 18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-6-2 Plot Page
Select Plot Page to make a plot of the active (log-) page on screen.
Figure 7-16 Utilities, Plot Page (example)
7 - 19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-6-3 Search
On the Text Search sub-menu of the Search category, users enter case-sensitive text they wish to search for in the logs.
Figure 7-17 Search Category
7 - 20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-6-4 Filter This function is available for GE Service only.
7 - 21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-6-5 Exit
The sub-menu, Exit Log Viewer, returns the user to the Common Service Desktop Home Page.
Figure 7-18 Exit Log Viewer Category
7 - 22
7-2-7
Diagnostics
When the Diagnostics Screen has been selected, two main tools are available; Acquisition Diagnostics Common Diagnostics, See Common Diagnostics on page 7-44.
Figure 7-19 Diagnostics Screen Home Page
7 - 23
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-7-1 Acquisition Diagnostics-Test All One test is available, Test All. Test All runs a sequential test of the following; 1.) PC2IP 2.) IMP (Image Port Board) 3.) VME (VME data bus on the Back Plane) 4.) SDP (Spectrum Doppler Processor) 5.) RFT (Radio Frequency & Tissue Board)
6.) FEC (Front End Controller Board) (Some parts of TX board is also tested) 7.) BF (Beam Former Boards) 8.) RX (Receiver Board) 9.) TXP (TX Power) NOTE: Relay Board (RLB) and Chain are not tested in this test. Some parts of the Transmitter (TX) Board is tested during the FEC Board test, but other parts of the TX Board are not tested at all.
Figure 7-20 User Interface Diagnostic Screen, Test All 7-2-7-2 Instructions Frame Displays a test-specific page or the default instructions page. 7-2-7-3 Status Frame Initially displays the last known status for the particular diagnostic. Once the diagnostic starts, the frame displays the current status of all test results.
7 - 24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-7-4 Control Frame Contains the user interface elements used for: Diagnostic control Operator feedback a.) Execute Button
This button has two modes - each with appropriate text: * * Execute - to start the diagnostic, and Abort - to stop a diagnostic
b.) Loop Count This is an editable text field that will only accept numeric values with 4 digits or less. When the button described in Execute Button step a (above) is configured as an execute button and pressed, the loop count field will be queried to determine the number of times to execute the diagnostic. c.) Progress Indicator Displays a graphical progress indicator for the user. d.) Short Text Message Displays either a starting message or aborting message, as well as the diagnostic completion status. e.) Control Frame Background Color Initially gray, the Control Frame background color changes upon completion of a diagnostic to indicate completion status. * * Fail = Red Pass = Green
7 - 25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-7-4 Control Frame (contd)
Examine the log in the status frame to find the test(s) that failed. (In the example in Figure 7-21, all the tests failed.)
Figure 7-21 User Interface Diagnostic Screen, Test All Failed
7 - 26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-7-4 Control Frame (contd)
In Figure 7-22, the test passed. The green background color in the Control Frame indicates that the test passed.
Figure 7-22 User Interface Diagnostic Screen, Test All Passed 7-2-7-5 Common Diagnostics See Common Diagnostics on page 7-44.
7 - 27
7-2-8
Image Quality
Field is not populated.
Figure 7-23 Image Quality Page
7 - 28
7-2-9
Calibration
This screen gives you access to: DC Offset calibration Reset DC-Offset cal
Figure 7-24 Calibration 7-2-9-1 DC Offset calibration DC Offset calibration also called Beamformer Calibration or "Frontend Alignment" is performed to calibrate each ADC channel of the two Beam Former (BF) board inputs. The system calibrates the Beamformer ADCs to zero output when there is no signal on the input. These bias voltages are stored on hard disk in Backend Processor. 7-2-9-2 Setup Disconnect all probes before starting the calibration. 7-2-9-3 When to Use this Procedure This procedure should be performed; when installing a new Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO after software has been updated or replaced when BF boards have been interchanged when a BF board has been replaced when the Backend Processor has been replaced
7 - 29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-9-4 DC Offset Calibration Procedure 1.) Disconnect all connected probes.
2.) Select DC Offset calibration and then click the EXECUTE button to start the DC Offset calibration of the Beam Formers. 3.) Wait for the calibration to take place. When finished, restart Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
7 - 30
7-2-10
Configuration
Use the Configuration Screen to add or edit Software Options Strings, alphanumeric strings to enable Software Options (the password(s) used for enablingen optional functions).
Figure 7-25 Configuration Page
7 - 31
7-2-11
Utilities
The Utilities page contains several miscellaneous tools: Windows 2000 Utilities Disk Usage IP Configuration Network Status Windows 2000 Services User Accounts Shared Resources System Shutdown Disk Defragmenter System Shutdown Set Debug Utility Reset Database Clean Userdefs Resource File Utility
Scanner Utilities
iLink Configuration Utility ProDiags Configuration Utility
Figure 7-26 Utilities/Tools Page (example) 7 - 32 Section 7-2 - Diagnostics
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities 1.) Disk Usage
The Disk Usage page displays an overview of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs disk usage.
Figure 7-27 Disk Usage
7 - 33
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities (contd) 2.) IP Configuration
The IP Configuration page gives you an overview of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs Internet Protocol (IP) configuration.
Figure 7-28 IP Configuration
7 - 34
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities (contd) 3.) Network Status
This screen displays all open TCP/IP Ports on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Figure 7-29 Network Status
7 - 35
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities (contd) 4.) Windows 2000 Services
This page displays a list of active Windows 2000 services. A Windows 2000 Service is a computer program that has been automatically started and is running in the background on the computer.
Figure 7-30 Windows 2000 Services
7 - 36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities (contd) 5.) User Accounts
This page lists the Users that has been given access to this Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Figure 7-31 User Accounts
7 - 37
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities (contd) 6.) Shared Resources
This screen displays all shared network resources on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Figure 7-32 Shared Resources
7 - 38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-1 Windows 2000 Utilities (contd) 7.) System Shutdown NOTE: System Shutdown is intended for use from remote computer.
This menu gives you the ability to either Restart or Shutdown the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. NOTE: Retain Disruptive Mode should be kept unchecked if you are working locally on the scanner. It must be checked if working from an external computer.
Figure 7-33 Restart or Shutdown System
7 - 39
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-2 Scanner Utilities 1.) System Shutdown See System Shutdown on page 7-39. 2.) Set Debug Utility
This function is only to be used on Request from GE Service. It is used for setting Debug Variables.
Figure 7-34 Set Debug Utility
7 - 40
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-2-11-2 Scanner Utilities (contd) 3.) Resource File Utility
From this page you can review the listed User Defined Resource File and save it to MO. View Click View to examine the User Defined Resource file on-screen. Save Click Save and navigate to the MO drive to save the User Defined Resource file.
Figure 7-35 Resource File Utility
7 - 41
7-2-12
Replacement
Figure 7-36 Part Replacement Page
7 - 42
7-2-13
PM
Figure 7-37 Planned Maintenance Page
7-2-14
Home
Click HOME to return to the Service Home Page.
7-2-15
Exit From Diagnostics

Click the X in the upper right corner of the screen to exit Diagnostics.
7 - 43
Section 7-3 Common Diagnostics

Common Diagnostics is a collection of diagnostics tools that are common for several of GE Ultrasounds products.
Figure 7-38 Common Diagnostics The Common Diagnostics folder has two sub-folders: Utilities PC Diagnostics
7 - 44
Section 7-3 - Common Diagnostics
7-3-1
Common Diagnostics - Utilities
Figure 7-39 Common Diagnostics - Utilities Utilities has two tools, both intended for use when connecting from a remote connected computer: 1.) Disruptive Mode 2.) System Shutdown
7 - 45
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-1-1 Disruptive Mode
Disruptive Mode Utility is used to enable/disable Disruptive Mode. Disruptive Mode must be used if a remote computer is used to control Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO. Example: InSite.
Figure 7-40 Common Diagnostics - Utilities - Disruptive Mode Utility 7-3-1-2 System Shutdown Intended for use from remote computer. See System Shutdown on page 7-39.
7 - 46
7-3-2
PC (Backend Processor) Diagnostics, Non-Interactive Tests

The following sub-sections outline the non-interactive BEP Diagnostic tests.
7-3-2-1
CPU Tests
Figure 7-41 CPU Tests CPU Test (All) - This diagnostic performs a battery of tests on your CPU to ensure it is working properly. The following tests are a complete list of the tests performed on the PC's CPU. CPU: Registers - The CPU registers are tested using the default test patterns defined above. On 32 bit CPUs, the extended registers are also checked. If errors are detected, the failed registers are listed. CPU: Arithmetic - Tests the proper function of arithmetic commands ADC, ADD, DEC, DIV, IDIV, IMUL, INC, MUL, SBB and SUB with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed. CPU: String Operations - Tests the proper operation of string commands LODS, MOVS, SCAS and STOS with 8, 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed commands and operands are listed. CPU: Logical Operations - Tests the proper operation of logical operations AND, NOT, OR and XOR with 16 and 32-bit operands. If errors are detected, the failed operands are listed. CPU: Math Registers - Tests coprocessor register stack, pointers and commands FLDLZ, FLDPI, FLDLN2, FLDLG2, FLDL2T, FLDL2E and FLD1. If errors are detected, the failed steps and commands are listed. CPU: Math Commands - Tests coprocessor commands FBLD/FBSTP, FLD/FST, FXCH, FCOM, FICOM, FTST, FXAM and FUCOM. If errors are detected, the failed instructions are listed.
7 - 47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-2-1 CPU Tests (contd)
CPU: Transcendental - Tests coprocessor transcendental commands F2XM1, FPATAN, FPTAN, FYL2X, FYL2XP1, FCOS, FSIN and FSINCOS. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. CPU: MMX Arithmetic - Tests MMX commands PADD, PSUB, PMUL and PMADD. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. CPU: MMX Logical - Tests MMX commands PAND, PANDN, POR and PXOR. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. CPU: MMX Shift - Tests MMX commands PSLL and PSRL. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. CPU: MMX Data Transfer - Tests MMX commands MOVD and MOVQ. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed. CPU: MMX Misc. - Tests MMX commands PCMPEQ, PCMPGT, PACKSS, PACKUS, PUNPCK and PUNPCK. If errors are detected, the failed commands are listed.
7 - 48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-2-2 Hard Drive Tests
Figure 7-42 Hard Drive Tests Hard Drive Test (All) - The Hard Drive test examines your hard disk drive using a series of tests to ensure that your drive can perform its functions. The following tests are performed on your hard drive to ensure the hard disk controller and the drive mechanism are working correctly. The disk surface itself is also checked. NOTE: The hard drive test can take over ten minutes. Hard Drive: Linear Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved from track 0 to the maximum track one track at a time. Hard Drive: Random Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved randomly several hundred times. Hard Drive: Funnel Seek - Hard disk drive heads are moved in a funnel fashion, i.e., from the first track on the drive to the last, then to the second track, then to the second to last track, then to the third track, and so on. Hard Drive: Surface Scan - This test scans for surface defects on the hard disk drive.
7 - 49
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-2-3 Memory Tests
Figure 7-43 Memory Tests Memory Test (All) - Eighteen test patterns are used to test memory locations. If errors are detected, the address of the block the error was detected in is shown. During testing, these diagnostics will also look out for parity errors and other exceptions. These will be added to the Test Log as errors if encountered. Memory: Pattern Test - The program uses several test patterns to test as much memory as possible. Memory: Parity Test - This test checks for parity errors on the memory bus during intensive string transfer operations. If an error is detected, the address of the failed block is displayed.
7 - 50
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-2-4 CD-ROM Drive Tests
Figure 7-44 CD-Rom Drive Tests CD-ROM Test (All) - The CD-ROM test examines the CD-ROM drive to make sure it is working properly. Use a data CD-ROM disk for these tests. You cannot use an audio CD, such as a regular commercial music CD, with this test.
NOTE:
The BEP is sometimes slow in recognizing a newly inserted CD-ROM disk. It is best to wait a few seconds after inserting a disk into the drive before you run any tests. There are two types of CD-ROM tests: 1.) Seek Tests: Ensures the drive can access all locations on a disk, and 2.) Read Tests: Ensures the drive can read all the data. CD-ROM: Linear Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM disk in a linear fashion, starting from the first to the last. CD-ROM: Random Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM disk randomly. CD-ROM: Funnel Seek - Tests that all locations can be accessed on a CD-ROM disk in a funnel fashion, starting from the first then moving to the last, then, at the next pass starting from the second location then moving to the next to the last, and so on CD-ROM: Linear Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM in a linear fashion, starting from the start to the end. CD-ROM: Random Read - Reads the data on the CD-ROM randomly.
7 - 51
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-2-5 Video Test
Figure 7-45 Video Tests Video Test (All) - This diagnostic tests your system's video capabilities. This involves testing the video memory with 18 patterns, testing your graphics acceleration, and text output. You will see these tests being performed on your monitor. You can cancel this test at any time by hitting the Escape (Esc) key. The following tests are performed on your monitor: Video: Memory - Video memory is tested by filling the video buffer with 18 test patterns, one pattern at a time. The tests will fill the entire screen with a single color. Video: Data Transfer - This tests the graphics acceleration part of your video controller. These tests will appear on your screen as black and white concentric squares and rectangles of various sizes and colors. If errors are detected, the locations of the problems are displayed. Video: Text Output - This test prints a text string in random sizes and colors to tests your video device driver and video controller.
7-3-2-6
PCI Board Configuration Test A bus is a set of circuits, wires or connectors which connect the various components of your system. A PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) bus is a fast standard bus which is common in Pentium systems. Various tests are run on the PCI bus in order to ensure it is working up to speed. The motherboard is scanned to verify the configuration space and to make sure the diagnostics can communicate with the board.
7 - 52
7-3-3
7-3-3-1
PC (Backend Processor) Diagnostics, Interactive Tests

Keyboard Test 1.) Double-click Keyboard Test from the PC Diagnostics interactive tests menu. 2.) Click the EXECUTE button. A keyboard layout is displayed on which you can see the keys of a standard computer keyboard. Some of these keys are missing on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Figure 7-46 Keyboard Test 3.) Press each key on your keyboard once and make sure that the corresponding keys on-screen are removed from view. If a key on-screen is not removed, that key may be damaged and you may have to have your keyboard repaired or replaced. Since some of the displayed keys are missing on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO, they cannot be removed. See Figure 7-47.
Figure 7-47 Remaining Keys On-screen After All Keyboards Keys have been Pressed 4.) To reset the keyboard, click the Reset Keys button. 5.) To exit the test, click Close.
7 - 53
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-3-2 Audio Test
1.) Double-click Audio Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu.
Figure 7-48 Sound Tests 2.) To test the WAV sound reproduction click Left Channel, Right Channel, or Both Channels to test your speakers. You should hear a guitar chord. 3.) To test MIDI sound reproduction click the button under MIDI. You should hear a few seconds of recorded music. 4.) Click on the Beep button. You should hear a low beep from your Backend Processor. (It may be difficult to hear due to noise from the fan. If no sound is produced in these tests, choose the More Info button in the Audio Test dialog box for information about possible causes and solutions.
7 - 54
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-3-3 Monitor Test
Double-click Monitor Test from the PC Diagnostic interactive tests menu.
Figure 7-49 Monitor Test The monitor test dialog box presents you with three options: Combination Test - Checks the monitor for alignment, color depth, and monitor resolution. It will put four cross-hairs in each corner, RGB (Red Green Blue) spectrum arrays and horizontal and vertical alignment bars on the screen.
NOTE:
In most cases, you will choose the Combination Test.
Figure 7-50 Monitor Test Chapter 7 - Diagnostics/Troubleshooting 7 - 55
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-3-3 Monitor Test (contd)
Solid Color Test - The solid color test is for laptop and LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel displays. This test displays solid color screens to allow you to make sure all color pixels are operating correctly. VESA (Video Electronics Standards Association) Test Patterns - The VESA test patterns checks luminance, geometry, and focus. The VESA tests are designed for professional measurement use.
7-3-3-3-1
Luminance
Figure 7-51 Monitor, VESA Test Pattern, Luminance
7 - 56
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-3-3 7-3-3-3-2 Monitor Test (contd) Geometry
Figure 7-52 Monitor, VESA Test Pattern, Geometry
7 - 57
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-3-3-3 7-3-3-3-3 Monitor Test (contd) Focus
Figure 7-53 Monitor, VESA Test Pattern, Focus
7 - 58
Section 7-4 Acquisition Diagnostics

7-4-1 System Test Diagnostics Summary
If the scanner is failing during start up or it dont start at all, please refer to 7-5-1-1 - System Doesnt Boot on page 7-67. If the scanner is running, but an error that may be a hardware failure, has been registered, then continue to read.
7-4-2
Start System Test

The Config Screen gives you access to the System Test (an automatic test). To start the System Test, switch the scanner on, see 4-2-1 - Power ON/ Boot Up on page 4-2 for specific instructions. After scanner initialization is complete, continue with the steps below; 1.) Press CONFIG on the keyboard and log on as adm to the System Config Screen. 2.) Select SYSTEM from the bottom of the menu that appears on the monitor. 3.) If not selected, click TEST.
.
Figure 7-54 System > Test Selection Screen 4.) Click GO TO SYSTEMTEST to select the Calibration/Test screen.
7 - 59
7-4-3
Beamformer Calibration
When following the steps in 7-4-2 - Start System Test on page 7-59, the default screen will be the Calibration Screen. From the Calibration Screen you can; Do DC Offset Calibration (DC Offs. Cal) of the A/D converters in the Front End. Reset the calibration (Cal. Reset) to the factory default setting. Show a graph regarding the calibration (Show graph). Deselect/Select channels are used in manufacturing to isolate noisy channels (Channel Control). With a linear probe connected to the system, it is possible to disconnect groups of channels either on the TX Board or on the RX Board to isolate the noise source. The buttons in the lower part of the screen are used for board testing (see 7-4-4 - System Test on page 7-61).
Channel Control (used for factory tests)
DC Offs. Cal Cal. Reset Show graph
LEDs Gray - Test not done Green - Test Passed Red - Test failed
Figure 7-55 Calibration Dialog
To start a test, click the respective button. The LEDs in Figure 7-55 will change color when a test has been done; Green indicates that the test passed. Red indicates that the test failed.
7 - 60
Section 7-4 - Acquisition Diagnostics
7-4-4
7-4-4-1
System Test
Select the Test Screen From the Calibration Screen, select TEST or click one of the buttons (not CAL) in the lower part of the screen. See Figure 7-56 - Select Test Window.
Press TEST or press one of these buttons
Figure 7-56 Select Test Window
The System Test Screen gives you access to the tests needed for troubleshooting the Front End Card Rack.
System: Test All, Break Test loops Mode select: Test or Calibration
Module Name etc. Block Diagram with single tests
Status Light
Module Specific Tests
Data field
Status field
Progress field
Figure 7-57 System Test Screen
7 - 61
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-4-4-2 System Test Screen Description
System Test Loops
Mode
Figure 7-58 System Test Screen, Upper Part
7-4-4-2-1
Test Loops, System Table 7-4

Field
Test loops
Test loops, System - Test All, System - Break

Key
-
Description
In some cases you may want to do the same test several times. Enter a number to indicate how many times you want the test to repeat itself. The default number is 1 (one). Use this function to start a sequence of all the tests available in the Test Screen. The diagnostic test is done in this sequence;
1.) PC2IP 2.) IMP (Image Port Board) 3.) VME (VME data bus on the Back Plane) 4.) SDP (Spectrum Doppler Processor) 5.) RFT (Radio Frequency & Tissue Board) 6.) FEC (Front End Controller Board)
System Test All
7.) BF (Beam Former Boards) 8.) RX (Receiver Board) 9.) TXP (TX Power) NOTE: Relay Board (RLB) and Chain are not tested in this test. The Transmitter Board (TX) dont have its own test, but some parts of the TX board is tested during the FEC test. If the system must be rebooted, do so. Continue with the testing from the point at which you were required to stop.
NOTE:
System
Break
If you have started a looped test, you may click BREAK to stop the test. The test will continue until the current test has finished.
7 - 62
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-4-4-2 7-4-4-2-2 System Test Screen Description (contd) Mode (Calibration/Test Screen Selection) Table 7-5
Field
Mode (Calibration/Test Screen selection)

Key Description
The buttons in this field are used to select the Calibration Screen or the Test Screen.
Mode
Calibration Test
Click this button to select the Calibration Screen. Click this button to select the Test Screen.
7-4-4-2-3
Block Schematics with Single Tests Click one of the buttons in the block schematics in the upper part of the screen (or one of the duplicate buttons in the lower row of the screen) to select a particular test. Some of the tests are described after the figure.
Block Schematics
Figure 7-59 Diagnostics Test Screen, Upper Part 7-4-4-2-4 Receiver Board (RX) Test Table 7-6 Receiver Board (RX) Test
Description
Receiver Board (RX) Activates the following tests, in sequence, see description for each sub test; Test All RX RECV.0 RECV.1
Test (Key) Sub-tests
RECV0 RECV1
Max Gain test for RX using FEC signal generator. Reduced Gain test for RX using FEC signal generator.
7 - 63
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-4-4-2 7-4-4-2-5 NOTE: System Test Screen Description (contd) Relay Board Test
A Test Attenuator, Part Number AA200215 is needed for this test.
Table 7-7
Relay Board (RLB) Test

Description
Relay Board (RLB) Activates the following tests, in sequence (see the descriptions for the tests below); Test All 1. Conn. 1 2. Conn. 2 3. Conn. 3
RLB
Conn. 1 Conn. 2 Conn. 3
Max Gain test for RX using the signal generator on the Front End Controller (FEC) and a Test Attenuator, Part Number AA200215, in left (active) probe connector. Max Gain test for RX using the signal generator on the Front End Controller (FEC) and a Test Attenuator, Part Number AA200215, in mid (active) probe connector. Max Gain test for RX using the signal generator on the Front End Controller (FEC) and a Test Attenuator, Part Number AA200215, in right probe connector.
7-4-4-2-6 NOTE:
Chain (Signal Chain, RLB/RX/BF Test) A Test Attenuator, Part Number AA200215 is needed for this test.
Table 7-8
Signal Chain (TX/RLB/RX/BF) Test

Description
Signal Chain Test (Chain) The Signal Chain/ Data Flow test checks for errors in the TX, RLY, RX and BF chain of data flow. Test All Not Used. Tests data flow in Front End Transmit Receive signal chain. If an error occurs with this test, testing should be continued in the following order; TX/RLB/RX/ 1. BF digital and analog test BF 2. RX test 3. RLY test.
Chain
7 - 64
7-4-5
Beamformer Calibration (Front End Alignment)

Beamformer Calibrations are performed to calibrate each ADC channel of the two Beam Former (BF) board inputs. The system calibrates the Beamformer ADCs to zero output when there is no signal on the input. These bias voltages are stored on hard disk in Backend Processor.
7-4-5-1
When to Use this Procedure This procedure should be performed; when installing a new Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO after software has been updated or replaced when BF boards have been interchanged when a BF board has been replaced when the Backend Processor has been replaced
7-4-5-2
Front End Alignment Procedure 1.) Disconnect all connected probes. 2.) Turn on the scanner. 3.) Press CONFIG and log in as adm 4.) Click SYSTEM
Channel Control
DC Offs. Cal Cal. Reset Show graph
Figure 7-60 Calibration Dialog
5.) Click DC OFFS. CAL to start the DC Offset calibration of the Beam Formers (Front End Alignment).
7 - 65
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-4-5-2 Front End Alignment Procedure (contd) Front End Alignment Description -
Each A/D converter will get 0V input (by setting ATGC to minimum). One by one channel will be digitized and the result put in the IQ buffer on the RFT board. The BEP will then read the IQ buffer and computes a value per channel. These computed values are compared to an upper/lower limit. If all read values are ok, the message PASSED will appear. If values exceeding the limits are read, the system will prompt you with FAILED and a message will tell you which BF board is bad. The resulting offsets for each channel are stored in a file on the Backend Processors hard disk. The values can be plotted in a diagram (click SHOW GRAPH).
6.) Always reboot the scanner after Front End Alignment is finished and verify proper operation. NOTE: Do Not select Cal Reset after performing calibration. This will destroy the file located on the Backend Processor and the image quality will not be optimized.
7 - 66
Section 7-5 Troubleshooting

7-5-1
7-5-1-1
Console Troubleshooting Trees

System Doesnt Boot This is an overall diagram showing a recommended sequence for troubleshooting a no-boot situation.
System doesnt boot!
Is the AC power cable seated to the Scanner and to the wall power outlet?
NO
YES
Connect the AC power cable between the Scanner and the wall power outlet in right way.
NO Is the main breaker turned ON?
YES
Turn ON the main breaker of the Scanner.
Has the ON/OFF key on the Control Panel been pressed once?
NO
YES
Press the ON/OFF button on the Control Panel.
Go on to the next page.
Figure 7-61 System Doesnt Boot
7 - 67
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-5-1-1 System Doesnt Boot (contd)
System doesnt boot! (contd)
The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the OFF condition 1. If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time 2, the system may not boot or may beep when turned on. When this condition occurs the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries which could take between 15 minutes and as long as 24 hours depending on the battery age, system input voltage, and system temperature. To eliminate the draining of the UPS batteries the system should remained plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
Has the unit been in OFF condition for more than three -3days?
YES
NO
1)
The OFF condition is defined as: - System unplugged from the wall outlet OR - Circuit Breaker in the OFF position.
2)
An extended period of time is defined as: Three -3- to five -5- days or more.
Do the fans start to run?
NO
Check; 1.) AC Power 2.) AC Transformer
YES
Is the BEP starting to display start-up screens on the monitor?
NO
Check/replace the BEP.
YES
Is the Vivid starting display shown on the monitor?
NO
Turn off the power, wait a few seconds, and try to turn on the power again.
Go on to the next page.
Figure 7-62 System Doesnt Boot (contd) 7 - 68 Section 7-5 - Troubleshooting
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 7-5-1-1 System Doesnt Boot (contd)
System doesnt boot! (contd)
Are the Control Panel keys lit?
NO
YES 1.) Check the Control Panel cable connection. 2.)Check/replace Control Panel.
END
Is regular scan display shown on the monitor?
NO
YES
Press and hold the main switch for five (5) seconds to reboot the system.
Go to Scan Procedure section.
Figure 7-63 System Doesnt Boot (contd)
7 - 69
7 - 70
Section 7-5 - Troubleshooting
Chapter 8 Replacement Procedures

This chapter holds replacement procedures for the following modules/subsystems.
Table 8-1
Section
8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4
Description
Overview Plastic Parts Replacement Procedures SW Loading Procedure FRU Replacement Procedures
Page Number
8-1 8-2 8-9 8-31
8-1-2
WARNING
Warnings
AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING HEAVY PARTS LIKE THE MONITOR, THE FROGLEG AND THE AC TRANSFORMER. AT LEAST TWO PERSONS ARE NEEDED WHEN REPLACING CASTERS (WHEELS) OR ADJUSTING BRAKES.
WARNING
Chapter 8 - Replacement Procedures
8-1
Section 8-2 Plastic Parts Replacement Procedures

8-2-1
8-2-1-1
Overview of Covers and Bumpers

Preparations Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5.
Front Panel
Filter Cover
Lower Rear Cover Front Bumper
Left Side Cover
Right Side Cover
Top Cover
Figure 8-1 8-2-1-2 Order of removal is: 1.) Side Covers. 2.) Filter Cover. 3.) Top Cover (fastened by screws). 4.) Lower Rear Cover (Screws).
Plastic parts
5.) Front Cover (fastened by screws at each side).
8-2
Section 8-2 - Plastic Parts Replacement Procedures
8-2-2
8-2-2-1
Side Covers Replacement Procedure

Manpower One person, 15 minutes
8-2-2-2
Tools No special tools needed
8-2-2-3
8-2-2-4
Side Covers Removal Procedure 1.) Turn two (2) recessed fasteners a quarter turn either way with a coin. They clicks loose. 2.) Take hold under the lower front side of cover and pull gently. At the same time support the rear side of the cover with the other hand. 3.) When the cover get loose in front, its easy to pull free at the rear side and move upwards.
Recessed1/4 turn fasteners
Pull front side loose first Coin
Figure 8-2 Side Covers with fastener overview.
8-3
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-2-2-4 Side Covers Removal Procedure (contd)
4.) Lift Side Cover gently upwards until the three hooks are free from Top Cover Retainer (See Figure 8-3). 5.) To Remove Left side cover, repeat this procedure. 8-2-2-5 Side Covers Installation Procedure 1.) Guide hooks at the top of Side Cover into their slots in Top Cover (See Figure 8-3). 2.) Install Side Cover. Push rear side first in position locked in Lower Rear Cover. 3.) Push the front side in position locked in Front Cover. 4.) Turn the 1/4 turn screws until the slot is vertical.
1 Side Cover hooks
Top Cover slots
Figure 8-3 Side Cover installment
8-4
8-2-3
8-2-3-1
Front Cover Replacement Procedure

8-2-3-2
Tools Phillips screwdriver
8-2-3-3
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Disconnect all Probes and I/O cabling. See User manual. 3.) Remove Side Covers as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3.
8-2-3-4
Front Cover Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew five (5) Phillips screws that fasten it to the chassis. 2.) Pull it outwards to free it from the Top Cover and Front Bumper (See Figure 8-4).
8-2-3-5
Front Cover Installation Procedure 1.) Thread the same, or a new, cover so it fits in between chassis and bumper (See Figure 8-4). 2.) Thread it so it links together with Top Cover. You may have to loosen two (2) Phillips screws on the top cover that are closest to the Front cover. 3.) Fasten Front Cover with five (5x) Phillips screws. 4.) Fasten two (2x) Phillips screws on Top Cover if these were loosened. 5.) Install Side Covers as described in "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4. 6.) New Front Cover: Install correct labels, see "Labels Locations" on page 1-14.
Screws
Screws
Figure 8-4 Front Cover Replacement
8-5
8-2-4
8-2-4-1
Filter Cover Replacement Procedure

8-2-4-2
Tools No special tools needed
8-2-4-3
Filter Cover Removal Procedure Take hold at the lower side of Filter Cover and pull it loose from the chassis. Hook it off at the upper side and remove it.
8-2-4-4
Filter Cover Installation Procedure Align the cover at the upper side and push it into place along its lower side.
Installation starts at the upper side
Filter Cover
Removal starts from the lower side
Figure 8-5 Filter Cover
8-6
8-2-5
8-2-5-1
Filter Replacement Procedure

8-2-5-2
Tools No special tools are needed
Filter Cover
Filter
Plastic plugs
Figure 8-6 Filter Cover and Filter 8-2-5-3 Filter Replacement Procedure 1.) Remove Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-6. 2.) Pull out plastic plugs and remove the filter. Two different Plastic plugs have been used, the one to the left on early Vivid 7 scanners and the type to the right on newer units (both Vivid 7 and Vivid 7 PRO). 3.) Install a new or a cleaned filter (GE Vingmed Part No: FB307903). Use plastic plugs shown to the right (GE Vingmed Part No: 080X6520)
Replace this plug
with this plug
Figure 8-7 Plug replacement 4.) Install Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-6.
8-7
8-2-6
8-2-6-1
Lower Rear Cover Replacements Procedure

8-2-6-2
Tools Phillips screwdriver size 2
8-2-6-3
8-2-6-4
Lower Rear Cover Removal Procedure 1.) Remove Filter Cover shown in "Filter Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-6. 2.) Remove both Side Covers as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 3.) Unscrew two (2) screws with magnetic lock (part number 080X1200) for Filter Cover. Left screw contains also 3 or 4 washers (080C2053), right screw 5 or 6 washers, depending on thickness of Lower Rear Cover. 4.) Unscrew four (4) remaining Phillips screws that fasten Lower Rear Cover to the chassis (See Figure 8-4). 5.) Remove Lower Rear Cover.
8-2-6-5
Lower Rear Cover Installation Procedure 1.) Align Lower Rear Cover with the chassis and fasten it with eight (8) Phillips screws. 2.) Install Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-6 and Side Covers as described in "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4. 3.) New Lower Rear Cover: Install correct label, see "Labels Locations" on page 1-14.
3 - 4 washers
5 - 6 washers Lower Rear Cover
Screws
Magnetic lock
Screws
Figure 8-8 Lower Rear Cover Fastening Locations.
8-8
Section 8-3 SW Loading Procedure

NOTICE In order to complete a successful restore of the database, the images must be moved to MO disks
before doing backup of Patient Database. If the backup procedure is not completed correctly, the images and database information could be lost.
NOTICE Do not use this procedure when upgrading a unit from BT01 to BT02 sw. level. Additional sw, not
described here, is needed for such upgrades.
8-3-1
Introduction
This procedure describes how to perform a complete installation of the software on the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PROs hard disk. This procedure is included in case it should be necessary to reinstall the present software. Before installation, moving patient images, backup of customer presets and Patient Database to MO disks, must be completed. TCP/IP addresses, computer name and software option password settings must be manually recorded. The backup procedure will move all images from the internal hard disk to a removable MO disk. It will also save the Patient Archive, Report Archive, System Configuration and User Defined Configuration to a backup MO disk.
Table 8-2
Section
8-3-1 8-3-2 8-3-3 8-3-4 8-3-5 8-3-6 8-3-7 8-3-8 8-3-9 8-3-10
Sub-sections in this Procedure

Description
Introduction Customer Provided Prerequisite Tools Provided With Unit or After a Software Upgrade Preparation Prepare MO Disks for Image Storage Move Images Prepare MO Disk for Patient Archive Backup of Patient Database and User Presets Recording of SW Option Keys, TCP/IP and Service Settings Software Installation
Page Number
8-9 8-9 8-9 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-15 8-16 8-18 8-24
8-3-2
Customer Provided Prerequisite

Formatted and labelled MO Disks for Images storage Formatted and labelled MO Disk for Patient Archive and User defined settings.
8-9
8-3-3
Tools Provided With Unit or After a Software Upgrade

Table 8-3 CDs with BT02-M4 Software, SW v.2.2.0
PART NUMBER
FC200165-04 FC200265-03
ITEM
1 2
TITLE
V7 SYSTEM SW CD, BEP-1 V7 SYSTEM SW CD, BEP-2
DESCRIPTION
Used for complete software installation Used for complete software installation Common CD for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO and EchoPAC PC
VIVID 7 & ECHOPAC PC APPL. SW
FC200220-xx
FC200220-01 is used for sw. 2.0.0 (BT02-M3) FC200220-02 is used for sw. 2.0.1 (L/R fix) FC200220-03 is used for sw. 2.1.0 (BT02-M4-1) FC200220-04 is used for sw. 2.2.0 (BT02-M4-2)
Table 8-4
ITEM TITLE
CDs with BT01 Software, SW. v.1.x.x

PART NUMBER
FC200165-01 or FC200027-02
DESCRIPTION
Used for complete software installation. - FC200165-01 is used for software v.1.0.1, v.1.1.0, v.1.1.1 and v.1.1.2 - FC200027-02 is used for software v.1.0.0 Used for update of C Drive when updating from BT01M3 to BT01-M4 - FC200090-01 is used for software v.1.0.0 - FC200090-02 is used for software v.1.0.1
Vivid 7, System SW installation CD, Disk 1 of 2
V7 SYSTEM SW UPGRADE CD
FC200168-02
Vivid 7/EchoPAC PC, Application SW Installation CD, Disk 2 of 2
- FC200090-03 is used for software v.1.1.0 FC200090-xx - FC200090-04 is used for software v.1.1.1 - FC200090-05 is used for software v.1.1.2 - FC200090-06 is used for software v.1.1.3
8 - 10
Section 8-3 - SW Loading Procedure
8-3-4
Preparation
Table 8-5 Turn the System ON
Task
Switch ON the Mains Power Circuit Breaker at the rear of the System. Mains Power Circuit Breaker on
Step
1.
Expected Result(s)
You will hear a click from the relays in the AC Power/AC Controller. The system is ready for Boot Up.
2.
1). Systems ventilation fan starts on full speed, but slows down after a few seconds (listen to the fan noise). Press ON/OFF key on the Control Panel (Keyboard) once.
.
2). Power is distributed to the peripherals, Control Panel, Monitor, Card Rack and Backend Processor. 3). Backend Processor and rest of Scanner starts with the following sequence: 4). Backend Processor is turned ON and starts to load the software. 5). The Start Screen (Vivid) is displayed on the monitor 6). A start-up bar is displayed on the monitor, indicating the progress of the software loading.
ON/OFF key
8 - 11
8-3-5
NOTE:
Prepare MO Disks for Image Storage

1.) Label the MO Disk sequentially.i.e Image 1A (Side A), Image 1B (side B), Image 2A etc. When formatting the MO disk, give it a logical name and make sure to physically label the disk. A labelling convention should be followed so that each MO disk gets a unique label. The maximum numbers of label characters allowed is 11. MO Disk Label side B must differ from side A. 2.) If the MO Disks is already formatted and labelled move to section 8-3-6 on page 8-13. 3.) Insert a MO disk, side A, into the empty MO drive. 4.) Press CONFIG (F2) on the alphanumeric Keyboard on the operator panel. 5.) From the Operator Login window select adm from the Operator pull-down menu. 6.) Select LOG ON. 7.) Select CONNECTIVITY in the Image and Analysis menu. 8.) Select TOOLS in the Connectivity menu. 9.) In the Label window, type the same name as labelled on the MO disk side A. 10.)Select FORMAT.
Figure 8-1 Prepare MO Disk - Image Storage 11.)A warning Are you sure you want to format H: and remove all data from the media appears, select OK. 12.)Wait until the information dialogue window appears on screen. 13.)Select OK to continue. 14.)Verify the disk formatting status has been updated. 15.)Press ALT-E. 16.)Select the 5 1/4 MO Disk, to eject Disk. 17.)Insert the MO disk, side B and Repeat step 9 to 16.
8 - 12
8-3-6
Move Images
The Move Images function enables the movement of archived images from one volume/media to another and the deletion of the moved images from the original volume. The pointers to the database are restored in the new volume/media. This function copies image data only, no database information is copied.
8-3-6-1
Moving Images from Local Archive to a Removable Media 1.) Insert a formatted MO Disk in the MO Drive. 2.) Press ARCHIVE on the Operator Panel.
More
Figure 8-9 Search/Create Patient Window 3.) Select MORE and press SELECT.
Move Images
Figure 8-10 Search/Create Patient Window
8 - 13
Moving Images from Local Archive to a Removable Media (contd) 4.) Select MOVE IMAGES.
Figure 8-11 The Move Images Window
5.) Adjust From date and To date to select the images from a defined time period. 6.) If necessary select the actual MO disk in the Image destination field. 7.) Check Keep days together if images from examinations performed on the same day are to be kept on the same MO disk. 8.) Press RECALCULATE. The Free disk space and Needed space information is updated. Make sure that the space needed does not exceed the space available. NOTE: If the space needed is bigger than the available space on the destination media the time period selected must be decreased by selecting an earlier date in the To date field. Press recalculate again and ensure that there is enough space. 9.) Press OK. A progress indicator is displayed. 10.)After completion, press OK. 11.)Remove MO-Disk with moved Images from MO-Drive. 12.)In case archive HD exceed MO Disk media capacity; a.) Insert a new MO-Disk. b.) Repeat step 5 through 11 as needed.
8 - 14
8-3-7
NOTE:
Prepare MO Disk for Patient Archive

A separate MO disk is required for backup of Patient Database, System Configuration and User Defined Configurations (customer presets). This MO disk must be a new disk with no images stored. 1.) Label the MO Disk sequentially.i.e Backup 1A (side A), Backup 1B (side B). 2.) If the MO Disks is already formatted and labelled move to section 8-3-8 on page 8-16
NOTE:
When formatting the MO disk, give it a logical name and make sure to physically label the disk. A labelling convention should be followed so that each MO disk gets a unique label. The maximum numbers of label characters allowed is 11. MO Disk Label side B must differ from side A. 3.) Insert a MO disk, side A, into the empty MO drive. 4.) Select CONFIG (F2) on the alphanumeric Keyboard on the operator panel. 5.) From the Operator Login window select ADM from the Operator pull-down menu. 6.) Select LOG ON. 7.) Select CONNECTIVITY in the Image and Analysis menu. 8.) Select TOOLS in the Connectivity menu. 9.) In the Label window, type the same name as labelled on the MO disk side A. 10.)Select FORMAT.
Figure 8-1 Prepare MO Disk - Patient Archive 11.)A warning Are you sure you want to format H: and remove all data from the media appears, select OK. 12.)Wait until the information dialogue window appears on screen. 13.)Select OK to continue.
8 - 15
8-3-7
Prepare MO Disk for Patient Archive (contd)

14.)Verify the disk formatting status has been updated. 15.)Press ALT-E. 16.)Select the 5 1/4 MO Disk, to eject Disk. 17.)Insert the MO disk, side B and repeat step 9 to 16.
8-3-8
Backup of Patient Database and User Presets

This procedure describes how to backup Patient database and user presets (user defined configuration). 1.) Insert a formatted MO disk prepared for Backup in the MO Drive. 2.) Go to CONFIG -> ADMIN -> BACKUP.
Backup Tab
Check Boxes
Destination Field
BACKUP NOW
ADMIN Function
Figure 8-12 The Backup Screen 3.) Select all check boxes. 4.) In the Destination field, select the MO disk from the drop-down menu. 5.) Select BACKUP NOW. A Warning will appear on the screen.
8 - 16
8-3-8
.
Backup of Patient Database and User Presets (contd)
Figure 8-13 Backup Warning NOTE: No process indicator will appear on screen. Verify that the Finished, OK Status appears in the Result column, and that the date appearing in the Last Successful Backup column is the current date and time. The backup is completed. 6.) Remove the Backup MO Disk when the backup is completed.
8 - 17
8-3-9
NOTE: 8-3-9-1
Recording of SW Option Keys, TCP/IP and Service Settings

Service Key is not required and should NOT be installed prior to Upgrade. Record SW Option Keys 1.) Select CONFIG (F2) on the alphanumeric Keyboard on the operator panel. 2.) From the Operator Login window select adm from the Operator pull-down menu. 3.) Select LOG ON. 4.) From ADMIN tab, select the SYSTEM ADMIN.
Figure 8-1 System Admin 5.) Record SW Options Keys from SW Options Key window.
WARNING
Make sure that the SW Option Keys (passwords) have been recorded correctly. If the key is incorrect, you will not be able to log on after the SW installation has been completed. The password is case sensitive. Hyphens must also be recorded. There may be more than one password.
Table 8-6 SW Options Keys
SW OPTIONS KEYS
8 - 18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-9-2 Record TCP/IP Settings 1.) Select CONNECTIVITY. 2.) Select the TCPIP tab. 3.) Record all settings in Table 8-7 on page 8-19.
Figure 8-14 TCP/IP Example Settings Table 8-7 TCPIP Settings Table
FUNCTION
Computer Name IP-Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway Remote Archive IP-Address Remote Archive Name
SETTING
8 - 19
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-9-3 Record Standard Printer IP and Port Settings 1.) Select CONNECTIVITY. 2.) Select SERVICES. 3.) Scroll down until Standard Print appears. 4.) Select Standard Print. 5.) Select OPEN.
SERVICES
Standard Print Scroll down menu
OPEN CONNECTIVITY
Figure 8-15 Choosing Standard Print 6.) Select Printer. 7.) Select Properties.
Printer
Properties
Figure 8-16 Properties 8 - 20 Section 8-3 - SW Loading Procedure
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-9-3 Record Standard Printer IP and Port Settings (contd) 8.) Select Standard TCP\IP Port. 9.) Select CONFIGURE PORT.
Standard TCP\IP Port CONFIGURE PORT
Figure 8-17 Configure Port 10.)Select and record Printer Name or IP Address in Table 8-8 on page 8-21. 11.)Select Raw. 12.)Select and record Port Number in Table 8-8 on page 8-21. Table 8-8 Printer Name or IP Address and Port Number
Printer Name or IP Address Port Number
13.)Select OK.
8 - 21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-9-3 Record Standard Printer IP and Port Settings (contd)
Printer Name or IP Adress Raw Port Number
OK
Figure 8-18 Configure Port 14.)Close rest of the Windows by selecting OK.
8 - 22
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-9-4 Record Service Settings 1.) Select SERVICE .
.
Figure 8-19 Service Settings 2.) Record Video Setting Format and VCR Type in Table 8-9 on page 8-23 . Table 8-9 Video table
Video Setting Format VCR Type
3.) Select the ABOUT tab. 4.) Record System Software version in Table 8-10 on page 8-23 . Table 8-10 System Software version.
System Software version
8 - 23
8-3-10
NOTE:
Software Installation
This software installation procedure covers both installation of BT01 software (SW.v.1.x.x) on Vivid 7 units and installation of BT02 Software (SW.v.2.x.x) on Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO units.
Table 8-11
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Models versus minimum software requirement

DESCRIPTION

FB000030 FC000060 FC000180 FC000190 FC000200 FC000210
SOFTWARE VERSION
V.1.x.x (or higher) V.1.x.x (or higher) V.2.x.x V.2.x.x V.2.x.x V.2.x.x
You can also refer to Table 8-10 on page 8-23 where you recorded the units software version.
NOTICE When this procedure starts, existing software will be erased. If backup has not been performed as
described earlier in this manual; Patient Database, System Configuration and User Configurations (customer presets) will be lost. 8-3-10-1 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO System SW Installation 1.) Insert the applicable Vivid 7 SW CD, according to Table 8-12 on page 8-24, into the CD drive. Table 8-12 System Software List
DESCRIPTION
Vivid 7 System SW CD (BT02-M4-2, BEP-2) Vivid 7 System SW CD (BT02-M4-2, BEP-1) Vivid 7 System SW Installation CD (BT01-M4)
SOFTWARE
SW. v.2.2.0 SW. v.2.1.0 SW. v.1.1.3
PART NUMBER
FC200265-03 FC200165-04 FC200165-01
2.) Power down the System as described in section 4-2-2 on page 4-5. 3.) Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel are switched off and the Power Standby Switch has turned yellow. 4.) Power ON the System as described in Table 8-5 on page 8-11. 5.) Wait for the SW Installation to be completed. (Typically installation time: 5 minutes). Status bar on the screen indicates process. 6.) You will now be prompted to remove the first CD and restart the System when the SW Installation is completed. Remove the CD, but dont restart the System this time.
8 - 24
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-10-2 Application SW Installation
1.) Insert the applicable CD labelled Vivid7 & EchoPAC PC Application SW, according to Table 8-13 on page 8-25, into the CD drive. Table 8-13 Application Software List
DESCRIPTION
Vivid7 & EchoPAC PC Application SW (BT02-M4-2) Vivid7/EchoPAC PC Application SW (BT01-M4)
SOFTWARE
SW. v.2.2.0
PART NUMBER
FC200220-04
SW. v.1.1.3
FC200090-06
2.) Hold down the power switch on the operator panel for a few seconds to power down the scanner (forced shut down). 3.) Wait until the LCDs on the Operator Panel is switched OFF and the Power Switch on the Operator Panel has turned yellow. 4.) Power ON the System as described in Table 8-5 on page 8-11. 5.) A dialogue box, called Start Application, will appear, select INSTALL SW. 6.) A dialogue box, called Startloader, will appear, select OK to continue. 7.) A dialogue box will appear, also named Startloader stating New System SW installation will start now, select OK to continue. 8.) A Command prompt window will appear, hit any key on the alphanumeric keyboard to continue 9.) A message in the Command prompt window may prompt you that copying application software takes 2 minutes. THIS WILL TAKE APPR. 5 MINUTES. 10.)Several dialogue boxes will appear on the screen during the SW load.
NOTICE Do not interrupt the SW loading at any time.
11.)Remove the CD from the CD drive when prompted. 12.)The Scanner will now power down and reboot. Verify that the command prompt window is selected.
8 - 25
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-10-3 Verify SW Key Option Settings
1.) From the alphanumeric keyboard on the Operator Panel, select CONFIG (F2 key), from the operator log in window, select adm from the pull down menu, then select LOG ON. (No password Needed). 2.) From the bottom of the configuration page select the CONNECTIVITY tab. 3.) From the lower part of the window, select the SERVICE tab.
.
Figure 8-20 Video Settings 4.) From Video Settings pull down menu, verify Format as recorded in Table 8-9 on page 8-23 . 5.) From the VCR pull down menu, verify VCR type as recorded in Table 8-9 on page 8-23 . 6.) From the top of the connectivity tab, select the TCPIP tab.
8 - 26
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-10-3 Verify SW Key Option Settings (contd)
Figure 8-21 TCP/IP Example Settings 7.) Verify that all settings on the TCPIP tab matches those recorded in Table 8-7 on page 8-19 . 8.) Select SAVE SETTINGS. 9.) Select OK to continue.
8 - 27
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-3-10-4 Restore Standard Printer IP and Port Settings 1.) Select CONNECTIVITY. 2.) Select SERVICE. 3.) Select Standard Print. 4.) Select OPEN.
SERVICE
Standard Print Scroll down to "Standard print"
OPEN CONNECTIVITY
Figure 8-22 Choosing Standard Print
8 - 28
Restore Standard Printer IP and Port Settings (contd) 5.) Select Printer. 6.) Select Properties.
Printer
Properties
Figure 8-23 Properties 7.) Select Standard TCP\IP Port. 8.) Select CONFIGURE PORT.
Standard TCP\IP Port. CONFIGURE PORT
Figure 8-24 Configure Port
8 - 29
Restore Standard Printer IP and Port Settings (contd) 9.) Verify Printer Name or IP Address as recorded in Table 8-8 on page 8-21 10.)Select Raw. 11.)Verify Port Number as recorded in Table 8-8 on page 8-21. 12.)Select OK.
Printer Name or IP Raw Port Number
OK
Figure 8-25 Configure Port 13.)Close rest of the Windows by selecting OK. 8-3-10-5 DC Offset Alignment 1.) From the upper section of the window, select TEST. 2.) Then select GO TO SYSTEM TEST. 3.) From the Module selection block, select DC OFFS. CAL. 4.) Reboot the System. 8-3-10-6 Verify System Software Version 1.) From the alphanumeric keyboard on the Operator Panel, select CONFIG (F2 key), from the operator log in window, select ADM from the pull down menu, then select LOG ON. (No password Needed). 2.) Select ABOUT tab. 3.) Verify that the SW versions is the same as what was recorded in Table 8-10 on page 8-23 . Torque wrench (available range: 12 Nm) with 5 mm hexagon bit 4.) Torque wrench with 5 mm hexagon bit to tighten the bolts to 12 Nm.
8 - 30
Section 8-4 FRU Replacement Procedures

8-4-1
8-4-1-1
AC Transformer Replacement Procedure

Manpower Two persons, 1 hour 30 minutes
8-4-1-2
Tools Phillips screwdriver size 2 Small wire nipper or blade screwdriver Metal shears or hack saw
8-4-1-3
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5.
DANGER
Dangerous voltages are present in this equipment. Completely power off and shut down the scanner before servicing.
2.) Remove Left Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 3.) Remove Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-6. 4.) Remove Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-8. 5.) Remove five (5) plastic expansion plugs that holds Ratcover. Use a small wire nipper or blade screwdriver. 6.) Turn and bend Ratcover until it can be removed. 7.) Disconnect two cables from AC transformer.
8 - 31
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-1-4 AC Transformer Removal Procedure
Screw A Ratcover
AC Transformer
Screws D, E
Cable connectors.
Screw B Old expansion plug
Screw C
Figure 8-26 AC Transformer 1.) Loosen screw A, B and C (See Figure 8-26) a few turns. Unscrew screw D and E while you hold AC Transformer to prevent it from tilting forwards. 2.) Push AC Transformer to the left, tilt it forwards to free screw keyholes from screw heads (A, B and C) and lift the transformer off hooks along its the lower inner edge. 8-4-1-5 AC Transformer Installation Procedure 1.) Hang the inner lower edge of AC Transformer in its hooks. 2.) Adjust its position so that screw keyholes matches screw heads (A,B and C). 3.) Tilt AC Transformer upwards and push it to the right, screw heads into the keyholes. 4.) Hold it steady while you fasten screw D and E. 5.) Fasten screw A, B and C. 6.) Connect two cables.
8 - 32
Section 8-4 - FRU Replacement Procedures
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-1-5 AC Transformer Installation Procedure (contd)
.
Expansion plugs
12 mm
30 mm
15 mm 40 mm
36 mm
Figure 8-27 Ratcover modification
7.) Compare Ratcover with illustration in Figure 8-27 above. If it is not already done, use a hack saw or metal shears and modify Ratcover according to this illustration. 8.) Install Ratcover. 9.) Secure Ratcover with five (5) new plastic expansion plugs, P/N 080X3141. 10.)Install Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-8. 11.)Install Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-6. 12.)Install Left Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4. 13.)Do functional check-out as described in Chapter 4.
8 - 33
8-4-2
8-4-2-1
AC Power Replacement Procedure

Manpower: One person, 1 hour.
8-4-2-2
Tools: Phillips screwdriver size 2
DANGER
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove Right Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 3.) Remove Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-6. 4.) Remove Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-8. 5.) Note Voltage type of AC Power Module being replaced (see label on rear of system).
8-4-2-3
8-4-2-4
AC Power Removal Procedure 1.) Disconnect Speed Control cable, Fan cable and Input Voltage cable. 2.) Remove four (4) screws holding AC Power. 3.) Turn AC Power Module to get better access and unplug the rest of the cables. Make sure each connector and socket are properly marked, and easy to identify during installation.
Fan Cable
Peripheral Voltage Select
Box turned for access to cabling. Screws
Speed Cable
Input Voltage cable
Figure 8-28
AC Power Module
8 - 34

DANGER
AC Power Installation Procedure
Before installing a replacement unit, verify that the power selector on the AC Power Module is set to the correct voltage for the peripherals used on the system.
1.) Connect the cables. You may need to leave the Speed Control cable and the Fan cable unconnected until you have fastened the unit. Input Voltage connector and socket are coded to prevent mistakes. In 115V system the connector matches one end of the 8-holed socket. In 230V system it matches the other end of the socket. Figure 8-29 is on a 230V system, and the connector can only be plugged in the right end of the socket. 2.) Fasten AC Power Module for correct Voltage and connect the remaining cables. 3.) Install Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-8. 4.) Install Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-6. 5.) Install Right Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4. 6.) Do functional check-out as described in Chapter 4..
8 holed socket 4 pin connector
Red blocks prevents wrong connections
Figure 8-29 Input Voltage connector/socket
8 - 35
8-4-3
8-4-3-1
DC Power Replacement Procedure

8-4-3-2
Tools 4 mm blade screwdriver.
DANGER
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove Right Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 3.) Remove Card Rack Cover. a.) Turn seven (7) quarter-turn screws to loosen Card Rack door. b.) Holding the door, lift it out of its retainers along the lower edge of Card Rack.
8-4-3-3
8-4-3-4
DC Power Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew three (3) screws as shown in Figure 8-30. 2.) Unplug PCI cable from the socket on IMP2 board. 3.) Pull the DC Power a little to get access to power cables. 4.) Remove retaining clasp and unplug Power Cable and HV Cable. 5.) Remove DC Power.
DC power cable IMP2 Board
Screws
HV power cable
DC Power
PCI cable
Figure 8-30 DC Power and Cabling.
8 - 36
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-3-5 DC Power Installation Procedure 1.) Slide DC Power module into its guides.
2.) Plug in HV cable and Power cable and secure Power cable with the retaining clasp. 3.) Push DC Power module gently in position. 4.) Fasten three (3) screws. 5.) Connect PCI cable to IMP2 Board. 6.) Install Right Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4. 7.) Install Card Rack Cover. 8.) Do functional check-out as described in chapter 4.
DC power cable IMP2 Board
Screws
HV power cable
DC Power
PCI cable
Figure 8-31 DC Power and Cabling.
8 - 37
8-4-4
8-4-4-1
TX Power Replacement Procedure

Manpower: One person, 30 minutes
8-4-4-2
Tools: Phillips screwdriver 2 4 mm blade screwdriver
DANGER
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove Right Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 3.) Remove the Card Rack Door. a.) Turn seven (7) quarter-turn screws to loosen Card Rack door. b.) Holding the door, lift it out of its retainers along the lower edge of Card Rack. 4.) Disconnect PCI cable from IMP2 Board shown in Figure 8-32.
.
8-4-4-3
IMP2 Board Retaining clasp DC power cable
DC Power
HV power cable
PCI cable
TX Power
Screws TX Power
Figure 8-32 DC Power, TX Power and Cabling.
8 - 38
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-4-4 TX Power Removal Procedure 1.) Remove retaining clasp from DC Power connector. 2.) Unplug DC Power and TX Power. 3.) Unscrew two (2) screws in front of TX Power. 4.) Push cables aside and pull out TX Power from its socket. 8-4-4-5 TX Power Installation Procedure 1.) Push cables aside and install TX Power. 2.) Fasten two (2) screws.
3.) Connect DC Power and secure the connector with retaining clasp. 4.) Connect TX Power. 5.) Connect PCI cable to IMP2 Board. 6.) Install Right Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 7.) Install Card Rack Cover.
8 - 39
8-4-5
8-4-5-1
Rear Casters Replacement Procedure

Manpower 2 persons, 30 minutes (one Caster)
8-4-5-2
Tools Phillips screwdriver size 2 5 mm hexagon key Bevel Edged Board and Wooden Wedge (both included in package with replacement Casters)
Wooden Wedge
Bevel Edged Board
Figure 8-33 Bevel Edged Board and Wooden Wedge. 8-4-5-3 Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove the Side Covers as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3. 3.) Remove Filter Cover As described in "Filter Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-6. 4.) Remove Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-8.
8 - 40
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-5-4 Rear Casters Removal Procedure 1.) Turn Front Casters as shown in Figure 8-34. 2.) Activate Direction Lock. 3.) Put the bevel-edged board on the floor.
WARNING
Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest position. Use extreme caution as long as VIVID 7 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
4.) Pull the system backwards up the board incline. This will lift the Rear Wheel on the opposite side of the System from the floor.
WARNING
Figure 8-34 Pull system backwards up the board incline
8 - 41
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-5-4 Rear Casters Removal Procedure (contd)
5.) Activate the brakes on all Casters, except the one you intend to replace. 6.) Turn the Rear Caster that stands on the Bevel Edged Board in the direction as shown in Figure 8-35.
Figure 8-35 Activate Rear Brakes 7.) The system is now nearly balanced between one Front and one Rear Caster (illustrated in this Procedure; Left Front and Right Rear). 8.) Make the System rest on both Front Casters and lift the Rear Caster. Put the Wooden Wedge under the AC Transformer. This will stabilize the System with the Rear Caster free from the floor.
Wooden Wedge under AC Transformer
Rear Wheel free from the floor
Figure 8-36 System stabilized with Rear Caster free from the floor
8 - 42
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-5-4 Rear Casters Removal Procedure (contd)
Screws
Figure 8-37 Rear Caster fastening 9.) Remove four (4x) screws fastening Caster. 10.)Remove Caster
8 - 43
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-5-5 Rear Casters Installation Procedure
1.) Replace the Caster and tightly fasten it with four (4x) screws.
WARNING
Use extreme caution in the next two steps. The scanner is unstable.
2.) Remove the Wooden Wedge. 3.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board. 4.) To replace the other Rear Caster, repeat all the steps from "Rear Casters Removal Procedure" on page 8-41, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of the system. 5.) Install Lower Rear Cover as described in "Lower Rear Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-8. 6.) Install Filter Cover as described in "Filter Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-6. 7.) Install Side Covers as described in "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4.
8 - 44
8-4-6
8-4-6-1
Front Casters Replacement Procedure

Manpower 1 persons, 30 minutes per Caster
8-4-6-2
Tools Torx screwdriver T-20 Open end wrenches, 10 mm and 134 mm 5 mm hexagon key Bevel Edged Board and Wooden Wedge (included in package with replacement Casters)
Wooden Wedge
Bevel Edged Board
Figure 8-38 Bevel Edged Board and Wooden Wedge. 8-4-6-3 Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove the Front Bumper as described in "Front Bumper Removal Procedure" on page 8-50. 3.) Turn Front Casters as shown in Figure 8-39. 4.) Activate Direction Lock. 5.) Put the Bevel Edged Board on the floor.
8 - 45

WARNING
Front Casters Removal Procedure
Prior to elevating scanner, verify that the floating keyboard is locked in its lowest position. Use extreme caution as long as VIVID 7 is un-stable, not resting on all four Casters.
6.) Pull the system backwards up the board incline.
WARNING
Figure 8-39 Pull system backwards up the board incline 7.) Turn the Rear Caster on the board in the direction as shown in Figure 8-40. 8.) Activate both Rear Brakes as shown in Figure 8-40.
Figure 8-40 Activate both rear brakes
8 - 46
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-6-4 Front Casters Removal Procedure (contd)
9.) Put the Wooden Wedge under the Card Rack. This will stabilize the System with the right Front Wheel free from the floor.
.
Figure 8-41 System stabilized with front wheel free from the floor
8 - 47
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-6-4 Front Casters Removal Procedure (contd) 10.)Remove the lock pin that secures the balljoint. 11.)Pull balljoint apart.
Brake lever
Adjustment nut Retaining nut
Lock pin
Figure 8-42 Front Caster Brake Arm and Ball Joint Parts
.
Screws
Screws
Screws
Screws
Figure 8-43 Caster fastening (both Casters shown) 12.)Unscrew four (4x) screws. 13.)Remove the Caster.
8 - 48
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-6-5 Front Casters Installation Procedure
1.) Move the ball piece of the joint from old Caster to new Caster (See Figure 8-42). 2.) Align new Caster on the frame and fasten it tightly with four (4x) hexagon screws. 3.) Press the balljoint together and install the lock pin (See Figure 8-42). 4.) To replace the other Front Caster, repeat all the steps from "Front Casters Removal Procedure" on page 8-46, but now using the Bevel Edged board and the Wooden Wedge on the other side of the system. 5.) Install Bumper and Covers as described in "Front Bumper Installation Procedure" on page 8-50. 6.) Roll the system off the Bevel Edged Board.
8 - 49
8-4-7
8-4-7-1
Front Bumper Replacement Procedure

8-4-7-2
Tools Phillips size 2 Torx screwdriver T-20
8-4-7-3
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove Front Cover as described in "Front Cover Removal Procedure" on page 8-5.
8-4-7-4
Front Bumper Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew 4 Torx screws under the bumper. 2.) Lift the bumper off.
8-4-7-5
Front Bumper Installation Procedure 1.) Put the new bumper in position. 2.) Fasten the 4 screws.
NOTE:
Gentle. Don't use power. 3.) Install Front Cover as described in "Front Cover Installation Procedure" on page 8-5.
Front Bumper
Screw holes
Figure 8-44 System front and Front Bumper
8 - 50
8-4-8
8-4-8-1
Brake Pedal Replacement Procedure

8-4-8-2
Tools Torx screwdriver T-20
8-4-8-3
Brake Pedal Replacement Procedure 1.) Unscrew 4 screws under the pedal. 2.) Replace the pedal with a new one. 3.) Fasten 4 screws.
Brake Pedal
Figure 8-45 Brake Pedal
8 - 51
8-4-9
8-4-9-1
Direction Lock Pedal Replacement Procedure

8-4-9-2
Tools Torx screwdriver T-20
8-4-9-3
Direction Lock Replacement Procedure 1.) Unscrew 4 screws, 3 under and 1 at the left side of the pedal. 2.) Replace the pedal with a new one. 3.) Fasten 4 screws.
Direction Lock Pedal
Figure 8-46 Direction Lock Pedal
8 - 52
8-4-10
8-4-10-1
Brake Pedal and Direction Lock Assembly Replacement Procedures

Manpower One person, 1 hour
8-4-10-2
Tools Phillips screwdriver size 2 Hexagon key 5 mm Torx screwdriver T-20 Wrench 11 and 13 mm
8-4-10-3
Preparations 1.) Remove Front Bumper as described in "Front Bumper Removal Procedure" on page 8-50. 2.) Remove footrests on both pedals by unscrewing 4 Torx screws on each.
Ball joint nuts
Hexagon screws
Figure 8-47 Brake Assembly 8-4-10-4 Brake pedal and Direction Lock Removal Procedure 1.) Unscrew 2 nuts on the two ball joints on the brake rods, located over the middle of brake assembly. Wrench 11 and 13. 2.) Unscrew the 4 hexagon screws. Two of them located under the Brake Assembly. NOTE: The nuts may slide out of position. 3.) Remove the Brake Pedal and Direction Lock Assembly. 8-4-10-5 Brake pedal and Direction Lock Installation procedure 1.) Put the Brake Pedal and Direction Lock Assembly in position and fasten the 4 hexagon screws loosely in the sliding nuts. 2.) Fasten the ball joint nuts before tightening the 4 hexagon screws. 3.) Install Front Bumper as described in "Front Bumper Installation Procedure" on page 8-50. 4.) Fasten footrests to Brake Pedal and Direction Lock Assembly. Fasten the screws gently.
8 - 53
8-4-11
8-4-11-1
Power Supply Battery Pack Replacement Procedure

Tools Phillips screwdriver 2
8-4-11-2
Manpower One person, 1 hour
8-4-11-3
Preparations 1.) Shut down the system as described in "Power Shut Down" on page 4-5. 2.) Remove Left Side Cover as described in "Side Covers Removal Procedure" on page 8-3.
8-4-11-4
Power Supply Battery Pack Removal Procedure 1.) Remove Backend Processor Cover. 2.) Remove the four screws from Power Supply Battery Pack cover plate. 3.) Disconnect Battery Pack connection wire. 4.) Remove Power Supply Battery Pack from Backend Processor.
Phillips screws
Battery Pack
Figure 8-48 Power Supply Battery Pack
8 - 54
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 8-4-11-5 Power Supply Battery Pack Installation Procedure
In Line 20A Fuse

Label to be attached to this surface Spacer seperates batteries
Heat-shrink holds batteries together and insulates terminals.
Battery 1
Battery 2
Compression tape used to minimize battery pack movement while installed in chassis
Figure 8-49 Battery Pack Block Diagram 1.) Slide the new Power Supply Battery Pack into its position in Backend Processor. 2.) Connect Battery Pack to power supply connector.
CAUTION The battery pack contains a 24V charge that will cause a spark when it is re-connected to the
power supply. Be careful that this spark does not damage any equipment or cause any personal injury.
3.) Attach Power Supply Battery Pack cover plate and secure it with the four screws. 4.) Install Backend Processor Cover. 5.) Install Side Cover "Side Covers Installation Procedure" on page 8-4 6.) Boot-up the system. 7.) Do a functional check-out by turning off power by the mains circuit breaker at the AC Power module at the rear of the System. - The Battery Pack provides BEP with power to a proper shut down, which takes some seconds. The UPS batteries will drain slightly when the system is in the Off Condition. The Off Condition is defined as: Circuit Breaker in the OFF position System unplugged from the wall outlet
If the system is left in the OFF condition for an extended period of time (3 to 5 days or more), the system may not boot up or may beep when turned ON. Should this occur, the system needs to recharge the UPS batteries. This could take 15 minutes to as long as 24 hours, depending on the battery age, system input voltage and system temperature. To eliminate draining the UPS batteries, the system should remain plugged into the wall outlet with the circuit breaker in the ON position.
8 - 55
8 - 56
Chapter 9 Renewal Parts

This chapter gives you an overview of Spare Parts for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO.
Table 9-1
SECTION
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-11 9-12 9-14 9-13 9-15 9-17 9-16 9-18 9-19 9-20 9-21 9-23
DESCRIPTION
Overview List of Abbreviations Parts List Groups Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front Plastic Parts, Airduct Cover and Cover Boxes Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear Control Panel Parts Monitor Input /Output Modules PCB Boards Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg Brake Assembly and Console Lock Electrical Part Cables Backend Processor Probes Peripherals Software Options Kits Accessory Box, Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Packing Parts for Reshipment
PAGE NUMBER
9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-8 9-9 9-10 9-12 9-13 9-23 9-14 9-24 9-28 9-25 9-29 9-30 9-31 9-34 9-37
Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts
9-1
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 9-1-1-1 Equipment Models Covered in this Chapter Table 9-2
Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Models Covered in this Manual

DESCRIPTION

FB000030 FC000060 FC000180 FC000190 FC000200 FC000210
VOLTAGE
Section 9-2 List of Abbreviations

Table 9-3 List of Abbreviations
DESCRIPTION
Assembly Back End Processor Control Front End Processor Flock of Birds or 3-D Option (Not available on this scanner) Replacement part available in parts hub Replacement part available from the manufacturer (lead time involved) Non stock part Liquid Crystal Display Internal Input/Output Personal Computer (Back End Processor) Power Supply Printed Wire Assembly Quantity used per scanner Transformer
ABBREVIATIONS
Assy BEP Ctrl FEP F.O.B. FRU 1 FRU 2 FRU N LCD Int I/O PC PS PWA QTY XFRMR
9-2
Section 9-3 Parts List Groups

Table 9-4
TABLE NO.
Table 9-5 Table 9-6 Table 9-7 Table 9-8 Table 9-10 Table 9-11 Table 9-12 Table 9-13 Table 9-14 Table 9-15 Table 9-16 Table 9-17 Table 9-18 Table 9-19 Table 9-20 Table 9-21 Table 9-22 Table 9-23 Table 9-24 Table 9-26 Table 9-29 Table 9-30
Parts List Groups

DESCRIPTION
Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front Plastic Parts, Airduct Cover and Cover Boxes Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear Operator Panel Parts I/0s, Transformer Box, AC Power and AC Controller PCB Boards Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg Mechanical Parts, Brake Assembly and Console Lock Power Cables ECG Cables Signal Cables Fan Assembly Backend Processor Parts Printers On Board Network Printers VCRs used for Vivid 7/Vivid 7 PRO Footswitch Modem Supported Probes and SW Versions Software used on BT01 Options - Vivid 7, BT01 Kits, Overview
PAGE NUMBER
9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 9-9 9-11 9-12 9-13 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-23 9-24 9-25 9-25 9-25 9-26 9-27 9-28 9-29 9-30 9-31
9-3
Section 9-4 Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front
7 5 2 1 10 12 6 9 13 11 8 3
Figure 9-1 Plastic Parts, Front View of Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
Table 9-5
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front

PART NUMBER
FB307293 FB307294 FC200131 FB307307 FB307308 FB307405 FB307313 FB307407 Pedal lock pad. Below Control Panel
PART NAME
PROBEHOLDER, LEFT PROBEHOLDER, RIGHT HANDLE, MAIN SHELF COVER, UNDERSHELF COVER, UNDER CUP, GEL PEDAL, LOCK
DESCRIPTION
Probe Holder, Left Probe Holder, Right Common Front Handle with Label.
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1
FRU
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1
9 10 11
PEDAL, DIRECTIONLOCK COVER, TOP BUMPER FOOTREST
FB307409 FB307383 FB307387
Pedal direction lock pad.
1 1 1
1 1 1
9-4
Section 9-4 - Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front

ITEM
12 13
Plastic Parts, Console, Top and Front (continued)

PART NUMBER
FC200183 FC200076
PART NAME
COLUMN COVERS KIT COVER, FRONT
DESCRIPTION
(Same as FC200088)
QTY
1 1
FRU
1 2
Section 9-5 Plastic Parts, Airduct Cover and Cover Boxes
Figure 9-2 Plastic parts, Airduct Cover and Cover boxes
Table 9-6
ITEM
1 2 3
Plastic Parts, Airduct Cover and Cover Boxes

PART NUMBER
FB307988 FB307989 FB307990
PART NAME
COVER BOX, VCR COVER BOX B/W-PRINTER COVER BOX COLOR PRINTER
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1
FRU
1 1 1
9-5
Section 9-6 Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear
6 5 4
Figure 9-3 Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear.
Table 9-7
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5 6
Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear

PART NUMBER
FC200073 FC200074 FC200077 FB200385 FB307903 FB307406
PART NAME
COVER LEFT SIDE WITH BUMPER COVER RIGHT SIDE WITH BUMPER COVER REAR WITH BUMPER COVER, FILTER FILTER BLOCK (DUST FILTER) HANDLE, REAR W/ CABLE HOOKS
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1
FRU
1 1 1 1 1 1
9-6
Section 9-6 - Plastic Parts, Covers and Bumpers, Left, Right and Rear
Section 9-7 Control Panel Parts
2 Figure 9-4 Operator Panel Parts
Table 9-8
ITEM
1
Operator Panel Parts

PART NUMBER
FA200920 See Below 066E1101 066E1102 066E1107 066E1108 066E1111 066E1112 See Below 066E1201 066E1202 066E1203 066E1204 066E1205 066E1206 066E1207 066E1208 066E1209 066E1210 066E1211 066E1212 066E1213 2188902-5 English
PART NAME
OPERATOR PANEL - ENGLISH QUERTY KEYBOARD [language] QUERTY KEYBOARD UNIVERSAL QUERTY KEYBOARD FRENCH
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
FRU
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1
QUERTY KEYBOARD SWEDISH QUERTY KEYBOARD NORWEGIAN QUERTY KEYBOARD RUSSIAN QUERTY KEYBOARD GREEK KEYPADS [language] FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS ENGLISH FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS FRENCH FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS GERMAN FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS SPANISH FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS PORTUG. FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS ITALIAN FOR OP-PANEL
3 KEYPADS SWEDISH FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS NORWEG. FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS DANISH FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS DUTCH FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS RUSSIAN FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS GREEK FOR OP-PANEL KEYPADS TURKISH FOR OP-PANEL 4 Trackball
9-7
Section 9-8 Monitor
5
Logo Label
6 2 4 Figure 9-5 Monitor Assembly
Table 9-9
ITEM
1 2 3 4
Monitor Parts
PART NUMBER
2283334 2304171 2303930 2303932 (Without speakers) ( This assembly contains different logo labels.
PART NAME
OPEN FRAME MONITOR 17" MONITOR CABLE KIT MONITOR REAR COVER ASSEMBLY MONITOR SCREW CAPS
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1 2
FRU
1 1 2 2
MONITOR FRONT BEZEL ASSEMBLY
2303929
- Please choose the appropriate one and attach it to the Monitor Front Bezel. - Discard the other labels. (
MONITOR SWITCH ASSEMBLY
2297050
9-8
Section 9-7 - Control Panel Parts
Section 9-9 Input /Output Modules
2 4
3 Figure 9-6 I/0s, Transformer Box, AC Power and AC Controller
Table 9-10
ITEM
1 2 3
I/0s, Transformer Box, AC Power and AC Controller

PART NUMBER
FB200197 FB200198 FB200581 See below See below For Field Service use. Replaces FB200724 on 100-120 VAC Systems. 1 For Field Service use. Replaces FB200724 on 220-240 VAC Systems. 1
PART NAME
INTERNAL I/O BOARD COMPLETE EXTERNAL I/O BOARD COMPLETE TRANSFORMER BOX COMPLETE AC POWER [voltage]
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1
FRU
1 1 2
AC POWER 100-120V 4
FC200079
AC POWER 220-240V
FC200081
9-9
Section 9-10 PCB Boards
12 10 3 5 4 1
9 7 11
6 2
Figure 9-7 PCB Boards 9 - 10 Section 9-10 - PCB Boards
Section 9-10
Table 9-11
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5 6
PCB Boards (contd)

PCB Boards
PART NUMBER
FA200945 FB200060 FB200140 FB200158 FB200165 FB200170 FC200022 FB200574 FB200831 FB200865 FB200900 FB200991 FB200957
PART NAME
POWER SUPPLY DC RLY-3 PCB RF TISSUE PCB XDBUS-2 PCB FEC-II PCB TX-128-2 PCB TX-128-3
DESCRIPTION
DC Power Supply Relay PCB, version 3 Radio Frequency & Tissue PCB Transducer Bus PCB, version 2 Front End Controller PCB, version 2 Transmitter 128 PCB, version 2
QTY
1 1 1 2 1 1
FRU
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Transmitter 128 PCB, version 3 Transmitter PS Switched Mode Receiver PCB, version 3B Spectrum Doppler Processor PCB Beam Former PCB Image Port PCB, version 2B 1 1 1 2 1 1
7 8 9 10 11 12
Power, TX PCB RX-128-3B PCB SDP PCB BF64 PCB IMP-2B RACK W/ MOTHERBOARD
9 - 11
Section 9-11 Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg
4 1
2 Figure 9-8 Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg
Table 9-12
ITEM
1
Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg

PART NUMBER
2293008-2
PART NAME
CASTER FRONT
DESCRIPTION
Front Caster without Swivel Lock Assembly.
QTY
2
FRU
1
CASTER REAR FROGLEG, COMPLETE (Vivid 7)
2293008-3 FB200340 FC200186 FB200957
Rear Caster with Swivel Lock Assembly.
2 1
1 N 2 1
3 CASTING COMPLETE (VIVID 7 PRO) 4 RACK W/ MOTHERBOARD Casting Complete 1 1
9 - 12
Section 9-11 - Mechanical Parts, Rack, Casters and Frogleg
Section 9-12 Brake Assembly and Console Lock
4 5
Figure 9-9 Mechanical Parts, Brake Assembly and Console Lock
Table 9-13
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5 6
Mechanical Parts, Brake Assembly and Console Lock

PART NUMBER
FB200350 FB200920 FB200595 FB307296 FB307297 FB307375 Wire used when operating vertical movement of Top Console Brake Pedal Assembly
PART NAME
COMMON TOP CONSOLE LOCK ASSY RELEASE LOCK PEDAL ASSEMBLY HANDLE, Z-RELEASE HANDLE, XY-RELEASE WIRECABLE
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1 1 1 1 1
FRU
2 2 1 2 2 2
9 - 13
Section 9-13 Cables
See Figure 9-11

TO AC INLET BOX
BEP mo
SYNC B G
Cable
Cable
Cable
#24
#25
#26
INPUT R SVIDEO VIDEO R G REMOTE 1 REMOTE 2 B SYNC Cable

Mushashi Flat panel video cable is not used
#1
RS422, I2C
Cable
SVIDEO OUTPUT VIDEO Cable
#2
RS-232C AC IN Cable
#21
TO AC BOX Cable
D5
F
D4
F
D3
F
D1 50M
D2
F
AC IN Cable
BW VIDEO IN BW VIDEO OUT REMOTE
#3
#13
TO AC INLET BOX
Cable
Cable
#13
#9
Cable
#19
Cable Cable Cable
#18
Cable
#29
#16
#10
AC IN VIDEO IN Cable Cable MIC VIDEO OUT REMOTE FOOTSWITCH RS-232C Cable LEFT INDICATOR AUDIO IN RIGHT LEFT AUDIO OUT RIGHT Cable Cable
#16
#11
#4
USB; +12PC; MIC IN; AUDIO OUT S-Video; C-Video; I2C; RS232 (X4)
MONITOR OUT
#17 #17
Cable
#5
50M
Parking conector
BACKPLANE
M F M M F F F M M F
DC POWER
AC OUT AC IN
A8 A9
2mm male connector
A6 A7
A2
A11 A10 A12

M F
A1
A3 A14
F
A4
A5
B5
B6
B7
B8
B2
B1
B3
B4
A13
F
A16
M
A15
2mm male connector
IMAGE PORT
RX-128
RELAY
TX-128
BF-64
BF-64
FEC2
RTF2
SDP
TX PWR
SVGA OUT USB S-Video OUT
DOPPLER
TO AC INLET BOX
#7
external IO PWB
Cable
C-Video OUT BW Video OUT 10/100Base-TX
68M
#13
Cable
Cable
#6
M
Cable
#13
See Figure 9-11
9 - 14
Figure 9-10 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Interconnect Cabling, (Left Part of Drawing) Section 9-13 - Cables
#13
RGB OUT
OEDIV P A
O/I LANRETXE
eludoM
O/I LANRETNI
OI2CP
ME DO M
CIVCP
Cable
YLPPUS REWOP XTA
SPU
ROTINOM
AC POWER VIDEO MIC S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 I2C RS232(X4) SVGA OUT to top console POWER FROM BEP SVGA IN
ECAFRETNI RESU LENAP PO

OP PANEL I/F
AC POWER
KCARDRAC
DM098-PU YNOS RETNIRP W/B
SEBORP
DM0092-PU YNOS RETNIRP ROLOC DM0059-OVS YNOS RCV NMULOC
5Vstb
JWOL1
GND
DC POWER
IDE #1
JFP1
#23
COM2 (Modem)
MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN
PARALLEL
10/100bT
COM1
USB2
USB1
M
Section 9-13
Cables (contd)
See Figure 9-10

TO AC INLET BOX
BEP module
eludom ec fre e P CE
tni
AC POWER
Cable
#26
5Vstb
JWOL1
GND
DC POWER
Cable IDE #1
JFP1
#22
IDE #2
RS422, I2C
Cable
#23
Cable
#21
AC BOX
D5
F
D4
F
D3
F
D1 50M
D2
F
Cable # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29
P/N: FB200789 FB200790 FB200791 FB200792 FB200793 FB200794 FB200795 FB200796 FB200797 FB200798 FB200799 FB200800 FB200802 FB200803 FB200804 070M0017 070M0018 070D2802 070D2902 070M0016 FB200851 FB200829 FB200801 FB200852 FB200836 FB200837 --FB200805 FB200748
E V IR D D RA H
tn
ita
R - DC
OEDIV P A
DRAC DNUOS
OEDIV ICP
PI2CP
IS CS
Cable
#8
Cable
#9
Cable Cable
Cable
#19 #18
Cable
#29
#10
DC POWER
AC OUT
Cable
#11
Cable
#20
XDIF
PCI BUS EXTENSION CABLE
SMORGASBOARD
USB; +12PC; MIC IN; AUDIO OUT
S-Video; C-Video; I2C; RS232 (X4)
SPARE
BMP
CFP
TD1
TD2
TD3
TD4
230Vac
INRUSH LIMIT
115Vac
L 230Vac 50M
M F M M F F F M M F
Mains switch
20Vac 115 OR 230 Vac TO PERIPHERIALS 115Vac 230 115
A6 A7
A2
A11 A10 A12

M F
A1
A3 A14
F
A4
A5
B5
B6
B7
B8
B2
B1
B3
B4 TO MONITOR
A16
M
A15
2mm male connector
Cable
#13
SVGA OUT USB
TO MODEM
230Vac
TO PC
230Vac
Fan regulator
TO CARD RACK S-Video OUT
230Vac
#7
external IO PWB
Cable
C-Video OUT BW Video OUT 10/100Base-TX Cables internal in ACCTRL module
Cable
#6
M
Cable
#13
See Figure 9-10
Figure 9-11 Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Interconnect Cabling (Right Part of Drawing) Chapter 9 - Renewal Parts 9 - 15
thgi
sv.
5 1r m p m e r oV D d D o de
51ram00
iva
ss
n ah
s ab
XOB TELNI CA
AC DISTRIBUTION PWB
KCARDRAC IHSASUM
EQ
AC IN
DRAOBREHTOM CP
DOM
,G
XOB RMFX
O/I LANRETXE
eludoM
O/I LANRETNI
OI2CP
YLPPUS REWOP XTA
ME DO M
SPU
CIVCP
RO
S/C VIDEO OUT SVGA OUT 2 I2C RS232(X4) SVGA OUT to top console COM2 (Modem) POWER FROM BEP RGB OUT MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN PARALLEL 10/100bT SVGA IN COM1 USB2 USB1
M
YLNO IHSA SUM
YLNO IHSA SUM

AGP SLOT
RS232 (X4) I2C RS422 PSON POK
DIGITAL OUT SPEAKER OUT MIC IN LINE OUT LINE IN
PCI SLOT 4
PCI SLOT 1
PCI SLOT 2
PCI SLOT 5
PCi SLOT 3
68M
PC2IP
M
BACKPLANE
TO OUTLET
Cable
#27
#27
Section 9-13
Cables (contd)
IIIO Top Consol

J2(4) J1(3) J2(5)
TC_ON_SW0
+5VPC
PC2IO
J17(4) J17(5) J2(4) J2(5)
TC_ON_SW1
I2C register
Rack Power
J17(13) J17(12)
J2(13) J2(12)
J36(e6) RPWONN
IEIO
RPWISON
J36(e5)
J24(5)
DC-Power
PWR_OK PS_ON*
Burn in power on/off

M
1 5
MotherBoard
RESET
Figure 9-12 Scanner Power Wiring, Left Part of Drawing
9 - 16
Section 9-13 - Cables
Section 9-13
Cables (contd)
ATX motherboard
VPC
PC2IO
J17(4) J17(5) J2(4) J2(5) P10(1) P10(2) GND (black)
I2C register
+5VSB
JWOL1 pin 1
RESET* (blue)
J17(13) J17(12)
J2(13) J2(12)
P9(27) P9(26)
P2(27) P2(26) PLD
PC2IP
J36(e6) RPWONN
RPWISON
J36(e5)
DC-Power
PWR_OK PS_ON*
therBoard
AC Ctrl
g
DESIGNER CHECKED
MODULE
PROJECT
GE Vingmed UltrasoundIDUNN top level

DATE SIGN TYPE OF DOC.
IDUNN
CLASIFICATION
DV/MLH S
APPROVED
10nov2000
DATE SIGN
Wiring Diagram
DRAWING NUMBER REV
SIGN
10nov2000
DATE
DS
SCALE
10nov2000
FILE
FA004808
SHEET
02
2
OF
N/A
C:\w\work\Idunn\harness-map\Idunn-wire-diagram.vsd
Figure 9-13 Scanner Power Wiring, Right Part of Drawing
9 - 17
Section 9-13
Table 9-14
ITEM
1
Cables (contd)
Power Cables
PART NUMBER
070C3194
PART NAME
CABLE POWER 220V AC PLUG EU
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1
FRU
1
CABLE POWER 110 V AC, PLUG US
070C3193
CABLES, AC-POWER
FB200802 ACT-M1 to ACP-F6
CABLE, AC MAINS 1
FB200803
ACT-M2 to ACP-F7 5 CABLE, AC MAINS 2 FB200804 1 1
Table 9-15
ITEM
ECG Cables
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION QTY FRU
PART NAME
CABLE ECG MARQ. AHA/AMERICA
164L0025
CABLE ECG MARQ. IEC / EU + AS
164L0026
9 - 18

ITEM
ECG Cables (continued)

PART NAME
LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. AHA/ AMERICA
164L0027
LEADWIRES ECG MARQ. IEC/EU+AS
164L0028
Table 9-16
ITEM
Signal Cables
PART NAME
CABLE, USB A-B
070D2802
CABLE, ETHERNET CAT-5
070D2902
9 - 19

ITEM
Signal Cables (continued)

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
BEP-PCI slot to Card Rack-IP Module
PART NAME
QTY
FRU
CABLE PCI, AMP 974298
070M0016
IIO-A10 to VCR IN 4 CABLE S-VIDEO 1 FC200041 1 1
IIO-A11 to VCR OUT 5 CABLE S-VIDEO 2 FC200042 1 1
IIO-A6/A7 to VCR IN CH1(L)/CH2(R)
CABLE PHONO 1
FC200043
IIO-A8/A9 to VCR OUT CH1(L)/CH2(R) 7 CABLE PHONO 2 FC200044 1 1
Top Console and Monitor to IIO, AC ctrl, BEP and Gas Spring
CABLE, CONSOLE, ASSY COMPLETE
FB200320
9 - 20

ITEM
9

PART NUMBER
FB200836
PART NAME
CABLE, MONITOR VGA
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1
FRU
1
10
CABLE, MONITOR POWER
FB200837
IIO-B4 to BEP-AUD
11
CABLE, AUDIO INTERNAL I/O-PC
FB200748
IIO-A3 to Color Printer (RS232)
12
CABLE, COLOR PRINTER CTRL.
FB200790
BEP-D5 to RGB Color Printer
13
CABLE COLOR PRINTER VIDEO
FB200789
IIO-A1 to BW/Color Printer
14
CABLE BW/CP PRINTER
FB200791
Cable VCR remote Controller IIO-A2 to VCR 15 CABLE VCR REMOTE CTRL. FB200792 1 1
Doppler Connector to FEP-G1 16 CABLE, DOPPLER FB200793 1 1
9 - 21

ITEM

PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION
Modem to EIO-L2
PART NAME
QTY
FRU
17
CABLE, STD. MODEM
FB200794
EIO-L3 to Modem 18 Modem Line Cable FC200032 1 ?
Cable, Fan Speed Controller. IIO-A15 to ACP-F8 19 CABLE, FAN SPEED CTRL. FB200795 1 1
BEP-C13 to BEP-D3 20 CABLE, MON. STD. FB200796 1 1
IIO-C6 to BEP-C6 or IIO-B8 to BEP-C7 21 CABLE, RS232 COM 1/2 FB200797 1 1
Cable, Power/Controller. Internal I/O-PC2IO IIO-B6 to BEP-D2 22 CABLE POWER/CTRL INT I/O PC2 I/O FB200798 1 1
Cable, Signals Internal I/O-PC2IO BEP-D1 to IIO-B5 23 CABLE, SIGNALS INT I/O-PC2IO FB200799 1 1
9 - 22
Section 9-14 Electrical Part
Figure 9-14 Fan Assembly
Table 9-17
ITEM
1
Fan Assembly
PART NUMBER
FB200580
PART NAME
FAN ASSEMBLY COMPLETE
DESCRIPTION
FAN ASSEMBLY COMPLETE
QTY
1
FRU
1
9 - 23
Section 9-15 Backend Processor
2 3
1 Figure 9-15 Backend Processor Parts
Table 9-18
ITEM
Backend Processor Parts

PART NUMBER
See Below 2266548 2266548-2 066E0676
PART NAME
BEP (BACKEND PROCESSOR)
DESCRIPTION
See Below Backend Processor without Magneto Optical Drive Backend Processor Complete, with 9.1 GB, 5 1/4 Magneto Optical Drive
QTY
FRU
BEP WITHOUT MO DRIVE BEP WITH MO DRIVE
MO DRIVE, 9,1 GB
BATTERY ASSY FOR PC / BEP
2266548-5
9 - 24
Section 9-15 - Backend Processor
Section 9-16 Peripherals

9-16-1 Printers On Board
Table 9-19
ITEM
1 2 3
Printers On Board
PART NUMBER
2288502 066E2955 066E2950
PART NAME
SONY UP-895MDW SONY UP21MD SONY UP2950MD
DESCRIPTION
SONY B/W PRINTER COLOR PRINTER UP21MD ASSEMBLY PRINTER UP-2950MD (INCL.MAN) 100-220V, NTSC/PAL
QTY
1 1 1
FRU
1 1 1
9-16-2
Network Printers
Table 9-20 Network Printers
PART NUMBER
066E0383 066E0384 EP100422 EP100423
ITEM
1 2 3 4
PART NAME
Epson 980N Epson 980N HP DESKJET 990 CXI, 110V PC HP DESKJET 990 CXI, 230V PC
DESCRIPTION
USB & Network printer 110V USB & Network printer 220V Network Printer Network Printer
QTY
FRU
N
N 1 1
9-16-3
Video Cassette Recorder (VCR)

Table 9-21 VCRs used for Vivid 7/Vivid 7 PRO
PART NUMBER
066E9510 066E9511 066E0836 066E0835
ITEM
1 2 3 4
PART NAME
SONY SVO9500MDP2 SONY SVO9500MD PANASONICS AG-MD835E PANASONICS AG-MD835P
DESCRIPTION
SUPER-VHS, PAL Needs software v.2.0 (BT02) SUPER-VHS, NTSC Needs software v.2.0 (BT02) SUPER-VHS, PAL SUPER-VHS, NTSC
QTY
FRU
1 1 1 1
9 - 25
9-16-4
Footswitch
Table 9-22 Footswitch
Part Number
FB200952
ITEM
1
Part Name
Footswitch
Description
FOOTSWITCH 3-PEDALS IP68
QTY
1
FRU
2
9 - 26
Section 9-16 - Peripherals
9-16-5
Modem
Figure 9-16 Modem with AC Converter and Cables
Table 9-23
ITEM
1
Modem
PART NUMBER
2245794
PART NAME
MODEM (MULTITECH) NEW GLOBAL
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1
FRU
1
9 - 27
Section 9-17 Probes

Table 9-24 Supported Probes and SW Versions
SUPPORTED MODELS & SW VERSION NAME BT-01 BT-02 BT-02 PRO
PROBES
SECTOR 3S (Probe, Sector 3S) 3S, Comfort Scan Probe M3s (Probe, AMA Sector M3s) 5S (Probe, Sector 5S) 7S (Probe, Sector 7S) 10S (Probe, Sector 10S) PAMPTE 6T (Probe, TEE 6T) 8T (Probe, TEE 8T)
PART NUMBER
2252157 2323337 2295649 2290751 2263669 2298589
3S PROBE, L500 3S COMFORTSCAN PROBE 2295649 M3S AMA SECT. 5S SECTOR TRANSDUCER 7S PROBE 10 S SECTOR TRANSDUCER
BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x ----------BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
KN100022 KN100023
KN100022 6T TEE PROBE KN100023 8T PED.TEE PROBE
LINEAR & CONVEX & OTHERS 7L (Probe, Linear 7L) 10L (Probe, Linear 10L) 12L (Probe, Linear 12L) M12L 3.5 C (Probe, Convex 3C) 5C (Probe, Convex 5C) i13L E8C PENCIL P2D Pencil Probe P6D Pencil Probe TE100024 TQ100002 TE100024 PENCIL PROBE 2D TQ100002 PENCIL PROBE 6D BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x 2294521 2294523 2295377 2294511 2296158 2294516 KW100011 2294641 7L PROBE TYPE (EXP) 10L PROBE TYPE (EXP) 12L PROBE TYPE (EXP) M12L MIH PROBE 3.5C CONVEX TRANSDUCER 5C PROBE TYPE (EXP) KW011 I13L INTRAOP.PROBE E8C PROBE BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x ----------BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x BT-01 SW ver. 1.x.x --------------------BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x BT-02 SW VER. 2.x.x
9 - 28
Section 9-17 - Probes
Section 9-18 Software

Table 9-25
ITEM
1 2 3
Software used on BT02

PART NUMBER
FC200265 FC200165 FC200220
PART NAME
Vivid 7, System SW CD, BEP-2 Vivid 7, System SW CD, BEP-1 Application CD
DESCRIPTION
Vivid 7/Vivid 7 PRO, System SW installation CD, Disk 1 of 2. (Ghost CD) Vivid 7/Vivid 7 PRO, System SW installation CD, Disk 1 of 2. (Ghost CD) Application SW Installation CD, Disk 2 of 2
QTY
1 1 1
FRU
2 2 2
Table 9-26
ITEM
1 2
Software used on BT01

PART NUMBER
FC200165 FC200090
PART NAME
VIVID 7 SYSTEM SW CD v.1.1.x Application CD v.1.x.x
DESCRIPTION
Ghost CD with support for HP DESKJET 990 CXI network printer Application SW Installation CD, Disk 2 of 2
QTY
1 1
FRU
2 2
9 - 29
Section 9-19 Options

Table 9-27
ITEM
1 2 3 4
Options - Vivid 7 PRO, BT02

PART NUMBER
FC200162 FB200839 FB200849 FC200164 (DICOM via network)
PART NAME
Contrast Stress Dicom QAnalysis
DESCRIPTION
QTY
-
FRU
-
Table 9-28
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5 6
Options - Vivid 7, BT02

PART NUMBER
FC200162 FB200839 FB200849 FC200163 FC200171 FC200164 (DICOM via network)
PART NAME
Contrast Stress Dicom Strain Strain Japan QAnalysis
DESCRIPTION
QTY
-
FRU
-
Table 9-29
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5
Options - Vivid 7, BT01

PART NUMBER
FB200842 FB200839 FB200841 FB200838 FB200849 (Dicom via network)
PART NAME
Contrast Stress Tissue Tracking Archive Dicom
DESCRIPTION
QTY
-
FRU
-
9 - 30
Section 9-19 - Options
Section 9-20 Kits

Table 9-30
Item
1 2 3
Kits, Overview
PART NUMBER
FC200086 FC200183 2188902-8
PART NAME
BUMPER KIT FROGLEG COLUMN COVER KIT KNOB KIT
DESCRIPTION
BUMPER KIT, FROGLEG COLUMN COVER KIT (Same as FC200088) ROUND KNOBS ON OPERATOR PANEL
QTY
1 1 1
FRU
1 1 1
9 - 31
9-20-1
Parts Lists for Bumper Kit, Frogleg (Vivid 7 ONLY)
Figure 9-17 Bumper Kit, Frogleg, Base Seen From Above
Table 9-31
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5
Bumper Kit, Frogleg

PART NUMBER
-
PART NAME
BUMPER CRASH PAD BUMPER INNER BOSS BUMPER RIGHT FROGLEG BUMPER LEFT FROGLEG BUMPER INNER BOSS CRASH
DESCRIPTION
Bumper Crash Rear -
QTY
1 1 1 1 2
FRU
N N N N N
9 - 32
Section 9-20 - Kits
9-20-2
Parts Lists for Column Cover Kit

Table 9-32 Column Cover Kit
PART NUMBER
-
ITEM
1 2
PART NAME
Cover, Column, Lower Cover, Column, Upper
DESCRIPTION
-
QTY
1 1
FRU
N N
9 - 33
Section 9-21 Accessory Box, Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO
Figure 9-18 Accessory Box, Vivid 7/Vivid 7 PRO
Table 9-33
ITEM
1 2
Accessory Box, Vivid 7/Vivid 7 PRO

PART NUMBER
FC200038 FC200037
NAME
ACCESSORY BOX, VIVID 7, US ACCESSORY BOX, VIVID 7, EUR.
DESCRIPTION
QTY
1 1
FRU
N N
Table 9-34
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5
Vivid 7 Accessory Box Contents (also used for Vivid 7 PRO)

PART NUMBER
FC091194 098B2001 066E0519 164L0026 164L0028
NAME
Vivid 7 Service Manual, English Gel Ultrasound Bluescan MO Disk Cable ECG Marquette IEC Leadwires ECG Marquette IEC
DESCRIPTION
This manual Bottle Optional All countries except USA All countries except USA
QTY
1 1 1 1 1
FRU
N N N N N
9 - 34
Section 9-21 - Accessory Box, Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO

ITEM
6 7 8 9 10
Vivid 7 Accessory Box Contents (also used for Vivid 7 PRO) (continued)
PART NUMBER
070C3194 164L0025 164L0027 070C3193 FC093202 FB092820 FB092821 FB092822 FB092823 FB092824 FB092825 FB092866 FB092867 FB092868 FB092869 FB092870 FB092871 FB092872 FB092873 FB092874 FB092875 FB092877 FB092958 FB092888
NAME
Power Cable Cable ECG Marquette AHA Leadwires ECG Marquette AHA Power Cable Vivid 7 PRO User Manual Update User Manual, Vivid 7, English User Manual, Vivid 7, German User Manual, Vivid 7, French User Manual, Vivid 7, Italian User Manual, Vivid 7, Spanish User Manual, Vivid 7, Portuguese User Manual, Vivid 7, Swedish User Manual, Vivid 7, Norwegian
DESCRIPTION
All countries except USA USA only USA only USA only Multi-language (Not needed for English V7USER MAN) V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN. V7 USER MAN V7 REFERENCE MAN As Required
QTY
1 1 1 1 1
FRU
N N N N N N N N N N N N N
11
User Manual, Vivid 7, Danish User Manual, Vivid 7, Dutch User Manual, Vivid 7, Greek User Manual, Vivid 7, Russian User Manual, Vivid 7, Turkish User Manual, Vivid 7, Japanese User Manual, Vivid 7, Chinese User Manual, Vivid 7, Polish User Manual, Vivid 7, Hungarian User Manual, Vivid 7, Finnish
N N N N N N N N N N
12 13
Reference Manual Volume 2 Probe User Manual(s)
N N
9 - 35
Section 9-22 Accessory Box, SERVICE V7, US

Table 9-35
ITEM
1
Accessory Box, SERVICE V7, US, Part Number FC200111

PART NUMBER
FB092820 FC200229 FB092888 098B2001 066E0519 164L0025 164L0027 070C3193
NAME
VIVID7 USER MANUAL, ENGLISH V7 SYSTEM- AND APPL. SW CDs
DESCRIPTION
Covers both Vivid 7 and Vivid 7 PRO
QTY
1
FRU
N
- V7 SYSTEM SW CD - V7 SYSTEM SW UPGRADE CD - VIVID 7 & ECHOPAC PC APPL. SW VIVID7 USER REFER. MANUAL VOL2 GEL ULTRASOUND BLUESCAN DISK FOR MO-DRIVE 5.2 GB CABLE ECG MARQUETTE AHA LEADWIRES ECG MARQUETTE AHA CABLE MAINS 3,5M 3*1.90MM2
Part of FC200229 Part of FC200229 Part of FC200229
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 1 1 1 1 1
N N N N N N
9 - 36
Section 9-22 - Accessory Box, SERVICE V7, US
Section 9-23 Packing Parts for Reshipment
5 2 9 3 6
1 4 7
8 Figure 9-19 Packing Material
Table 9-36
ITEM
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Packing Material for Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO Reshipment

PART NUMBER
N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A To wrap around the unit Re-shipping: Re-use the original wooden box and other packing materials used for shipment
DESCRIPTION
Rear Stop Bumper Front Stop Bumper Front Panel Reinforcement Shelf Reinforcement Wedge Monitor Reinforcement Pink plate Wooden Shelf Wooden box Plastic Foil
COMMENTS
9 - 37
9 - 38
Section 9-23 - Packing Parts for Reshipment
Chapter 10 Periodic Maintenance

This chapter describes Periodic Maintenance (PM) on the scanner and its peripherals. These PM procedures are intended to maintain the quality of the ultrasound systems performance. Read this chapter completely and familiarize yourself with the procedures before starting a PM.
Table 10-1
Section
10-1 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-5 10-6 10-7 10-8
Description
Overview Why do Periodic Maintenance Periodic Maintenance Schedule Tools Required System Periodic Maintenance Using a Phantom Electrical Safety Tests When There's Too Much Leakage Current... PM Inspection Certificate
Page Number
10-1 10-2 10-2 10-4 10-5 10-10 10-10 10-23 10-29
CAUTION Practice good ESD prevention. Wear an antistatic strap when handling electronic parts and
even when disconnecting/connecting cables.
DANGER
THERE ARE SEVERAL PLACES ON THE BACKPLANE, THE AC DISTRIBUTION, AND DC DISTRIBUTION THAT ARE DANGEROUS. BE SURE TO DISCONNECT THE SYSTEM POWER PLUG AND OPEN THE MAIN CIRCUIT BREAKER BEFORE YOU REMOVE ANY PARTS. BE CAUTIOUS WHENEVER POWER IS STILL ON AND COVERS ARE REMOVED.
CAUTION Do not pull out or insert circuit boards while power is ON. CAUTION Do not operate this unit unless all board covers and frame panels are securely in place. System
performance and cooling require this.
Chapter 10 - Periodic Maintenance
10 - 1
Section 10-2 Why do Periodic Maintenance

10-2-1 Keeping Records
It is good business practice that ultrasound facilities maintain records of periodic and corrective maintenance. The Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate provides the customer with documentation that the ultrasound scanner is maintained on a periodic basis. A copy of the Ultrasound Periodic Maintenance Inspection Certificate should be kept in the same room or near the scanner.
10-2-2
Quality Assurance
In order to gain accreditation from organizations such as the American College of Radiology (USA), it is the customers responsibility to have a quality assurance program in place for each scanner. The program must be directed by a medical physicists, the supervising radiologist/physician or appropriate designee. Routine quality control testing must occur regularly. The same tests are performed during each period so that changes can be monitored over time and effective corrective action can be taken. Testing results, corrective action and the effects of corrective action must be documented and maintained on the site. Your GE service representative can help you with establishing, performing and maintaining records for a quality assurance program.
Section 10-3 Periodic Maintenance Schedule

10-3-1 How often should PMs be performed?
The Periodic Maintenance Schedule specifies how often your Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO should be serviced and what items need attention. It is the customers responsibility to ensure the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO periodic maintenance is performed as scheduled in order to retain its high level of safety, dependability and performance. Your GE Service Representative knows your Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO best and can provide competent, efficient service. Please contact us for further information and to schedule GE Medical Systems Ultrasound to perform this service for you. The services and intervals shown in the maintenance schedule assumes that you use your Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO for an average patient load (10-12 per day) and not use it as a primary mobile unit which is transported between diagnostic facilities. If conditions exist which exceed typical usage and patient load, then it is recommended to increase the periodic maintenance frequencies.
10 - 2
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 . Table 10-2

Service at Indicated Time
Clean Probes Clean Probe Holders Clean Air Filter Inspect AC Mains Cable Inspect Cables and Connectors Clean Console Clean Monitor and Touch Panel Inspect Wheels, Casters, brakes and Swivel Locks Check Control Panel Movement
Periodic Maintenance Schedule

Daily Weekly Monthly Annually Notes
* or before each use
more frequently depending on your environment Mobile Unit Check Weekly
Mobile Unit Check Daily Mobile Unit Check Daily also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program
Console Leakage Current Checks
Peripheral Leakage Current Checks
Surface Probe Leakage Current Checks
Endocavity Probe Leakage Current Checks Transesphongeal Probe Leakage Current Checks Surgical Probe Leakage Current Checks
Twice Annually As Prescribed in probe manual As Prescribed in probe manual

also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program also after corrective maintenance or as required by your facilities QA program
Measurement Accuracy Checks
Probe/Phantom Checks
Functional Checks
10 - 3
Section 10-4 Tools Required
10-4-1
10-4-1-1
Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment

Specific Requirements for Periodic Maintenance See Chapter 7
Table 10-3
Tool
Digital Volt Meter (DVM)
Overview of Requirements for Periodic Maintenance

Part Number Comments
46194427P231 46194427P279 Anti Static Kit 46194427P369 46194427P373 46194427P370 Anti Static Vacuum Cleaner Air Filter Safety Analyzer SVHS VCR Cassette SVHS VCR Head Cleaner E8381AA 3.5 MOD MEDIA E8381AB 46285652G1 E7010GG E7010GF 46194427P278 46194427P279
Kit includes antistatic mat, wrist strap and cables for 200 to 240 V system 3M #2204 Large adjustable wrist strap 3M #2214 Small adjustable wrist strap 3M #3051 conductive ground cord 120V 230V air intake DALE 600 KIT (or equivalent) for electrical tests 60 minute 120 minute See VCR user manual for requirements blank 128 M disk blank 230 M disk
3.5 MOD Media Cleaner 3.5 MOD Head Cleaner Kit QIQ Phantom B/W Printer Cleaning Sheet Color Printer Cleaning Sheet Disposable Gloves
2117811 2148392 E8370RB
cleans the diskettes cleans the drive heads RMI Grayscale Target Model 403GS See printer user manual for requirements See printer user manual for requirements
10 - 4
Section 10-4 - Tools Required
Section 10-5 System Periodic Maintenance

10-5-1 Preliminary Checks
The preliminary checks take about 15 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
Table 10-4
Step
1 2 3 4 5 6
System Preliminary Checks

Description
Item
Ask & Listen Paperwork Power up Probes Displays Presets
Ask the customer if they have any problems or questions about the equipment. Fill in the top of the Periodic Maintenance (PM) Inspection Certificate. Note all probes and system options. Turn the system power on and verify that all fans and peripherals turn on. Watch the displays during power up to verify that no warning or error messages are displayed. Verify that the system properly recognizes all probes. Verify proper display on the monitor and touch panel. Backup all customer presets on a CD-R.
10 - 5
10-5-2
Functional Checks (See Also Chapter 4)

The functional checks take about 60 minutes to perform. Refer to the system user documentation whenever necessary.
10-5-2-1
System Checks Table 10-5 System Functional Checks

Description
Verify basic B-Mode (2D) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic CF-Mode (Color Flow Mode) operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic Doppler operation (PW and CW if available). Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation. Verify basic M-Mode operation. Check the basic system controls that affect this mode of operation.
Check
Step
B-Mode CF-Mode Doppler Modes M-Mode
*Applicable Verify the basic operation of all optional modes such as Multi-Image, Contrast, Harmonics, Cine, Software Options Stress Echo,... etc. Check the basic system controls that affect each options operation. Probe Elements System Diagnostic Perform an Element Test, see section 7-4-3 on page 7-60, on each probe to verify that all probe elements (and system channels) are functional. Perform the Automatic Tests, see section Section 7-4 on page 7-59, to verify that all boards function according to specifications.
Perform the Control Panel Test Procedure, see section 7-3-3-1 on page 7-53, to verify that all Control Panel Test keyboard controls are OK. This is performed by the internal PC (backend processor) which does a normal keyboard run through. Monitor Touch Panel Measurements Verify basic Monitor display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Verify basic Touch Panel display functions. Refer to Chapter 3 of the User Manual. Scan a gray scale phantom and use the measurement controls to verify distance and area calculation accuracy. Refer to the User Manual, Chapter 18, for measurement accuracy specifications.
NOTE:
* Some software may be considered standard depending upon system model configuration.
10 - 6
Section 10-5 - System Periodic Maintenance
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-5-2-2 Peripheral/Option Checks
If any peripherals or options are not part of the system configuration, the check can be omitted. Refer to the User Manual for a list of approved peripherals/options.
Table 10-6
Step
1 2 3 4 5 7 8
GE Approved Peripheral/Hardware Option Functional Checks

Description
Item
VCR
Verify record/playback capabilities of the VCR. Clean heads and covers if necessary.
B/W Printer Verify hardcopy output of the B/W video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. Color Printer Verify hardcopy output of the Color video page printer. Clean heads and covers if necessary. DICOM InSite/iLinq Footswitch ECG Verify that DICOM is functioning properly. Send an image to a DICOM device. Verify that InSite is functioning properly. Ensure two-way remote communications. (Warranty & Contract Customers only) Verify that the footswitch is functioning as programed. Clean as necessary. Verify basic operation with customer
10-5-3
10-5-3-1
Input Power
Mains Cable Inspection Table 10-7 Mains Cable Inspection
Description
Step
1 2 3 4
Item
Unplug Cord Disconnect the mains cable from the wall and system. Inspect Verify Verify Inspect it and its connectors for damage of any kinds. Verify that the LINE, NEUTRAL and GROUND wires are properly attached to the terminals, and that no strands may cause a short circuit. Inlet connector retainer is functional.
10-5-4
10-5-4-1
Cleaning
General Cleaning
Table 10-8
Step
1 2
General Cleaning
Description
Item
Console
Use a fluid detergent in warm water on a soft, damp cloth to carefully wipe the entire system. Be careful not to get the cloth too wet so that moisture does not enter the console.
Probe Holder Clean probe holders. (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel).
10 - 7
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-5-4-2 Air Filter Cleaning
Table 10-9
Step
1 2 3
Air Filter Cleaning - frequency varies with your environment

Description
Item
Remove Filter Cover Clean Filter Install Filter
Refer to Chapter 8 for air filter location and removal instructions The filters can be cleaned in sprinkling water, or they can be dusted with a vacuum cleaner. If the filter is metal wash and/or vacuum. If the filter is fiber or plastic vacuum or replace Install the clean filter.
NOTE:
For your convenience or of the air filter is too dirty, replacement filters are available. Refer to Chapter 9 for the air filter replacement part number.
10-5-5
Physical Inspection
Table 10-10 Physical Checks

Step
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Item
Labeling
Description
Verify that all system labeling is present and in readable condition.
Scratches & Dents Inspect the console for dents, scratches or cracks. Control Panel Control Panel Movement Inspect keyboard and control panel. Note any damaged or missing items. Verify ease of control panel (Operator I/O Panel) movement in all acceptable directions. Ensure that it latches in position as required.
Wheels & Brakes Check all wheels and casters for wear and verify operation of foot brake, to stop the unit from moving, and release mechanism. Check all wheel locks and wheel swivel locks for proper operation. Cables & Connectors Shielding & Covers External I/O Op Panel Lights Monitor Light External Microphone Check all internal cable harnesses and connectors for wear and secure connector seating. Pay special attention to footswitch assembly and probe strain or bend reliefs. Check to ensure that all EMI shielding, internal covers, air flow panels and screws are in place. Missing covers and hardware could cause EMI/RFI problems while scanning. Check all connectors for damage and verify that the labeling is good. Check for proper operation of all operator panel and TCG lights. Check for proper operation of any monitor lights and/or Check for proper operation of any external microphones by recording an audio test.
10 - 8
Section 10-5 - System Periodic Maintenance
10-5-6
Optional Diagnostic Checks

To complete the PM checks, access the diagnostic software as described in Chapters 5 or 7. View the error logs and run desired diagnostics.
10-5-6-1
View the Logs 1.) Review the system error log for any problems. 2.) Check the temperature log to see if there are any trends that could cause problems in the future.
10-5-7
10-5-7-1
Probe Maintenance
Probe Related Checks
Table 10-11 Probe Related Checks

Step
1 2
Item
Probe Holder Probes
Description
Clean probe holders. (they may need to be soaked to remove excess gel). Thoroughly check the system probe connectors and remove dust from inside the connector sockets if necessary. Visually check for bent, damaged or missing pins
10-5-7-2
Basic Probe Care The system user manuals and various probe handling cards provide a complete description of probe care, maintenance, cleaning and disinfection. Ensure that you are completely familiar with the proper care of GE probes. Ultrasound probes can be easily damaged by improper handling. See the User Manual and probe care cards for more details. Failure to follow these precautions can result in serious injury and equipment damage. Failure to properly handle or maintain a probe may also void its warranty. Any evidence of wear indicates the probe cannot be used. Do a visual check of the probe pins and system sockets before plugging in a probe. TEE and Interoperative probes often have special considerations and individual probe user manuals. For TEE and Interoperative probes also refer to their separate user manuals.
10-5-7-3
Basic Probe Cleaning Refer to the Users Manual for details on probe cleaning.
CAUTION To help protect yourself from blood borne diseases, wear approved disposable gloves. These
are made of nitrile derived from vegetable starch to prevent allergic latex reactions.
CAUTION Failure to follow the prescribed cleaning or disinfection procedures will void the probes
warranty. DO NOT soak or wipe the lens with any product not listed in the User Manual. Doing so could result in irreparable damage to the probe. Follow care instructions that came with the probe.
CAUTION Disinfect a defective probe before you return it. Be sure to tag the probe as being disinfected.
10 - 9
Section 10-6 Using a Phantom

See the Basic User Manual Customer Maintenance for information on using a phantom and quality assurance tests.
Section 10-7 Electrical Safety Tests

10-7-1 Safety Test Overview
The electrical safety tests in this section are based on and conform to NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. They are intended for the electrical safety evaluation of cord-connected, electrically operated, patient care equipment. If additional information is needed, refer to the NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 documents.
WARNING
THE USER MUST ENSURE THAT THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS ARE PERFORMED AT LEAST EVERY 12 MONTHS ACCORDING TO THE REQUIREMENTS OF THE PATIENT SAFETY STANDARD IEC-EN 60601-1. ONLY TRAINED PERSONS ARE ALLOWED TO PERFORM THE SAFETY INSPECTIONS MENTIONED ABOVE.
CAUTION To avoid electrical shock, the unit under test must not be connected to other electrical
equipment. Remove all interconnecting cables and wires. The unit under test must not be contacted by users or patients while performing these tests.
CAUTION Possible risk of infection. Do not handle soiled or contaminated probes and other components
that have been in patient contact. Follow appropriate cleaning and disinfecting procedures before handling the equipment.
Test the system, peripherals and probes for leakage current. Excessive leakage current can cause injury or death in sensitive patients. High leakage current can also indicate degradation of insulation and a potential for electrical failure. Do not use probes or equipment having excessive leakage current. To minimize the risk that a probe may shock someone the customer should: Not use a probe that is cracked or damaged in any way Check probe leakage current: * * * once a year on surface probes twice a year on endocavitary probes whenever probe damage is suspected
10 - 10
Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom
10-7-2
GEMS Leakage Current Limits

The following limits are summarized for NFPA 99 (For USA) and IEC 60601-1 Medical Equipment Safety Standards. These limits are GEMS standards and in some cases are lower than the above standards listed.
Table 10-12 Chassis Leakage Current LimitsAccessible Metal Surfaces

Country
USA Other
Normal Condition
N/A 0.1 mA
Open Ground
0.3 mA 0.5 mA
Reverse Polarity
0.3 mA 0.5 mA
Open Neutral
N/A 0.5 mA
Table 10-13 Type BF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Non-Conductive (Floating) Surface and Cavity Probes
Country
USA Other
Normal Condition
0.05 mA 0.1 mA
Open Ground
0.05 mA 0.5 mA
Reverse Polarity
0.05 mA 0.5 mA
Open Neutral
0.05 mA 0.5 mA
*Mains Applied
N/A 5.0 mA
Table 10-14 Type CF Applied Part Leakage Current Limits - Surgical Probes and ECG Connections
Country
USA Other
Normal Condition
0.01 mA 0.01 mA
Open Ground
0.05mA 0.05 mA
Reverse Polarity
0.05 mA 0.05 mA
Open Neutral
N/A 0.05 mA
*Mains Applied
0.025 mA 0.05 mA
NOTE:
*Mains Applied refers to the sink leakage test where mains (supply) voltage is applied to the part to determine the amount of current that will pass (or sink) to ground if a patient contacted mains voltage. The following tests are performed at the factory and should be performed at the site. These tests are: grounding continuity, chassis leakage current, probe leakage current, and ECG leakage current. All measurements are made with an electrical safety analyzer.
10 - 11
10-7-3
Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada

Test all outlets in the area for proper grounding and wiring arrangement by plugging in the neon outlet tester and noting the combination of lights that are illuminated. Any problems found should be reported to the hospital immediately and the receptacle should not be used.
Figure 10-1 Typical Alternate Outlet Tester NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the Neutral (grounded supply) conductor and the Grounding (protective earth) conductor are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
10-7-4
Grounding Continuity
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. The patient must not be contacted to the equipment during this test
Measure the resistance from the third pin of the attachment plug to the exposed metal parts of the case. The ground wire resistance should be less than 0.2 ohms. Reference the procedure in the IEC 601-1.1.
Figure 10-2 Ground Continuity Test 10 - 12 Section 10-6 - Using a Phantom
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-7-4-1 Meter Procedure Follow these steps to test the ground wire resistance. 1.) Turn the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO unit OFF.
2.) Plug the unit into the meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the black chassis cable into the meter's CHASSIS connector and attach the black chassis cable clamp to an exposed metal part of the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO unit. 4.) Set the meter's FUNCTION switch to the RESISTANCE position. 5.) Set the meter's POLARITY switch to the OFF (center) position. 6.) Measure and record the ground wire resistance.
10 - 13
10-7-5
10-7-5-1
Chassis Leakage Current Test

Definition This test measures the current that would flow in a grounded person who touched accessible metal parts of the bedside station if the ground wire should break. The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit On and Off, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading.
CAUTION Electric Shock Hazard. When the meter's ground switch is OPEN, don't touch the unit! CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
10-7-5-2
Generic Procedure The test verifies the isolation of the power line from the chassis. The testing meter is connected from accessible metal parts of the case to ground. Measurements should be made with the unit ON and OFF, with the power line polarity Normal and Reversed. Record the highest reading of current.
Figure 10-3 Set Up for Chassis Source Leakage Current, IEC 601-1 Clause 19 - Continuos Leakage Currents and Patient, Auxiliary Currents When using the Microguard or a similar test instrument, its power plug may be inserted into the wall outlet and the equipment under test is plugged into the receptacle on the panel of the meter. This places the meter in the grounding conductor and the current flowing from the case to ground will be indicated in any of the current ranges. The maximum allowable limit for chassis source leakage is shown in Table 10-12. 7.) Follow the test conditions described for respective test points shown in Table 10-15
.
Table 10-15 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition

TEST
1
CONDITION
Mounting screw for probe receptacle
10 - 14
VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL Table 10-15 Chassis Leakage Current Test Condition
TEST
2 3 4 5 Wheel support
CONDITION
Mounting screw for CRT housing Mounting screw for peripheral plugged into unit Mounting screw for other peripheral powered by unit
8.) Keep a record of the results with other hard copies of PM data kept on site.
10 - 15
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-7-5-3 Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in Table 10-12. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-16 Typical Data Sheet for Chassis Source Leakage Current
Tester Polarity Switch Tester Neutral Test 1 or Ground Probe Switch Connector Test 2 Wheel Test 3 CRT Optional Test 4 Optional Test 5
Unit Power
Enter Name of tested peripheral here: ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF NORM NORM REV REV NORM NORM REV REV OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED
10-7-6
10-7-6-1
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Ground Definition This test measures the current which would flow to ground from any of the isolated ECG leads. The meter simulates a patient who is connected to the monitoring equipment and is grounded by touching some other grounded surface. Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the ultrasound console Off and On. For each combination the operating controls, such as the lead switch, should be operated to find the worst case condition.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity when the unit is powered ON. Be sure
to turn the unit power OFF before switching the polarity using the POLARITY switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged.
10 - 16
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-7-6-2 Generic Procedure
Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the operating controls such as the lead switch should be operated to find the worst case condition.
The connection is at service entrance or on the supply side of a separately derived system H (Black) POWER OUTLET
Appliance power switch (use both "off" and "on" positions) Polarity reversing switch (use both positions) H N
Patient lead selector switch (if any) (activated as required) Patient connected leads
Appliance
N (White) G G (Green)
Internal circuitry
Between each patient lead and ground
Building ground Grounding contact switch (use in both "open" and "closed" positions) Current meter
Insulating surface
H = Hot N = Neutral (grounded) G = Grounding conductor
Figure 10-4 Test Circuit for Measuring Non-Isolated Patient Leads
Table 10-17
ECG Power
ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
Testing Power Conditions

Meters Polarity Switch
NORM NORM REVERSE REVERSE NORM NORM REVERSE REVERSE
Meters Neutral Switch

CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN
10-7-7
Isolated Patient Lead (Source) LeakageLead to Lead

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meters function selector to the LEAD-LEAD position. Select and test each of the five ECG lead positions (except ALL) on the LEAD selector, testing each to the power condition combinations found in the table. Record the highest leakage current measured.
10 - 17
10-7-8
Isolated Patient Lead (Sink) Leakage-Isolation Test

Reference the procedure in the IEC 60601-1. When using the Dale 600, switch the meters function selector to the LEAD-ISO. Select the ALL position on the lead selector. Depress the rocker switch to ISO TEST to test lead isolation.
CAUTION Line voltage is applied to the ECG leads during this test. To avoid possible electric shock
hazard, the system being tested must not be touched by patients, users or anyone while the ISO TEST switch is depressed.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to test each lead individually or power condition combinations as required in previous tests.
10 - 18
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-7-8-1 Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the value shown in the table below. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate.
Table 10-18 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

Maximum Allowance Limit AC Power Source
Patient Lead to Ground Leakage Current Test and Patient Lead to Lead Leakage Current Test 115V 220/240V
GROUND OPEN
10uA 500uA
GROUND CLOSED
10uA 10uA
Table 10-19 Maximum Allowance Limit for ECG Leakage Current

AC Power Source
Patient Lead Isolation Current Test 115V 220/240V
Maximum Allowance Limit

20uA 5mA
Table 10-20 Typical Data Sheet for ECG Leakage Current

ECG Power
Tester Polarity Switch

NORM REVERSE NORM REVERSE NORM REVERSE NORM REVERSE
Tester Ground Switch

CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN CLOSED CLOSED OPEN OPEN
Tester Lead Selector RL RA LA LL C
10 - 19
10-7-9
10-7-9-1
Probe Leakage Current Test

Definition This test measures the current that would flow to ground from any of the probes through a patient who is being scanned and becomes grounded by touching some other grounded surface.
10-7-9-2
Generic Procedure Measurements should be made with the ground open and closed, with power line polarity normal and reversed, and with the unit Off and On. For each combination, the probe must be active to find the worst case condition.
POLARITY REVERSING SWITCH H (BLACK) CONSOLE PROBE
POWER OUTLET
N (WHITE)
G (GREEN) MOMENTARY SWITCH LEAKAGE TEST METER
Figure 10-5 Set Up for Probe Leakage Current NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage current, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement.
10 - 20
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-7-9-3 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure
Figure 10-6 No Meter Probe Adapter Procedure Follow these steps to test each transducer for leakage current. 1.) Turn the Vivid 7 / Vivid 7 PRO unit OFF. 2.) Plug the unit into the test meter, and the meter into the tested AC wall outlet. 3.) Plug the external probe into the meter's EXTERNAL connector. 4.) Set the meter's FUNCTION switch to EXTERNAL position. 5.) Connect the probe for test with the connector of the console. 6.) Add the saline probe and the imaging area of the probe into the saline bath. 7.) Have unit power ON for the first part; turn it OFF for the second half. 8.) Depress the ISO TEST rocker switch and record the highest current reading. 9.) Follow the test conditions described in Table 10-21 for every transducer. 10.)Keep a record of the results with other hand copies of PM data.
10 - 21
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 10-7-9-4 Data Sheet for Transducer Source Leakage Current
The test passes when all readings measure less than the values shown in Table 10-13 and Table 1014. Record all data on the PM Inspection Certificate.
CAUTION Equipment damage possibility. Never switch the Polarity and the status of Neutral when the unit
is powered ON. Be sure to turn the unit power OFF before switching them using the POLARITY switch and/or the NEUTRAL switch. Otherwise, the unit may be damaged
Table 10-21 Typical Data Sheet For Transducer Source Leakage Current
Transducer Tested: Unit Power
Tester Power Polarity Switch

NORM NORM REV REV NORM NORM REV REV
Tester GROUND or NUETRAL Switch

OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED OPEN CLOSED
Measurement
10 - 22
Section 10-8 When There's Too Much Leakage Current...

CHASSIS FAILS
Check the ground on the power cord and plug for continuity. Ensure the ground is not broken, frayed, or intermittent. Replace any defective part. Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage. Test the wall outlet; verify it is grounded and is free of other wiring abnormalities. Notify the user or owner to correct any deviations. As a work around, check the other outlets to see if they could be used instead. NOTE: No outlet tester can detect the condition where the white neutral wire and the green grounding wire are reversed. If later tests indicate high leakage currents, this should be suspected as a possible cause and the outlet wiring should be visually inspected.
PROBE FAILS
Test the probe in another connector to isolate if the fault lies with the probe or the scanner. NOTE: Each probe will have some amount of leakage, dependent on its design. Small variations in probe leakage currents are normal from probe to probe. Other variations will result from differences in line voltage and test lead placement. The maximum allowable leakage current for body surface contact probe differs from inter-cavity probe. Be sure to enter the correct probe type in the appropriate space on the check list. If excessive leakage current is slot dependent, inspect the system connector for bent pins, poor connections, and ground continuity. If the problem remains with the probe, replace the probe.
PERIPHERAL FAILS
Tighten all grounds. Ensure star washers are under all ground studs. Inspect wiring for bad crimps, poor connections, or damage.
STILL FAILS
If all else fails, begin isolation by removing the probes, external peripherals, then the on board ones, one at a time while monitoring the leakage current measurement.
NEW UNIT
If the leakage current measurement tests fail on a new unit and if situation can not be corrected, submit a Safety Failure Report to document the system problem. Remove unit from operation.
ECG FAILS
Inspect cables for damage or poor connections
10 - 23
PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE
Customer Name: System Type Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: Frequency: System ID: Model Number: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Scan Format*: Dispatch Number / Date Performed: Serial Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Model Number: Warranty/Contract/HBS Manufacture Date: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number: Serial Number:
* Scan Format: Phased Array, Linear Array, Curved Array, Mechanical Array or Other
FUNCTIONAL CHECKS
Functional Check (if applicable)
B-Mode Function Doppler Modes Function CF-Mode Function M-Mode Function Applicable Software Options Applicable Hardware Options Control Panel Monitor Touch Panel Measurement Accuracy GE Approved Peripherals
PHYSICAL INSPECTION AND CLEANING

OK? or N/A Physical Inspection and Cleaning (if applicable)
Console Monitor Touch Panel Air Filter Probe Holders External I/O Wheels, Brakes & Swivel Locks Cables and Connectors GE Approved Peripherals (VCR, CD-R, MOD, Printers)
Inspect
Clean
COMMENTS:___________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________

10 - 24 Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
ELECTRICAL SAFETY
Electrical Test Performed
Outlet (correct ground &wiring config.) System Ground Continuity Chassis Source Leakage Current - Probe Chassis Source Leakage Current - Wheel Chassis Source Leakage Current - CRT Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Ground) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Lead to Lead) Patient Lead Source Leakage (Isolation) Peripheral 1 Leakage Current Peripheral 1Ground Continuity Peripheral 2 Leakage Current Peripheral 2Ground Continuity Peripheral 3 Leakage Current Peripheral 3Ground Continuity
Max Value Allowed
Value Measured
OK?
Comments
PROBES Probe Number (from previous page)

Probe 1: Probe 2: Probe 3: Probe 4: Probe 5: Probe 6: Probe 7: Probe 8: Probe 9:
Max Value Allowed
Max Value Measured
OK?
Comments
Final Check. All system covers are in place. System scans with all probes as expected. Accepted by: ______________________________________________________________________
10 - 25
10 - 26
Section 10-8 - When There's Too Much Leakage Current...
INDEX
A
AC Power Replacement Procedure, 8-34 AC Transformer Replacement Procedure, 8-31 Acoustic Noise Output, 3-8 AE Title, 3-50 Air Filter Cleaning, 10-8 Application Turnover Check List, 4-63 Archiving and Loading Presets, 4-12 Archiving Presets to an MO Disk, 4-12 Audio Doppler, 5-7 Available Probes, 3-32 Average Installation Time, 3-1 Components and Functions, 5-1 Configuration, 3-21 Connecting Laptop Computer to the Ultrasound Unit, 7-4 Connectivity, 3-35 Setup, 3-37 Console Environmental Requirements, 2-2 Mechanical Checks, 4-61 Contact Information, 1-38 Conventions Conventions Used in Book, 1-8 Cooling, 2-2 Covers and Bumpers - Overview, 8-2 Customer Assistance, 1-38
B
Back End Processor, 5-14, , 5-74 Theory, 5-14 Back Plane (Motherboard), 5-92 Battery (UPS) Operation, 5-19 Beamformer Board(s), BF-64, 5-53 Beamformer Calibration, 7-60 Beamformer Calibration -- see DC Offset Calibration, 7-29 Brake Pedal Replacement Procedure, 8-51 Brake Pedal and Direction Lock Assembly Replacement Procedures, 8-53 Brakes Check, 4-62 Bumpers and Covers - Overview, 8-2
D
Damage in Transportation, -v Dangerous Procedure Warnings, 1-36 Data Buffer, 5-6 from Mid Processors, 5-8 from VCR, 5-8 Data Sheet for - Chassis Source Leakage Current, 10-16 - ECG Leakage Current, 10-19 - Transducer Source Leakage Current, 10-22 Date and Time Adjustments, 3-25 DC Offset calibration, 7-29 DC Power, 5-37 Replacement Procedure, 8-36 Default DICOM Setup in Configuration Screen, 3-52 Department Name, 3-24 Depth, 3-8 Diagnostics/Troubleshooting, 7-1 DICOM, 3-49 DICOM Option Pre-Installation Requirements, 2-10 DICOM Servers Set Up, 3-49 Digital Signal Processor DSP, 5-7 Direction Lock Check, 4-62 Pedal Replacement Procedure, 8-52 Disconnect Probe, 3-13 Display Platform Mechanical Checks, 4-61 Doppler Doppler Processing, 5-6 DSP Digital Signal Processor, 5-7 Index - 1
C
Certified Electrical Contractor Statement, -vi Chain Signal Chain, TX/RLB/RX/BF Test, 7-64 Chassis Leakage Current Test, 10-14 Check the Connection to the DICOM Server, 3-53 Circuit Boards, 5-44 Cleaning, 10-7 Color Flow Processing, 5-6 Color Inkjet Printer, 3-32 Color Mode Overview, 4-34 Common Diagnostics, 7-44 Common Service Interface, 5-101 Completing the Installation, 3-8
Index
VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL Cineloop Check, 4-52 Color Mode Checks, 4-28 Contrast Checks, 4-46 Doppler Mode Checks, 4-34 ECG Check, 4-51 M Mode Checks, 4-24 Measurements and Multi Image Checks, 4-47 Multi Image Checks, 4-49 Performance Tests, 4-16 Probe/Connectors Check, 4-50 Stress Echo, 4-46 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI) Checks, 4-40
E
Electrical - Needs, 2-3 - Safety, 1-13 - Safety Tests, 10-10 - Specifications, 3-9 Electrostatic Discharge Warning, 1-37 EMC, 1-37 EMI - Description, 1-37 - Limitations, 2-4 - Protection, 3-8 Enter Location, 3-24 Environmental Conditions Probes, 2-6 ESD, 1-37 Establish Network Connection to Hospitals Network, 3-49 Ethernet - Signal, 5-9 - Switch Connections, 3-35 External I/O, 5-87 External I/O to Rear Connector Panel, 5-9 External Peripherals, 5-32
G
GEMS Leakage Current Limits, 10-11 General Cleaning, 10-7 General Procedures, 4-2 Global Service User Interface (GSUI), 5-102 Going Offline, 3-55 Grounding Continuity, 10-12
H F
Facility Needs, 2-7 Filter Replacement Procedure, 8-7 Filter Cover Replacement Procedure, 8-6 Forced Shut Down, 8-25 Format a CD-R disk, 4-11 Format an MO Disk, 4-11 Formatting a Removable Media, 4-11 Front Bumper Replacement Procedure, 8-50 Front Cover Replacement Procedure, 8-5 Front End - Alignment, 7-65 - Alignment, when to do, 6-3 - Calibration, 7-60 - Controller Board, FEC-2, 5-56 - Description, 5-4 - FE Bus Description, 5-4 - FE Modules Parts List, 9-11 - Processor, 5-4 - Subsystem, 5-12 Front Wheels Replacement Procedure, 8-45 Frontend Alignment -- see DC Offset Calibration, 7-29 FRU Replacement Procedures, 8-31 Functional Checks, 4-1 2D Mode (B mode) Checks, 4-17 Backend Processor Checks, 4-56 Basic Controls, 4-14 Index - 2 Hardware/Software Versions, 1-4 Hazard Icons, 1-9 Heat Dissipation, 2-2 Height, 3-8 High Voltage Power Supply, 5-5 Hospital and Department Name, 3-24 Hospital Network Connection - to EchoPAC PC Workstation, 3-36 How often should PMs be performed?, 10-2 HP Deskjet 990 Cxi Network Printer, 3-32 Human Safety, 1-12 Humidity, 2-2
I
iLinq, 5-101 Image Port, 5-8 Image Port 2 Board, 5-8 Image Port Board (IMPORT), 5-8 IMP2 Board, 5-70 Input Power, 10-7 Inrush Current, 2-3 Installation, 3-1, , 3-56 Paperwork, 3-56 Warnings, 3-2 Interconnect Cabling, 5-90 Internal I/O, 5-24, , 5-79 and Peripheral Control, 5-9 connections, 5-25 Outputs, 5-29 Index
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 Internal Storage Devices, 5-20 Introduction to this manual, 1-1
VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL Off-board Peripherals, 3-32 Omissions & Errors, -vi On site Configuration, 3-33 On-board Peripherals, 3-32, , 5-32 Operating Temperature, 2-2 Optional Peripherals/Peripheral Connection, 3-32 Options (Software) Configuration, 3-33 Outlet Test - Wiring Arrangement - USA & Canada, 10-12
K
Keeping Records, 10-2 Keyboard Mechanical Checks, 4-61
L
Labeling Removable Media, 4-10 Labels Locations, 1-14 Language - Precautions, -iii - Selection, 3-26 Leakage Current Limits, 10-11 Leakage Current. Too Much!, 10-23 Lighting, 2-2 List of Abbrevations, 9-2 List of Effected Pages (Revision), -viii Loading and Archiving Presets, 4-12 Loading Presets from an MO Disk, 4-13 Local Network Connection - to EchoPAC PC Workstation, 3-36 Location Enter Location, 3-24 Lower Rear Cover Replacements Procedure, 8-8
P
PAL Video System Selection, 3-29 Parts List Front End Modules, 9-11 Patient I/O, 5-23, , 5-78 PC Diagnostics, 7-47 PCVIC Card, 5-19 Performing a Study, 3-55 Periodic Maintenance, 10-1 Schedule, 10-2 Peripheral/Option Checks, 10-7 Peripherals, 5-32 Checks, 4-57 Connection, 3-32 Off-board Peripherals, 3-32 On-board Peripherals, 3-32 Phased and Linear Array Front End Description, 5-4 Physical Connection, 3-35 Dimensions, 3-8 Inspection, 3-8, , 10-8 Physio (Patient I/O), 5-23 Ping, 3-53 DICOM ping, 3-53 Hardware ping, 3-53 Pipelink Bus Description, 5-5 Plastic Parts - Replacement Procedures, 8-2 Plastic Parts Replacement Procedures, 8-2 PM INSPECTION CERTIFICATE, 10-24 Power Shut Down, 4-5 Power Stability Requirements, 2-4 Power Transients, 2-4 Voltage Dop-out, 2-4 Power Supply - Adjustments, 6-1 - Battery Pack Replacement Procedure, 8-54 - Test Procedure, 4-64 Power Transients, 2-4 Power-up Procedures Voltage Settings, 3-9 Pre-Installation, 2-1 Requirements DICOM, 2-10 Index Index - 3
M
Mains Cable Inspection, 10-7 Major Sub-Systems in Vivid 7, 5-11 Manpower Requirements, 2-6 Mechanical - Functions Checks, 4-61 - Safety, 1-12 Mechanical Safety, 1-12 Memory Board, 5-8 Mid Processors, 5-13 Minimal Floor Plan Suggestion, 2-9 Modem, 5-33, , 5-93 Monitor Adjustments, 6-2 Motherboard (Back Plane), 5-92 Move Images (SW.V.2.0.x), 8-13
N
Network Printer, 3-32 Networking Pre-installation Requirements, 2-10 NTSC Video System Selection, 3-29
GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02 Prepearing Unit for Installation, 3-8 Probe Connector Cleaning, 10-9 Disconnect Probe, 3-13 Leakage Current Test, 10-20 Maintenance, 10-9 Probes, 3-32 Disconnecting, 4-51 Environmental Requirements, 2-6 Product Icons, 1-10 Product Locator Installation Card, 3-56 Purchaser Responsibilities, 2-7
VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL - Considerations, 1-12 Safety Considerations, 1-12 Safety.- Precaution Messages, 1-8 Scanners Network Information, 3-39 SDP Spectrum Doppler Processor Board - Description, 5-7 Select Video Format, PAL or NTSC, 3-29 Service Adjustments, 6-1 Service Home Page, 7-5 Service Login to Global Service User Interface, 5-102 Service Screen, 3-28 Set Up Connection to DICOM Server in Network, 3-49 Set up TCP/IP address on Vivid 7, 3-49 Setting DICOM Server as Default Dataflow, 3-54 Set-up of DICOM Server in Vivid 7s Configuration Screens, 3-50 Side Covers Replacement Procedure, 8-3 Site - Circuit Breaker, 2-3 - Log, 4-65 - Power Outlets, 2-3 - Requirements Desirable Features, 2-9 Software - Loading, 8-9 - Record Option Key Settings (SW.V.2.0.x), 8-16 - Software Option Installation, 3-33 - Software Options Configuration, 3-33 - Software/Hardware Revisions, 1-4 - System Software Version, 8-23 Software Options, 7-31 Special Tools, Supplies and Equipment, 10-4 Spectrum - Analysis, 5-7 - Spectrum Doppler Processor Board Description, 5-7, , 5-66 Standard Hazard Icons, 1-9 Start System Test, 7-59 Storage temperature, 2-2 Switching OFF the Unit, 3-17 System - Block Diagram, 5-10 - Configuration, 3-22 - Doesnt Boot, 7-67 - History, 1-4 - Maintenance, 10-5 - Manufacture, 1-39 - Overview, 1-2 - Periodic Maintenance, 10-5 - Requirements Verification, 3-8 - Software Version, 8-23 - Specifications, 3-8 - Tests, 7-61 Systems Covered by this Manual, 1-2 Index
Q
Quality Assurance, 10-2
R
Rear Cover, Lower Replacement Procedure, 8-8 Rear Wheels Replacement Procedure, 8-40 Receiver Board - RX Test, 7-63 - RX-128, 5-50 Receiving and Unpacking the Equipment, 3-3 Record - SW Option Key Settings (SW.V.2.0.x), 8-16 - TCP/IP Settings (SW.2.0.x)(, 8-19 Reject Optimizing 2D, 4-18 Relay Board - Description, 5-45 - Test, 7-64 Remote Archives Network Information Setup, 3-40 Renewal Parts, 9-1 Replacement Procedure, 8-1, , 8-31 AC Power, 8-34 AC Transformer, 8-31 Filter, 8-7 Filter Cover, 8-6 Required Facility Needs, 2-8 Revision - History, -vii - List of Effected Pages, -viii RF- & Tissue Processor - Description, 5-6 - RFT Board Description, 5-62 RF Processing, 5-6 RFT see RF- & Tissue Processor, 5-6
S
Safety Index - 4
T
TCP/IP - Record Settings (SW.V.2.0.x), 8-19 - Set-up Screen, 3-37 Theory, 5-1 Time Adjustments, 3-25 Time and Manpower Requirements, 2-6 Time for Settlement, 2-2 Tissue Processing, 5-6 Top Console, 5-31 Trace Interface, 5-7 Transducer Bus Boards, XD BUS Boards, 5-61 Transmitter Board, TX128, 5-47 Transportation Damage, -v Troubleshooting, 7-67 TX Power - Description, 5-41 - Replacement Procedure, 8-38
V
VCR - Checks, 4-58 - Counter Check, 4-58 Version, 8-23 Video - Printers Checks, 4-57 - Select PAL or NTSC format, 3-29 - Specifications, 5-95 Vivid 7 Block Diagram, 5-3 Voltage - Drop-out, 2-4 - Settings, 3-9
W
Wall motion filter see LVR Warnings and Cautions, 1-12 Weight with Monitor and Peripherals, 3-8 When Theres Too Much Leakage Current..., 10-23 Why do Periodic Maintenance, 10-2 Width of Vivid 7 and Vivid 7 PRO, 3-8 Worksheet for DICOM Network Information, 2-11
U
Unit Power Plug, 2-3 Units of Measure, 3-27 Unpacking the Equipment, 3-3 UPS Battery Operation, 5-19 Using - a Phantom, 10-10 - CD-R Drive, 4-9, , 4-10 - Magneto Optical Disk Drive, 4-9
Index
Index - 5
Index - 6
Index
GE Medical Systems
GE Medical Systems: Telex 3797371 P.O. Box 414; Milwaukee, Wisconsin 53201, U.S.A. (Asia, Pacific, Latin America, North America) GE Ultraschall:Tel: +49 (0) 212 28 02 208 Deutschland GmbH & Co KG Beethovenstrabe 239, Postfach 11 05 60 D-42655 Solingen, Germany

GE Vivid 7 - Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GE Vivid 7 - Service Manual

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GE Vivid 7 - Service Manual

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

GE Medical Systems

Copyright 2002 General Electric Co. All rights reserved

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT

OMISSIONS & ERRORS

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

REASON FOR CHANGE

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

List of Effected Pages

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

3-8 3-8 3-9 3 - 10 3 - 10 3 - 11 3 - 11 3 - 12 3 - 12 3 - 13 3 - 14 3 - 17 3 - 17 3 - 21 3 - 22 3 - 28 3 - 32 3 - 32 3 - 32

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 4 Functional Checks

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 5 Components and Functions (Theory)

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

5 - 97 5 - 97 5 - 97 5 - 98 5 - 100 5 - 100 5 - 101 5 - 101 5 - 101 5 - 102

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 6 Service Adjustments

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67 Console Troubleshooting Trees . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 67

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 8 Replacement Procedures

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 9 Renewal Parts

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

CHAPTER 10 Periodic Maintenance

When There's Too Much Leakage Current... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 23 IndeX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index - 1

VIVID 7 / VIVID 7 PRO SERVICE MANUAL

GE MEDICAL SYSTEMS DIRECTION FC091194, REVISION 02